ML17181A395

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
Exam Final Items 2B - Delay Release
ML17181A395
Person / Time
Site: Brunswick  Duke Energy icon.png
Issue date: 06/30/2017
From:
Duke Energy Corp
To:
References
Download: ML17181A395 (565)


Text

DUKE ENERGY. Run 1 BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION OPERATIONS TRAINING INITIAL LICENSED OPERATOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOWER POWER, REMOVE 230KV LINE FROM SERVICE, ROD DRIFT, ADHR PP TRIP, RECIRC LOOP FLOW FAILURE, HDD PP TRIP, ATWS, SLC MODE SWITCH FAILURE, ARI FAIL TO RESET REVISION 0 Developer: Date: e7/t7/2O!6 Technical Review: Va% Date: 91/2120/6 Validators: Date: 09/06/16 4a Te Facility Representative: tâe Date: 09/221/6

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 2 of 80 REVISION

SUMMARY

o Scenario developed for 2016 NRC Exam.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev.0 Page 3 of 80 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE 4 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

5 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS 6 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA 6 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES 7 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 8 7.0 INTERVENTIONS 10 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES 12 ATTACHMENT 1 - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment 49 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover 80

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page4of8o 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE Event MaIf. No. Type* Event Description 1 R ATC

- Lower power to 850 MWe to remove 230 kV Line 30 2 N - BOP Remove 230 kV Line 30 from service RDOOIM C-ATC RodDrift 3 (26-11)

C CRS (TS)

K4526A C BOP

- ADHR Secondary pump trip 4

C-CRS (AOP)

C ATC

- Recirc Loop B Flow transmitter Failure 5

C-CRS (TS)

CFO89F C BOP

- Heater Drain Deaerator Pump Trip 6

C-CRS (AOP)

Small steam leak in DW results in an ATWS requiring 7 CAOO8F M terminate and prevent actions (RSP)(ATWS) 8 K2119A C SLC Mode Switch Failure 9 K2624A C Alternate Rod Insertion reset failure

  • (N)ormal (R)eactivity, (C)omponent or Instrument, (M)ajor

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev.0 1 Page 5of80 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

Event Description 1 After taking the watch the CRS will direct power reduced to 850 MWe.

2 The BOP will isolate 230 kV Line 30.

Control Rod 26-1 1 will start to drift in. The crew will enter OAOP-02.0 and take action lAW 2APP-A-05 (3-2). When the high temperature alarm is received Engineering will 3 report that scram times cannot be assured based on past history of the control rod.

Determine TS 3.1.3 condition Cl to insert the control rod in 3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> and C2 to disarm the control rod within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

After Tech Specs are addressed the Alternate Decay Heat Removal (ADHR)

Seconday pump will trip. AOP-38.0 will be entered The Recirc Loop B flow transmitter to APRM Channel 4 will fail wiscale resulting in a rod block and a trip input to each voter. The crew will respond per APPs and bypass 5 APRM 4. The APRM will be declared Inoperable perTS 3.3.1.1, Condition A and placed in trip within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. APRM TS Actions to be taken requires the APRM mode selector switch to be place in INOP lAW 001-18 A motor overload will occur on Heater Drain Pump 2A. The crew will reference APP

. 6 UA-06 1-7, Bus 2D 4KV Motor Ovid and determine which pump has the overload condition. The crew should start HDP 2C and secure HDP 2A. The crew may reference AOP-23.0.

A small steam leak in the DW results in rising Drywell pressure requiring a reactor 7 scram. An ATWS will occur, conditions will require terminate and prevent actions to be performed.

When SLC is initiated, the mode switch will fail and the pumps will not start. LEP-03 8

will be executed to inject the boron into the core.

Alternate Rod Insertion (ARI) will not reset, the crew will perform LEP-02 to drive 9 control rods into the core. When level is stabilized after terminating and preventing ARI will be repaired to allow the rods to be manually scrammed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 6 of 80 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS Critical Task #1 Prevent the automatic actuation of ADS (LL3) to prevent low pressure ECCS injection to the reactor.

Critical Task #2 Reduce reactor power/pressure to prevent exceeding Heat Capacity Temperature Limit (HCTL) 220

..i....r i1.1tt1iIi 210 4 - -- - UNSAFE ABOVE U

0 Lj SELECTED LINE w

200 zi:ETzJ 1.

190 D f::

180 Lii a 170 :L. f-) 025 FT

(-)1.2SFT U 160  %%

I. .  :-

(-) 2.50 FT 150 f-)3.25 FT 140 j SAFE BELOW (- ) 4.25 FT 130 ELECTED LINE

(-)5.5OFT 120 4.-

110  : -

100

..+/- 1 1,150 100 300 500 700 900 1,100 0 200 400 600 800 1,000 RPV PRESSURE (PSIG) 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF the scenario may be terminated.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page_7_of 80 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES NOTE: Refer to the most current revision of each Implementing Reference.

Number Title A-05, 3-2 ROD DRIFT OAOP-02.0 CONTROL ROD MALFUNCTION/MISPOSITION UA-18, 6-1 BUS E4 4KV MOTOR OVLD.

UA-01, 2-3 ADHR PRIMARY LOOP TROUBLE UA-01, 3-3 ADHR SECONDARY LOOP TROUBLE OAOP-38.O LOSS OF FUEL POOL COOLING A-06, 2-8 APRM UPSCALE A-06, 3-8 APRM UPSCALE TRIP/INOP A-06, 5-7 FLOW REF OFF NORMAL A-05, 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK A-05, 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED UA-5, 3-5 SBGT SYS B FAILURE UA-5, 4-6 SBGT SYS A FAILURE

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 8 of 80 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS list for

1. PERFORM TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 5, Check Simulator Exam Security.
2. RESET the Simulator to IC-il.
3. ENSURE the RWM is set up as required for the selected IC.
4. ENSURE appropriate keys have blanks in switches.
5. RESET alarms on SJAE, MSL, and RWM NUMACs.
6. ENSURE no rods are bypassed in the RWM.
7. PLACE all SPDS displays to the Critical Plant Variable display (#100).
8. ENSURE hard cards and flow charts are cleaned up
9. TAKE the SIMULATOR OUT OF FREEZE
10. LOAD Scenario File.

II. ALIGN the plant as follows:

Manipulation Ensure 20 TCC pump is in service on Unit One.

Bypass APRM 2 RCC Pump D in service for ADHR RCC Pump A in service for RBCCW

12. IF desired, take a SNAPSHOT and save into an available IC for later use.
13. PLACE a clearance on the following equipment.

Component Position APRM 2 Blue tag

14. INSTALL Protected Equipment sign age and UPDATE RTGB placard as follows:

Protected Equipment

1. 2A and 2B NSW pumps
2. 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D ROC Pump, and 20 Demin Transfer Pump.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOt SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 9 of 80

15. VERIFY OENP 24.5 Form 2 (Immediate Power Reduction Form) for IC-Il is in place.
16. ENSURE each Implementing References listed in Section 7 is intact and free of marks.
17. ENSURE all materials in the table below are in place and marked-up to the step identified.

Required Materials Marked up of 20P-50, Section 6.2.6

18. ADVANCE the recorders to prevent examinees from seeing relevant scenario details.
19. PROVIDE Shift Briefing sheet for the CRS.
20. VERIFY all actions contained in TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 4, Simulator Training Instructor Checklist, are complete.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page lOof8O 7.0 INTERVENTIONS TRIGGERS Trig Type ID 1 Malfunction RD0O1M [CONTROL ROD SLOW INSERTION DRIFT]

2 j Annunciator ZA512 [CRD HYD TEMP HIGH]

3 Trigger Command MFD:RD001M,26-11 4 Remote Function RD_RDELDIS [ELECTRICAL DISARM OF ROD]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DO Override Q4526AMW [RBCCW PMP D ADHR MODE]

5 DO Override Q4526LG4 [RBCCW PMP D OFF GJ Malfunction RPO11F [ATWS 4]

6 Remote Function CC_MODE [RBCCW/ADHR VALVE LINEUPS]

6 Remote Function CCMSS [RBCCW/ADHR PUMP MODE SELECTOR SWITCH]

7 Remote Function CC_PDV [RBCCW PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE]

8 Malfunction N1063F [RECIRC LOOP B XMIUER FAILURE]

9 Malfunction CF089F [HEATER DRAIN PUMP MOTOR WINDING FAULT]

10 Malfunction NBOO6F [MSL BRK BEFORE FLOW RESIRICTORJ 11 Remote Function EP_IAEOPJP - [BYPASS LL-3 GROUP I ISOL (SEP-10)]

Trig # Trigger Text 3 KM118EDN - [SCRAM TEST SWITCH 26-11] true deletes RDOO1M ANNUNCIATORS Override OVal AVaI Actime Dactime Trig Window Description Tagname 1-2 CRD HYD TEMP HIGH ZA512 ON ON OFF 2

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 11 of 80 MALFUNCTIONS taif Mult CUrreflt Thret Actime Dactime Trig Description CONTROL ROD SLOW INSERTION 1 RDOO1M 26-11 False True N1063F APRM 4 RECIRC LOOP B XMIUER FAILURE 0.00 125.00 8 NBOO6F A MSL BRK BEFORE FLOW RESTRICTOR 0.00 1.Oe-1 0:03:00 10 HEATER DRAIN PUMP MOTOR 9 CFO89F A False True WINDING FAULT RPO11F ATWS 4 False True 5 RPO0SF AUTO SCRAM DEFEAT True True NIO32F APRM 2 APRM FAILS LO ] True True REMOTES CUITeflt ThTt Actime Trig Remf Id Mult Id Description RD_RDELDIS 26-11 ELECTRICAL. DISARM OF ROD ARM DISARM 4 6

CC_MODE PUMP-A

[ RBCCW/ADHR VALVE LINEUPS RBCCW/ADHR PUMP MODE RBCCW ADHR CC MSS A RBCCW ADHR 6 SELECTOR SWITCH CC_PDV A_V38_V5114 RBCCW PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE 1.0000 1.Oe-01 7 CC_IACW4518 2CTBCCW PUMP UNIT ALIGNMENT 1 1 EP_IAEOP]P1 BYPASS LL-3 GROUP I SOC (SEP-10) OFF ON 11 PANEL OVERRIDES Position I Actual Override Actime Dactime Trig Tag ID Description K4526A RBCCW PUMP D OFF OFF/RESEST OFF ON 5 K4526A RBCCW PMP D AUTO AUTO OFF OFF 5 K4526A RBCCW PMP 0 ON ON ON OFF 5 Q4526LG4 RBCCW PMP D OFF G ON/OFF OFF OFF 5 Q4526AMW RBCCW PMP D ADHR MODE ON/OFF ON OFF 5 K2119A S/B LIQ PUMP A & B_______ PUMP_A OFF OFF K2119A S/BLIQPUMPA&B PUMP_A&B OFF OFF K2119A S/B CIQ PUMP A & B PUMP_B OFF OFF

  • K2624A CS-5562 ARI RESET OFF OFF K2625A CS-5560 ARI INOP OFF OFF

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 12of80 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES EVENT 1: LOWER POWER TO 850 MWE Simulator Operator Actions Ensure Monitored Parameters is open and Scenario Based Testing Variables are loaded.

Simulator Operator Role Play If asked as the NE, report that reactivity plan is to reduce power with recirc flow.

If asked as the NE, report that 850 MWe gross is 86% power and 65 Mlb/hr core flow Evaluator Notes Plant Response:

Objectives: SRO Directs power to be reduced to 850 MWe BOP Monitor the Plant RO Reduces power to 850 MWe.

Success Path: Power is lowered to 850 MWe Event Termination: When directed by the Lead Evaluator, go to Event 2.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 13 of 80 EVENT 1: LOWER POWER TO 850 MWE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response NOTES SRO Conduct shift turnover shift briefing.

Direct power to be reduced using recirc flow to

-850 MWe. (20P-02, Section 6.21)

Contacts chemistry for samples due to 15%

power change.

May contact Load dispatcher to inform of power decrease.

May conduct a brief (See Enclosure 1, page 62 for format of the brief.

Reduces reactor power using recirc lAW 20P-RO 02 Section 6.2.1 May null the DVM meter.

BOP Monitors the plant

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 14 of 80 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 166 Page 45 ot 250 6.2 Shutdown 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control

1. Contirm reactor recirculation pump in operation in accordance with Section 6.1.2 NOTE Recirculation Pump speed changes ate performed when directed by OGP-05.

Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes. Other operating procedures are used simultaneously with this procedure as directed by OGP-05, Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes C Speed changes are accomplished by depressing Lower Slow. Lower Medium, or Lower Fast pushbuttons The Lower Slow pushbutton changes Recfrc pump speed at 0.06%/decrement at 1 rpm/second The Lower Medium pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 0,28%/decrement at 5 rpm/second The Lower Fast pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 2.8%/decrement at 100rpm/second C

2. IF AT ANY TIME any ot the following conditions exist.

THEN enter 1AOP-04.0. Low Core Flow.{8.1.9}

  • Entry into Region A of Power to Flow Map
  • OPRM INOPERABLE AND any of the following O Entry into Region B of Power to Flow Map O Entry into 5% Buffer Region of Power to Flow Map O Entry into OPRM Enabled Region and indications of THI (Thermal Hydraulic Instability) exist

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 J Pagel5of8O REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 46 of 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

CAUTION

  • The OPRM System monitors LPRM5 for indication of thermal hydraulic instability (THI). When greater than or equal to 25% power and less than or equal to 60% recirculation flow, alarms and automatic trips are initiated upon detection of THI. Pump operations are governed by the limits of the applicable Power Flow Map, as specified in the COLR. {8. 1 .9} C
  • Entry into the 5% Buffer Region warrants increased monitoring of reactor instrumentation for signs of Thermal Hydraulic Instability. Time in the 5% Buffer Region presents additional risk and is rninimtzed.{8. 1.9) C
  • Wfth core flow less than 57.5 x 108 lbslhr, jet pump loop tlows are required within 10% (maximum indicated difference 6.0 x 108 lbslhr). With core flow greater than or equal to 57.5 x 10 lbsThr. jet pump loop flows are required within 5% (maximum indicated difference 3.0 x 108 lbs/br) C
  • When Recirc Pump speeds are less than 40%, decreasing speed using a Lower Fast pushbutton can result in a Speed Hold condition due to exceeding the regen torque limit C BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
3. IF desired to lower the speed of both recirculation pumps simultaneously.

THEN depress Recirc Master Control Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

4. IF desired to lower the speed of an individual recitculaon pump, THEN depress the Recirc VFD AC B) Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 16 of 80 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 47 ot 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeediPower Using individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

5. Confirm the following, as applicable:
  • Recirc Pump A(B) Speed Demand, Calculated Speed, and Actual Speed have lowered
  • Reactor power lowers
  • 632-R617(R613) [Recirc Pump A(B) Discharge Flowl lowers
  • B32-VFD-IDS-003A(B) [Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Wattmeter]

lowers

  • 832-VFD-IDS-OQ1A(B)]Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Frequency Meter] lowers END R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION Date/Time Completed Perrormed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By:

Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 17of80 EVENT 2: ISOLATE 230 KV DELCO WEST LINE 30 Simulator Operator Actions Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the Load Dispatcher acknowledge report.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: 230 kV Delco West line is isolated Objectives: SRO - Direct 230kV Delco West Line isolated ATC Plant monitoring BOP Performs 20P-50 Section 6.2.6 for isolating ONLY the Delco West Line Success Path: 230 kV Delco West (Line 30) isolated Event Termination: Go to Event 3 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 18 of 80 EVENT 2: ISOLATE 230 KV DELCO WEST LINE 30 Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Directs 230kV Delco West Line isolated lAW SRO marked up version of 2OP-50, Section 6.2.6.

BOP Performs 20P-50, Section 6.2.6 RO Monitors the plant.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Pagel9of8O PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 147 Page 58 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard

1. Ensure the Unit 2 230 kV switchyard is ENERGIZED AD
2. Ensure the 4kV Auxihary Electrical Systems are DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6,2.3 N-i SRO
3. Ensure the SAT is DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6.2.4 N-i SRO
4. Ensure Caswefl Beach Pumptng Station is DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6.2.5 N-i SRO
5. Ensure required LCOs for Technical Specification Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.7 and 3.6.8 are initiated cRO
6. Obtain Load Dispatchets permission to de-energize the 230 kV switcrlyard AD A Powers the Delco West Line ONLY Person Contacted
7. Place Auto Reclose switches for the following PCBs in MAN:
  • 31 B (Bus 26 Whitevifle 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 31 A (Bus 2A Wtiitevdle 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • SOB (Bus 26 Delco West Line 230 KV Breaker)
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRI)
  • 278 (Bus 28 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRI)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 20 of 80 PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 137 Page 59 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard (continued)

CAUTION PC8 Supervisory switch must be in LOCAI. before the associated PCB fs operated from Panel XU-5 13

8. Place Supervisory switches for the following PCBs in LOCAL:
  • 31 B (Bus 28 Whitevifle 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 308 (Bus 2B Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 288 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 278 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 31A (Bus 2A Whiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
9. Open 316 (Bus 26 Whiteville 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
10. Confirm 3iB (Bus 28 Whiteville 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO 11 Open 31A(Bus 2A Whiteville 230kV PCB) N-i SRO 12 Confirm 3iA (Bus 2A Wheville 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO
13. Open 306 (Bus 28 Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) 14 Confirm 306 (Bus 26 Delco West Line 230 Ky PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights
15. Open 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) 16 Confirm 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights 17 Open 288 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 21 of8O PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATiNG 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 147 Page 60 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard (continued)

18. Confirm 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing N-i SRO the indicating ligrns
19. Open 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 Ky PCB) N-i SRO
20. Confirm 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing NI SRO the indicating lights
21. Open 276 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
22. Confirm 27B (Bus 28 Towli Creek 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by N-i SRO observing the indicating lights
23. Open 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
24. Confirm 27A (Bus 2ATown Creek 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO NOTE IT work is to be performed on a 230 kV bus, the manual disconnects are to be opened C
25. Place Supervisory switches for the following PCBs in REMOTE;
  • 316 (Bus 28 Wtiiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 306 (Bus 28 Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 278 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker N-i SRO
  • 3 JA (Bus 2A Whiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 22 of 80 PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev, 147 Page 61 01281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 KV Switchyard (continued)

Daterflme Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO N-i, Partial usage to isolate only the Delco West 230 kV Line (Line 30)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 23 of 80 EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger I to drift CR 26-1 1 into the core.

When CR 26-1 1 is inserted to 00, Initiate Trigger 2 to activate CRD High Temperature alarm.

Two minutes after control rod is disarmed or scrammed, delete CRD HYD TEMP HIGH alarm.

If asked to disarm CRD 26-1 1 Initiate Trigger 4.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the RE to address thermal limits, acknowledge the request.

When contacted for scramming control rod 26-1 1, report that Thermal Limits will NOT be exceeded by this single rod scram.

If asked as the RBAO to investigate HCU for control 26-1 1, report that the HCU scram outlet riser is hot to the touch.

When contacted as the RBAO and after high temperature alarm has been actuated, report that the CRD temperature is 390° F and slowly rising.

When contacted as the System Engineer report that based on past history of this rod (26-11) scram times cannot be guaranteed.

If contacted as the WCC to perform the single rod scram, report that there are no operators available to perform the task.

If asked as the RBAO to disarm control rod, coordinate with Sim Operator after 5 minutes.

If requested, close/reopen the 1 13 valve (Charging Header Isolation Valve) as necessary As RBAO, Report Accumulator pressure 980# after rod has been scrammed.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Control Rod 26-1 1 will drift full in. Crew should enter AOP-02.0 and take action lAW 2APP-A-05 (3-2). When the high temperature alarm is received, Engineering will report that scram times cannot be assured based on past history of the control rod. Determine TS 3.1.3 condition Cl in 3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> and C2 within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions in response to a drifting control rod and evaluate Tech Specs.

RO - Respond to a drifting control rod.

Success Path: The drifting control rod is fully inserted, determined that the control rod must be placed under clearance and electrically disarmed.

Event Termination: Go to Event 4 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 24 of 80]

EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct actions of 2APP-A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT Direct entry into OAOP-02.0, Control Rod SRO Malfunction/Misposition.

After System Engineer reports that the scram times cannot be guaranteed, according to Note 2 in TS Table 3.1.4-1 the rod must be declared inoperable.

Tech Spec 3.1.3 Control Rod Operability SRO Condition C. One or more control rods inoperable for reasons other than Condition A or B Required Action C.1 Fully insert inoperable control rod (3 hrs)

C.2 Disarm the associated CRD (4 hrs)

Contact System Engineer on high temperature condition of control rod.

SRO Contact RE to inform of rod drift and to evaluate thermal limits May direct the control rod to be scrammed to attempt to reseat the leaking outlet valve SRO lAW A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT May conduct a brief (See Enclosure 1, page 62 for format of the brief.

Monitor reactor plant parameters during evolution.

BOP May read APP actions for the OATC to perform

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 25 of 80 EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Acknowledge alarms:

A-05 (5-2) Rod Block RWM/RMCS Sys Trouble ATC A-05 (3-2) Rod Drift Announce and enter OAOP-02.0, Control Rod Malfunction/Misposition.

Perform the actions of APP-A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT as follows:

D Determine which control rod is drifting.

Select the drifting control rod and determine direction of drift.

Attempt to arrest the drift by giving a withdraw signal.

0 If rod continues to drift in, apply an RMCS insert signal and fully insert to position 00.

ATC U Attempt to locate and correct the cause of the rod malfunction as follows:

U Check and adjust cooling water header pressure if required.

U Direct AO to check for leaking scram valve.

U May direct an AO to check HCU temperature on R018 temperature recorder_(in_the_Rx_Bldg.)

Monitor core parameters, main steam line ATC radiation and off-gas activity.

Perform 20P-07 Section 6.3.17, Single Rod The examiner will prompt the Scram from RPS Test Panel. performer that the blue light is ON ATC and indication is 00 when step CRS will NA appropriate steps.

6.3.17.11 is performed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 26 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-O1 PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 94 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel Confirm the following initial conditions are met:

  • All applicable prerequisites in Section 5.0 are met
  • Attachment 1 has been reviewed
  • Communications are estabLished beeen RPS Test Panel and the Control Room
  • Reactor Engineer recommends performance of this section and has determined Technical Spedtication Thermal Limits will NOT be exceeded by this single rod scram Reador Engineer
2. IF AT ANY TIME it becomes necessary to sciarn a single control rod for operability concerns THEN perform OPT-14.2.1, Single Rod Scram Insertion Times Test for that control rod
3. Obtain permission from the Unit CR5 to perform this section CRS
4. Document applicable control rod to be scrammed in the space provided Control Rod
5. IF recommended by Reactor Engineering to support diagnostic data.

THEN record the following

  • Reactor pressure:

psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 27 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERA1YNG 20P-0? I PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 95 of 16j 6.3.1 7 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued)

BEGiN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION 6 Select applicable control rod at P603 Cv

7. Close C 12-1 13 (Charging Water Riser Isolation Valve) for the applicable control rod . - -
8. IF RWM scram time recording is recommended by Reactor Enginoenng, THEN perform the fdlowng
a. Have Reactor Enqineenng connect temporary scram time test cable to single rod scram interface box (located on terminal strip GM in P616-RMCS cabinet) and route cable up to RPS Test Panel P610 in accordance with Attachment 12. (Reference Use) -Test Cable Arranqement For RWM Scram Recordtng Reatar Engrneor (1) Insert black load into N[UTRAL socket on the P610 test panel IV (2) Insert red lead into socket corresponding to control rod to be tested at P610 IV
9. Monitor control rod position 10 IF AT ANY TIME the control rod does NOT fully scram after lovring the scram test switch.

THEN immediately notify the Unit CRS to determine operability of the rod (Technical Specificaton 3.1.3)

11. Using a currently licensed ROISRO, perform the following:
a. Scram the applicable control rod by lowering the scram test switch on RPS Test Panel P610 to the scram (down) position CV

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 28 of 80 REACTOR MANUAI CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-0/

PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 96 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued)

b. WHEN the scrammed control rod is fully inserted OR 10 seconds have elapsed (whichever ours first).

THEN return applicable scram test switch to the normal (up) position .-

IV

12. Confirm rod position display indicates O0 for scrammed rod and the GREEN Full In light is ON
13. IF control rod U NOT fully insert, THEN reference Technical Specifications for OPERABILITY - -

CR5 NOTE Holding Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch in EMERGENCY ROD IN position for a period of time will flush any ingested crud from the drive to help prevent double notching LI

14. Hold the Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch in EMERGENCY ROD IN position for at least 15 seconds and record insert stall flow.

stall tbw stall flow stall flow 1: 2: 3:

15 Repeat Seion 6.3.17 Step 14 two additional times END RM. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

16. Slowly open applicable C12-.11 3 (Charging Water Riser Isolation Valve) _J..

IV

17. Confirm associated accumulator pressure is greater than 955 psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 29 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATiNG 20P-0f PROCEDURE nov. los Page 97 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued) 1& IF RWM scram time was recorded.

THEN perform the folowing:..

a- Contact Reactor Engineering to upload Reador Enaineer

b. Remove temporary scram timing cables from P616 and P610 ............

lv

c. Perform the following to delete RWM scram data buffers:

(1) Select SCRAM DATA screen on RWM Operator Display n the Control Room (2) Press DELETE softkcy to delete scram data (3) Confirm SCRAM DATA screen displa - -

  • ROD SCRA-1 TIMING FUNCTION: READY
  • ROD SCRAM TIMING DATA: NOT TRANSFERRED

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 30 of 80 EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 5 to trip the running ADHR Pump.

When informed to align 2A RCC pump to ADHR mode Initiate Trigger 6 If asked to throttle closed the RCC-V51 14, Initiate Trigger 7.

When asked to re-open the RCC-V51 14, then adjust the remote to 1.0.

Simulator Operator Role Play If directed to investigate the trip of RCC Pump D, report the pump is tripped on overcurrent.

When directed to align RBCCW Pump 2A to ADHR mode lAW 20P-21 Section 6.3.16 (steps 2b through 2i) have Sim Op align pump to ADHR mode and inform BOP Op that the steps are complete.

When contacted as RBAO report radiation monitor is aligned per 2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 step 4.

RCC-V5154 (Rad Monitor Bypass Standby Isolation Valve) is CLOSED RCC-V5116 (Rad Monitor Bypass ADHR Isolation Valve) is OPEN RCC-V5115 (Rad Monitor Bypass Common Mode Isolation Valve) is OPEN When contacted report RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve) is throttled 90% closed. (2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 Step 5a)

When contacted report RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve) is full open. (2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 Step 5c)

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The running ADHR Secondary Loop Pump (RCC Pump D) will trip. The crew will have to start RCC Pump C. Shutdown RCC Pump A. Re-align RCC Pump A for ADHR mode and then start the pump for ADHR. (AOP-38.0 will be entered).

Objectives: SRO Direct swapping of RCC pumps and then direct starting of RCC Pump in ADHR Mode.

RO - Swap RCC pumps, Place RCC Pump in ADHR Mode.

Success Path: Standby ADHR Pump placed in service.

Event Termination: Go to Event 5 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 31 of 80]

EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct entry into OAOP-38.0, Loss of Fuel Pool SRO Cooling Direct swapping of RBCCW pumps Start RBCCW Pump C, secure A.

Direct alignment of RBCCW Pump A to ADHR Mode.

Direct starting RBCCW Pump 2A in ADHR Mode.

Direct I/C to investigate trip of RBCCW Pump 2D.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 62 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 32 of 80 EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments RO Plant Monitoring Report trip of RBCCW Pump 2D (running in ADHR Mode)

SOP UA-01 3-3, ADHR SECONDARY LOOP TROUBLE May secure the primary pump lAW this APP Announce and enter AOP-38.0, Loss of Fuel Pool Cooling Perform 20P-21, Section 6.3.10 (page 33) to swap RBCCW pumps. (Start C and secure A)

Plant announcement for the start of 2C RCC Pump and securing of 2A RCC Pump.

Perform 2OP-21, Section 6.3.16 (page 34) to align RBCCW Pump A into ADHR Mode.

Direct RB AO to perform steps 2b through 2i.

Step 3 is N/A Perform 2OP-21, Section 6.3.18 (page 37) to start RBCCW Pump A in ADHR Mode.

Notifies E&C, starting ADHR pump Step 2 is N/A Step 3 is N/A Direct the RB AO to perform step 4 and 5a.

Announce starting of RCC Pump 2A.

Direct the RB AO to perform step 5c.

May direct AO to ensure primary loop is operating lAW 2OP-1 3.1.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 33 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P.21 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 47 of 149 6.3.10 Transferring to the Standby RBCCW Pump RBCCW Mode-Ensure the following initaI conditions are met:

  • Applicable prerequisites listed in Section 5.0, Prerequisites are met
  • RBCCW System in operation with two pumps aligned for RBCCW Mode in service
2. Start the standby RBCCW pump by placing the associated pump control switch in ON:
  • RBCCWPUMP2A
  • RBCCWPUMP2C
3. Secure the desired RBCCW pump by placing the associated pump control switch in OFF:
  • RBCCWPUMP2C
  • RBCCWPUMP2D
4. lEa third RBCCW pump is aligned to RBCCW Mode, 4p RBCCW discharge header pressure has stabilized, THEN place the pump control switch in AUTO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 34 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-21 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 68 of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode

1. Ensure the following initial condition is met:
  • One RBCCW Heat Exchanger is aligned to ADHR Mode per Section6.3.14
  • Key for RBCCW/ADHR Mode Selectot Switch has been obtained from one of the following:

O Control Rm Key Locket key 98 O WCC Key Locker key 167 or 168 NOTE RBCCW Pump 2A and RBCCW Pump 2D can support either RGCCW Mode or ADHR Mode. A Mode Selector Switch Is located on the pump breaker and a white ADHR Mode indicating light is on the RTGB. This switch determines which of the two header pressures (RBCCW or ADHR) wilt be monitored for the pump auto start on low header pressure when the pump control switch is placed in AUTO. When the Mode Selector Switch is placed in the ADHR Mode position, the white light is ON on the RTGB C

2. IF aligning RBCCW Pump 2A to ADHR Mode.

THEN perform the following

a. Ensure RBCCW Pump 2A control switch is in OFF
b. Close RCC-V32 (RBCCW Pump 2A RBCCW Suction)
c. Close RCC-V38 (RBCCW Pump 2A RBCCW Mode Discharge Valve)

U. Open RCC-V5105 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Suction Valve)

e. Open RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
f. Open RCC-V303 (RBCCW Pump 2A Casing Vent Valve)
g. WHEN a steady stream of water is present.

THEN close RCC-V303 (RBCCW Pump 24 Casing Vent Valve)

h. Ensure 2-RCC-SS-7667 (Pump 24 RBCCW,ADHR Mode Selector Switch) located at MCC 2XE. in ADHR

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 35 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2i SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 69of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode (continued)

i. Remove key from 2-RCC-SS-7667 (Pump 2A RBCCW/ADHR Mode Selector Swxtch)
j. Confirm the ADHR white indicating light on the RTGB for RBCCW Pump 2A is ON
3. IF aligning RBCCW Pump 2D to ADHR Mode, THEN perform the following
a. Ensure RBCCW Pump 2D control switch is m OFF
b. Close RCC-V5 107 (RBCCW Pump 20 RBCCW Mode Suction Valve)
c. Close RCC-V51 11 <RBCCW Pump 20 RBCCW Mode Discharge Valve) d Open RCC-V5104 (R5CCW Pump 2D ADHR Mode Suction Valve)
e. Open RCC-V51 13 (RBCCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
1. Open RCC-V5139 (RBCCW Pump 2D Casing Vent Valve)
g. WHEN a steady stream of water is present.

THEN close RCC-V5 139 (RBCCW Pump 20 Casing Vent Valve)

h. Ensure 2-RCC-SS-7668 (Pump 2D RBCCWIADHR Mode Selector Switch) located at MCC 2XD, in ADHR
i. Remove key from 2-RCC-SS-7668 (Pump 2D RBCCW1ADHR Mode Selector Switch)
j. Confirm the ADHR white indicating light on the RTGB for RBCCW Pump 2D is ON

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 36 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 2OP2 1 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 70 of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode (continued)

NOTE ADHR Mode piping is placed either in Standby Mode or in service to ensure RBCCW circulation and proper chemistry control wtien NOT undergoing maintenance D

4. Place ADHR in service per Section 63.18, Starting an RBCCW Pump-ADHR Mode Date/Time Completed Performed By (Pnnt) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 37 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2 1 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 74 of 149 6.3.18 Starting an RBCCW Pump ADHR Mode

1. Ensure the following initial conditions are met
  • Designated RBCCW Pump is aligned to ADHR Mode per Section 6.3.16
  • RBCCW pump is operating in ADHR Mode, THEN E&C notified commencing startup of ADHR t1ode Person Notified NOTE RBCCW Pump 2A and RBCCW Pump 2D can support either RBCCW Mode or ADHR Mode. A Mode Selector Switch is located on the pump breaker and a white ADHR Mode indicating light is on the RTGB. This switch determines which of the two header pressures (RBCCW or ADHR) wilt be monitored for the pump auto start on low header pressure wtien the pump control switch is placed in AUTO. When the Mode Selector Switch is placed in the ADHR Mode position, the wtite light is ON on the RTGB 0 RBCCW Pump 2D will NOT auto re-start wtien power returns after a LOOP or bus under voltage condition with the control switch in ON or AUTO. The control switch must be placed in OFF/RESET prior to restarting the pump 0 CAUTION Two pump operation in ADHR Mode subjects RCC-V37 (RBCCW Pump IA Discharge Check Valve) and RCC-V51 10 (RBCCW Pump 1D Discharge Check Valve) to accelerated wear. This lineup is expected to be utilized only when maximum ADHR capacity is required. [8.7.2] 0
2. IF desired to start a second pump aligned to ADHR Mode, THEN perform the following a Obtain concurrence from Engineering to start a second pump in the ADHR Mode Person Coitacted
b. Go to Step 5.b

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 38 of 8]

REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 75 of 149 6.318 Starting an RBCCW Pump ADHR Mode (continued)

3. IF the ADHR Mode has been shutdown for greater than 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> OR maintenance has been petfomied, THEN fill and vent the ADHR piping per Section 63.13
4. Ensure the following valve alignment for system radiation monitoring:
  • RCC-V51 54 fRau Monitor Bypass Standby Isolation Valve) is CLOSED
  • RCC-V5i 16 (Rad Monitor Bypass ADHR Isolation Valve) is OPEN
  • RCC-V51 15 fRad Monitor Bypass Common Mode Isolation Valve) is OPEN
5. For the RBCCW pump aligned to ADHR Mode to be started, perform the following
a. Throttle 80% to 95% dosed the associated pump discharge valve:
  • RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
  • RCC-V51 13 (RBCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
b. Start an RBCCW pump aligned to ADHR Mode by placing the associated pump control switch in ON:
  • RBCCWPUMP2A
  • RBCCWPUMP2D
c. IF throttled in Step 5.a, THEN slowly open the associated pump discharge valve
  • RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
  • RCC-V5 113 (RBCCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 39 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-21 I SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev1 Page 76 of 149 6.3.18 Starting an RBCCW Pump -ADHR Mode (continued)

d. Ensure a log entry is made stating RBCCW pumps are in service in the ADHR Mode and Engineering has been notified NOTE The normal parameters for Supplemental Spent Fuel Pool Cooling are provided in Attachment 1, Normal System Operation Parameters. Equipment manipulations to maintain these parameters are performed per 20-13.1, Alternate Decay Heat Removal System Primary Loop Operating Procedure C
6. IF a Primary Loop pump is operating, THEN maintain Primary Loop flow per 20-13.1, Alternate Decay Heat Removal System Primary Loop Opemhng Procedure
7. Ensure Plant Process Computer setup as follows per OOP-55, Plant Process and ERFIS Computer Systems Operating Procedure
  • PPC U2RCCM 11 point ENABLED
  • PPC U2RCCAO95 Value Monitoring setup with the nominal flow values per Attachment 1 Section 2.5 for the number of RBCCW Pumps in ADHR Mode to provide audible alarms for ADHR secondary flow changes Date/Time Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 40 of 80 EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 8 to activate Recirc Loop B Flow failure.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as l&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

After LCD entries have been determined and SRO is waiting for l&C, call as WCCSRO and request APRM 4 be placed in tripped condition to support l&C trouble shooting. The WCC will hang the status control tag paperwork.

If asked to pull fuses (for TRM 3.3 actions, 2-C12A-F1 Labeled ROD OUT BLOCK RELAYS CI2A in P616 panel) acknowledge the request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Flow reference off normal alarm, rod block and scram signal to all 4 voters Flow transmitter signals are displayed on PC display 845, and on individual NUMACs by selecting Input Status.

Objectives: SRO - Determine LCO for APRM 4 inoperability and direct placing channel in trip.

RD Respond To A Flow Unit/Transmitter Failure Per APP A-06 5-7.

Success Path: APRM 4 TS 3.3.1.1 declaration and placed in trip condition lAW 001-18.

Event Termination: Go to Event 6 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 41 of8O EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct actions of APPs SRO Direct I&C to investigate Evaluate Tech Spec 3.3.1.1 Reactor Protection System Instrumentation TS 3.3.11, Function 2b, Required Action Al.

With one or more required channels inoperable, place in trip condition in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Evaluate TRM 3.3 Control Rod Block Instrumentation TRM 3.3, Function Ia, Required Condition Al.

With one of the required channels not operable -

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to restore to operable.

Refers to 001-18 for actions to place APRM 4 in a tripped condition.

Direct APRM 4 mode selector switch placed in INOP to allow I&C troubleshooting.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 62 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 42 of 80 EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Monitors the plant.

May check back panel APRM indications.

Acknowledges, refers to & reports annunciators A-6 2-8 APRM UPSCALE 3-8 APRM UPSCALE TRIP/INOP ATC 5-7 FLOW REF OFF NORMAL A-5 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED Diagnose and report failure of APRM 4 Flow Transmitter Obtains key number 1 14 from the SRO key locker to place APRM 4 in trip.

Places APRM mode selector switch in INOP lAW 001-18.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 43 of 80 EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 9 to trip a Heater Drain Pump.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as AC to investigate, wait until pump is tripped and report over-current flags for all phases of 2A HDP 4KV breaker on Bus 2D If contacted as RE for reduced EW Temp, acknowledge any requests.

If asked as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Heater Drain Pump 2A shaft seizes and trips on overcurrent. Heater Drain tank level will rise and the crew will throttle HD-V57 to stabilize HD Tank level. If the standby HDP is not started, REP suction pressure will lower during the transient requiring power reduction to stabilize Condensate/feedwater.

Objectives: SRO Directs OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures, and possible OAOP-03.0, Positive Reactivity Addition, entry.

RO Diagnose HDP pump trip and start the standby HDP.

Success Path: 2C HDP started with HDD level recovered in the normal band.

Event Termination: Go to Event 7 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 44 0180]

EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct annunciator response for UA-04:

4-10 HD PUMP A TRIP 2-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH-LOW 3-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP SRO Direct entry into OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures Direct starting standby HDP.

May direct 2AOP-3.0, Positive Reactivity Addition, entry if power rises due to the HDD Ext Trip.

May direct monitoring of final feedwater temperature.

May direct maintenance to investigate trip May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 62 forformat)

RO Plant Monitoring May reduce power lAW OAOP-23 to stabilize reactor water level.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 45 of 80 EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP SOP Recognize and report annunciators UA-04 4-10 HO PUMP A TRIP 2-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH-LOW 3-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP UA-06 1-7 BUS 204 KV MOTOR OVLD Manually starts 2C HDP lAW APP or AOP.

Enter and announce OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures.

Monitors final feedwater temperature (FFWT) lAW 20 1-03.2 May open the HD-V57 to assist in HDD level recovery.

Directs an A0 to 4.16 Ky Switchgear Bus 2D to investigate 2A HDP trip Verifies auto actions for HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP, if it occurs.

1. Non-return valves (EX-VI I and EX-Vi 2) to deaerator close. (Only close if turbine load is below 500 MWe)
2. HDD Extraction Line B moisture removal valves (MVD-LV-266 and MVD-LV-267) open.

May reference 20P-35 to recover MRVs following HDD level restoration.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 46 of 80]

EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN DW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARt RESET FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger IOta activate small steam leak in DW.

If requested to defeat Group I LL3, wait 2 minutes, and install jumpers (Trigger II)

If requested to install LEP-02, Section 2.3 jumpers, wait 5 minutes, and inform the SRO that the jumpers are installed (RPOO5F already active).

Simulator Operator Role Play Acknowledge request as l&C to investigate failure of SLC switch.

If requested as I&C to investigate the failure of the ARt reset failure, acknowledge the request.

Acknowledge request to perform LEP-03 actions.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Most control rods will fail to insert on the scram. The crew will respond to the ATWS per EOP-01-ATWS. When SLC initiation is attempted, the switch positions will not work. The crew will enter LEP-03 and align for alternate boron injection using CRD.

The scram cannot be reset due to failure of the ARI to reset.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions to control reactor power per EOP-01-ATWS..

RD - Perform actions for an ATWS per EOP-01-ATWS.

Success Path: Lower level to control power, inject SLC, insert control rods.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 47 of 80 EVENTS 71819: STEAM LEAK IN DW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Enter RSP and transition to ATWS.

Direct mode switch to shutdown when steam flow < 3 Mlbs/hr.

Direct ARI initiation.

Direct Recirc Pumps Tripped. CRITICAL TASK #2 SRO Direct SLC initiation, then LEP-03, Alternate Boron Injection.

Direct ADS inhibited. CRITICAL TASK #1 Direct RWCU isolation verification.

Direct LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion CRITICAL TASK #2 Direct Group 10 switches to override reset.

Direct terminate and prevent HPCUFeedwater (CS/RHR when LOCA signal received) to CRITICAL TASK #2 lower level to 90 inches.

When level reaches 90 inches, evaluate Table Q-2:

If not met, establishes a level band of LL4 to +90 inches.

If met, directs RPV injection to remain terminated.

Enters POOP Directs Torus cooling when Torus temperature is greater than 95° F, (See Enclosure 5, page 68)

Directs Torus Sprays before torus pressure reaches 11.5 psig (See Enclosure 8, page 77)

Directs Drywell Sprays when torus pressure exceeds 11.5 psig (See Enclosure 7, page 71)

Direct injection established to maintain RPV level LL4 to TAF (or the level at which APRMs indicate downscale)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 48 of 80 EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN OW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Place mode switch to shutdown when steam RO flow < 3x106 lb/hr.

Initiates ARI.

Trips Recirc Pumps. CRITICAL TASK #2 Initiates SLC.

Determines SLC switch failure.

Directs LEP-03, Alternate Boron Injection Recognizes failure of SLC switch and reports to CRS.

Monitor APRMs for downscale.

Performs LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion.

Section 2.1, Initial Actions (see page 48)

Section 2.3, Reset RPS and Initiate a Manual CRITICAL TASK #2 Scram (see page 51)

Section 2.4, Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) (see page 54)

May also perform Section 2.5, Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure (see page 56).

Recognizes failure of ARI to reset, informs CRS

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 49 of 8p]

EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN OW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Places ADS in inhibit. CRITICAL TASK #1 Places Group 10 switches to override I reset Terminate and prevent injection to RPV. CRITICAL TASK #2 Terminates and prevents HPCI lAW Hard Card. (Enclosure 2, page 63)

Terminates and Prevents Feedwater lAW Hard Card. (Enclosure 3, page 64)

May place HPCI in service for level control during ATWS when directed by the SRO.

(Enclosure 6, page 70)

Restart RFP to maintain level as directed by SRO. (Enclosure 4, page 65)

When Torus temperature is greater than 95° F, places Torus Cooling in service.

(Enclosure 5, page 68)

When directed, places Torus Sprays in service.

(Enclosure 8, page 77)

When directed, places Drywell Sprays in service.

(Enclosure 7, page 71)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 50 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 R3ge4of37 1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS

  • As dwected by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs)
  • As directed by Severe Accident Management GudeIine (SAMGs) 2.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 2.1 Initial Actions 2.1.7 Manpower Required
  • 1 Reactor Operator
  • 1 Auxiliary Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment None NOTE
  • Two-handed operation is allowed during implementation of this procedure in order to minimize delay in control rod insertion D
  • Section 2.1.3 Step 1 through Step 6 may be performed concurrently with the test of this procedure C
  • The system designation Cii is for Unit 1 and C12 for Unit 2 C 2.1.3 Operator Actions
1. Monitor reactor power on APRMs until IRM recorders on scale C RO
2. Insert IRMs and monitor reactor power on IRM recorders C RO
3. Downrange IRMs to bring them on scale C RO
4. WHEN IRM5 on Range 3 OR below.

THEN insert SRMs C RO

5. Monitor reactor period C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 51 of8O ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 I Rev. 029 Page 5 otT]

2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

6. Monitor control rod position using:
  • Process computer RO
  • Four rod [3 RO
  • Full core display C RO
7. WHEN either:
  • Reactor engineering has determined the reactor ill remain shutdovai under all conditions without boron C RO THEN perform Section 2.2, Control Rod Insertion Verification on Page7 C RO

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 52 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 6 of 37 2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

8. Insert control rods by one or more methods:
  • Section 2.4, Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) on Page 18 C RO
  • Section 2.5, Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure on Page 20 C RO
  • Section 2,8, Venting Over Piston Area on Page 32 C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 53 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-0 1 -LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 15 of 37 2.3 Reset RPS and Initiate a Manual Scram 2.3.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.3.2 Special Equipment
  • RO Desk Locked Drawer 0 4 jumpers (15, 16, 17 and 18) C]

2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions NOTE Section 2.3.3 Step 1 and Step 2 may be performed concurrently C]

IF an automatic scram signal present AND power available to RPS bus.

THEN install jumpers to bypass reactor scram:

  • Jumper 15 in Panel H 12-P609, Terminal Board DD, from right side of Fuse C71A(C72A)-F 14A to Terminal 4 of Relay C7JA(C72A)-K12E C]

RO

  • Jumper 16 in Panel Hi 2-P609, Terminal Board 88, from left side of Fuse C71A(C72A)-F14C to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-K12G C]

RO

  • Jumper 17 in Panel H12-P611, Terminal Board DD, from right side of Fuse C7IAfC72A)-F 148 to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-KI2F C]

RO

  • Jumper 18 in Panel H12-P611, Terminal Board BB, from left side of Fuse C7 1Af C72A)-F 14D to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-K12H C]

RO

2. Inhibit ARI:
a. Place CII (Cl 2)-CS-5560 (ARI Auto/Manual Initiation Switch) t0INOP C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 54 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-O1-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 16 of 37 2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions (continued)

b. Place and hold Cli (C12)-CS-5562 (ARI Reset) switch in RESET 0 RO
c. WHEN 5 seconds have elapsed.

THEN release 0 RO

d. Confirm ted TRIP light located above CI 1(C12)-CS-556 1 (ARI Initiation) OFF 0 RO
3. Ensure Disch Vol Vent & Drain Test switch in ISOLATE 0 RO
4. Conhrm CLOSED:
  • C1i(CI2)-V139(DischVolVentVlv) 0 RO
  • Cl 1fC 12)-CV-F0 10 (Disch Vol Vent VIv) 0 RO
  • Cl 1(C12)-V 140 fDisch Vol Drain Vlv) 0 RO Cl 1fCI2)-CV-F0i 1 fDisch Vol Drain VIv) 0 RO
5. Reset RPS 0 RO
6. IF either RPS A OR B can be RESET, THEN go to Section 2.3.3 Step 8 0 RO
7. IF RPS CANNOT be RESET, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 0 RO
8. Place Disch Vol Vent & Drain Test switch to NORMAL 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 55 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 17 of 37 2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions (continued)

9. Confirm OPEN:
  • Ci i(C12)-V 139 (Disch Vol Vent Vlv) C]

RO

  • Ci l(C12)-CV-F0l0 (Disch Vol Vent Vlv) C]

RO

  • Ci 1fC12)-V140 (Disch Vol Drain Vtv) C]

RO

  • Cl i(C12-CV-F0i 1 fDisch Vol Drain Vlv) C]

RO

10. WHEN the scram discharge volume has drained for approximately 2 minutes OR A-05 1-6, SDV Hi-Hi Level RPS Thp clears, THEN continue C]

RO ii. IF venting control rod over piston area per Section 2.8, THEN notify AO to secure venting prior to inserting a manual scram C]

RO

12. Manually scram the reactor C]

RO 13 IF control rods moved inward AND ll control rods NOT inserted to

.Q.. beyond Position 00, THEN return to Section 2.3.3 Step 3 C]

RO

14. IF.II control rods inserted to OR beyond Position 00 9 control rods did NOT move inward, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 56 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSER11ON OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 180137 2.4 Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) 2.4.7 Manpower Required I Reactor Operator 2.4.2 Special Equipment RO Desk Locked Dravr Unit 1 Only: 1 5450 key for RWM D 0 Unit 2 Only: 1 5451 key ror RWM 0 2.4.3 RMCS Actions

1. IF a reactor scram sealed in, THEN ensure available CR0 pumps operating 0 RO
2. Ensure Ci1(C12)-FC-R600fCRD Flow Control) in MAN 0 RO
3. IF a CRD pump NOT operating, THEN:
a. Close the in-service Cl 1(C12)-FOO2A(F0028) (Flow Control Vlv) 0 RO
b. Start one CR0 pump 0 RO c, Adjust CI 1fC 12)-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to greater than or equal to 30 gpm 0 RO
d. IF avalabte, THEN start the second CRD pump 0 RO
4. IFNO CR0 pump can be started, THEN return to Section 21.3 Step 7 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 57 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 19 of 37 2.4.3 RMCS Actions (continued)

5. Insert control rods with RMCS:

a Throttle open ci 1(C12)-EOO2A(E0026)fFIow Control Vlv) until drive water differential pressure greater than or equal to 26opsid D RO

b. IF drive water differential pressure less than 260 psid, THEN throttle closed Cli (Cl 2)-PC V-F003 (Drive Pressure Vlv) until drive water differential pressure greater than or equal to 260 psid C RO
c. Bypass RWM C RO d Insert control rods with Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch C RO
6. WHEN fl control rods inserted to beyond Position 00 .Q CANNOT be inserted with RMCS.

THEN return to Section 2.7.3 Step 7 C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 58 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-0 1 -LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 20 of 37 2.5 Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure 2.5.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.5.2 Special Equipment None 2.5.3 Cooling Water Header Actions
1. IF a reactor scram sealed in, THEN ensure available CRD pumps operating D RO
2. JE a CR0 pump QI operating, THEN:
a. Ensure Cl 7fC12)-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) in MAN D RO
b. Close the in-service Cl 1fC12)-FOO2AfFOO2B) (Flow Control Vlv) D RO
c. Start one CRD pump D RO ci. Adjust Cl i(Ci2-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to greater than or equal to 30 gpm C RO
e. IF available, THEN start the second CRD pump C RO
3. IFNO CRD pump can be started, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 C RO t

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 59 of 80 OEOP-01-LEP-02 I ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION Rev. 029 I Page2lof37 L

2.5.3 Cooling Water Header Actions (continued)

4. IF a reactor scram NOT sealed in, THEN maximize cooling water header pressure:
a. Ensure Cl 1fC12)-FC-R600 (CRD flow Control) in MAN and fully open the in service Cl 1(C12).-FOO2A(F0026)fFlow Control Vlv) D RO b Fully open Cii (C12)-PCV-F003 (Drive Pressure VIv) D RO
5. WHEN jj control rods inserted to beyond Position 00 control rods NOT moving inward, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 60 of 80 TERMINATION Simulator Operator Actions When directed by the Lead Evaluator, delete the following commands:

Malfunction K2624A, ARI Reset Malfunction K2625A, ARI INOP Malfunction RPOI 1 F, ATWS 4 (Make sure RPS is reset and scram air header pressurized before deleting)

When directed by the Lead Evaluator, place the simulator in FREEZE DO NOT RESET THE SIMULATOR PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF CONCURRENCE TO DO SO FROM THE LEAD EXAMINER Simulator Operator Role Play After Sim Operator has deleted SDV malfunction, Inform the CRS that a loose wire was found on ARI switch and it has been repaired.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: When actions are taken to control reactor water level during the ATWS after terminating and preventing, ARt will be repaired and rods can be inserted.

Objectives: SRO - Directs actions for an ATWS.

RO Insert control rods lAW LEP-02.

Success Path: Rods inserted with LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion.

Scenario Termination: When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF with injection established, the scenario may be terminated.

Remind students not to erase any charts and not to discuss the scenario until told to do so by the evaluatorlinstructor.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 61 of 80 TERMINATION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Exit ATWS and enter RVCP when all rods are SRO in.

Direct level restored to 170 200 inches after rods are all in.

RO Confirms ARI reset when reported fixed.

Inserts a scram after discharge volume has drained for 2 minutes.

Reports all rods in.

Maintains reactor pressure as determined by the BOP CRS.

Maintains level as directed by the SCO.

Restores level to 170 200 inches after all rod inserted. (Enclosure 4, page 65, contains actions for restart of Condensate and Feedwater)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 62 of 80 ENCLOSURE I Page 1 of I CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS AD-OP-ALL-i 000 Rev. 6 Page 90 of go AUACHMENT $

Page 1 of 1

<< Crew Brief Template>>

1] Announce Crew Brief Begin Brie?

D NI crew members acknowledge announcement (AZ Required)

I] Updatetflecrewas needed:

D Descnbe what happened and major actions taken D Procedures in-progress D Notifications:

Recap 0 Maintenance 0 Engineering 0 Others tDispatcher, Station Management. etc.)

0 Future Direction and pnonties C Discuss any contingency plans (AZ Required)

C Solicit questionstoncerns from each crew member:

DROs Input 0 CRS C STA 0 Are there any alarms unexpected for the plant conditions?

C What is the status of Cnticat Parameters?

(AZ Required)

EAt.

C Provide EAL and potential escalation criteria C Restore normal alarm announcement7 fYesNo)

Flnl:h Brief C Announce End of Bnet

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 63 of 80 ENCLOSURE 2 Page 1 of 1 SECURING HPCI INJECTION 1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS WHEN DIRECTED BY 2EOP-O1-LPC TO TERMINAIE AND PREVENT HPCI INJECTION, OR D

2. WHEN DIRECTED BY OEOP-Oi-RXFP TO TERMINATE AND PREVENT HPCI INJECTION. OR C
3. WHEN PERMISSION GIVEN DY THE UNIT CRS TO SECURE HPCI INJECTION WITH A HPCI AUTO START SIGNAL PRESENT C 2.0 PROCEDURAL STEPS
1. IF HPCI IS NOT OPERATING. PERFORM THE TOLLOWING:

a PLACE HPCI AUXILIARY OIL PUMP CONTROL SWITCH IN PULL-TO-LOCK C

2. IF HPC( IS OPERATING. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING:
b. DEPRESS AND HOLD THE HPCI TURBINE TRIP PUSHBUTTON C
c. WHEN HPCI TURBINE SPEED IS 0 RPM. AND HPCI TURBINE CONTROL VALVE, E41-V9 IS CLOSED. THEN PLACE HPCI AUXILIARY OIL PUMP CONTROL SWITCH IN PULL-TO-LOCK C U. WHEN HPCI TURD BRG OIL PRESS LO.

A-01 4- 2. IS SEALED IN. THEN RELEASE THE HPCI TURBINE TRIP PUSHBUTTON C

e. ENSURE HPCI TURBINE STOP VALVE, [41-VS.

AND HPCI TURBINE CONTROL VALVE. E41-V9.

REMAIN CLOSED, AND HPCI DOES NOT RESTART C 1 2)1368 Sf1369

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 64 of 8_Qj ENCLOSURE 3 Page 1 of 1 Terminating and Preventing Injection From Condensate and Feedwater During EOPs (20P-32)

1. IF desired TRIP all operating REPs. []
2. IF one or more REPS are in service IDLE one REP as tollows
a. IF two RFPs are operating THEN TRIP one E
b. PERFORM either of the following for the operating REP
1. PLACE MANIDFCS control switch to MAN.

2, RAPIDLY REDUCE speed to approximately 1000 rpm with the LOWERJRAISE speed control switch.

OR 1 PLACE REPT Speed Control in M (MANUAL)

2. SELECT DEM and RAPIDLY REDUCE speed to approximately 2550 rpm.
3. CLOSE the following valves

- FW HTR 5A OUTLET VLVS, FW-V6

- FW HTR 55 OUTLET VLVS, FW-V8 OR

- FW HTR 4A INLET VLV, EW-Vi 1$

- FW HTR 45 INLET VLV, FW-Vi 19

4. ENSURE the SULCV is dosed by performing the following
a. PLACE SULCV, in M (Manual),
b. SELECT DEM and DECREASE signal until VALVE DEM E indicates 0%
5. ENSURE EW-V120. is closed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 65 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 1 of 3 Aligning Condensate and Feedwater After Terminating and Preventing Ensure FW.FV-177 (Feedwater Recwc to Condenser Vlv) CLOSED .......El

2. Ensure FW Control Mode Select in 1 ELEM El
3. Ensure at least one valve OPEN El
  • 821-F0325 (Feedwater Isol Vlv) El 4 IFNO REP operating, THEN: El
a. Ensure REPT A(S) Sp CD.

(1) lnM(manual) El (2) Pmp A(S) Dern at 0.0 PCT El

b. Place EW-FV-46f47) tREP (NB) Recirc Vlv] in OPEN El
c. Ensure El
  • FW-V3(V4) [RFP (A/B) Disch Vlv] OPEN El
  • REP A(S) ManuatIDFCS control switch in MANUAL El d Depress: El (1) Reactor Water Level High Reset A El (2) Reactor Water Level High Reset B El (3) Reactor Water Level High Reset C El (4) REP A(S) Reset El
e. Confirm OPEN El
  • REP A(S) HP Stop Vlvs El f Depress REP A(S) REPT Start El
g. WHEN at 1000 rpm.

THEN raise REP A(S) to at least 2550 rpm El

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 66 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 2 of 3 Aligning Condensate and Feedwater After Terminating and Preventing (continued)

5. IE desired to transier REP Af 5) to DFCS, THEN D
a. Ensure speed at least 2550 rpm D
b. Depress DFCS Ctfl Reset D c Place Manual/DFCS control switch in DFCS D
6. Raise RFP A(S) speed until discharge pressure approximately 100 psig above RPV pressure band D 011550 S/I 372

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 67 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 3 of 3 Injection After Terminating and Preventing Condensate and Fe.dwater WHEN RPV injection directed.

THEN as needed C

  • Adjust SULCV Valve Dem C
  • Throttle FW-V 120 (FW Htrs 4&5 Byp VIv) C
2. WHEN automatic control desired, THEN: C
a. Confirm RPV level greater than + 170 inches C
b. Ensure FW-V 120 (FW Htrs 4&5 Byp VIv) CLOSED C c Open FW-V 10 (FW Recirc To Cond Isol VIv) C
d. Adjust SULCV to between 25 PCT and 55 PCI using C
  • SULCV Valve Dem C
  • FW-FV-177 (Feedwater Recirc To Condenser Vlv) C
e. Ensure Mstr RFPT Sp/Rx LVI Ctl: C (1) lnM(manual) C (2) Level Setpoint at current RPV level C
1. Place SULCV in A (automatic) C
g. Adjust as needed to control RPV level C
  • Mstr RFPT SpIRx Lvi CtI Level Setpoint C
  • FW-FV-i 77 (Feedwater Recirc To Condenser VIv) C 0/1551 511552

, 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page 68 of 80 ENCLOSURE 5 Page 1 of 2 ATTACHMENT 8A Page 1 of 1 Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop A f20P-17)

NOTE: Ths attachment is NOT to be used for nomaI system operations START RHR SW A LOOP CCONV) START RHR SW A LOOP fNUC)

OPEN SW-ViOl OPEN SW-V105 CLOSE SW-V143 U OPEN SW-V102 START CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED CLOSE SW-V143 IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN START PUMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED PLACE RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN PLACE A & C LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS A & C LOCA TO MANUAL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE START RHR SW PMP START RHR SW PMP ADJUST Eli-PD V-F068A ADJUST El f-PDV-F068A ESTABLISH CLG WIR TO VITAL HDR ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED START RHR LOOP A IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, THEN VERIFY COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF El 1-FOI5A IS OPEN, THEN CLOSE Elf-FO17A START LOOP A RHR PMP E OPEN Eil-F028A E THROTTLE Ell-F024A THROTTLE EI1-F018A START ADDITIONAL LOOP A RHR PMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED 2 2/1061 2 S1062

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 69 of 80 ENCLOSURE 5 Page 2 of 2 ATTACHMENT 8B Page 1 of 1 Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop B (20P-i7)

NOTE This attachment is NOT to be used for normal system operabons START RHR SW B LOOP CNUC) START RHR SW B LOOP (CONV)

OPEN SW-V105 OPEN SW-Viol CLOSE SW-V143 OPEN SW-V 1 02 START PMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED CLOSE SW-V743 IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN START CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED PLACE RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN PLACE B & D LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS B & 0 LOCA TO MANUAL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE STARTRHRSWPMP START RHR SW PMP ADJUST Elf-PD V-F0688 ADJUST Eli-PD V-F0688 ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED START RHR LOOP B IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT. THEN VERIFY COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF Ell-F0f58 IS OPEN. THEN CLOSE Ell-F0178 START LOOP B RHR PMP OPEN E11-F0288 THROTTLE E1l-F024B THROTTLE E1l-F048B START ADDITIONAL LOOP B RHR PMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED 2 21063 2 S. 1064

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 70 of 80 ENCLOSURE 6 Page 1 of 1 HPCI INJECTION IN EOPs

1. IF HPCI IS TRIPPED ON HIGH WATER LEVEL, DEPRESS HIGH E WATER LEVEL SIGNAL RESET, E41-S25. PUSH BUTTON, AND ENSURE THE INDICATING LIGHT IS OFF
2. ENSURE AUXILIARY OIL PUMP IS NOT RUNNiNG E
3. ENSURE E41-V9 AND E$1-V8 ARE CLOSED
4. OPEN E41-F059
5. PLACE HPCI FLOW CONTROL. E41-FIC-R600, IN MANUAL fM),

AND ADJUST OUTPUT DEMAND TO APPROXIMATELY MIDSCALE, USING THE MANUAL LEVER.

6. START VACUUM PUMP AND LEAVE IN START
7. OPEN E41-F001
8. START AUXILIARY OIL PUMP AND LEAVE IN START
9. OPEN E41-F006, IMMEDIATELY AFTER E41-V8 HAS DUAL INDICATION
10. ENSURE E4i-V9 AND E41-V8 ARE OPEN E ii. WHEN SPEED STOPS INCREASING, THEN ADJUST SPEED TO APPROXIMATELY 2100 RPM
12. ADJUST HPCI FLOW CONTROL, E41-FIC-R600, TO OBTAIN DESIRED FLOW RATE
13. ENSURE E41-F0 12 IS CLOSED WHEN FLOW IS GREATER THAN 1400 GPM
14. ADJUST HPCI FLOW CONTROL, E41-FIC-R600, SETPOINT TO MATCH SYSTEM FLOW, AND THEN PLACE E41-FIC-R600 IN AUTO (A)
15. ENSURE E41-F025 AND E41-F026 ARE CLOSED
16. START SBGT (OP-b)
17. ENSURE BAROMETRIC CNDSR CONDENSATE PUMP IS OPERATING

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page7lofSO ENCLOSURE 7 Page 1 016 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0i -SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page 4 of 18 1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Drywell Spray Initiation 2.1.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment
  • RO Desk Locked Drawer 0 23095keys C]

2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions

1. Ensure reactor recirculation pumps tripped C RO
2. if E-bus load stripping has occurred.

THEN:

a. Confirm electrical power has been aligned per EOP-0 1-SBO-i4 C]

RD

b. Secure drywell coolers per Attachment 1 and continue at Section 2.1.3 Step 2.c C]

RO c IF RHR Loop A will be used for sprays, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 9 C]

RO U. IF RHR Loop B will be used for spras, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 10 C]

RD 3 Place afl drywell cooler control switches to OFF (LID) C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 72 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 2 of 6 DRTWELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0 1-SEP-02 Rev. 78 Page 50118 2.1.3 Dryweli Spray Actions (continued)

4. Unit 1 Only: IF drywell coolers continue to run, THEN:
  • in Panel XU-27. west side, place VA-CS-5993 (01W Cit A&D Override Switch) in STOP C RO
  • In Panel XU-28, west side, place VA-CS-5993 (01W Cit B&C Override Switch) in STOP C RO
5. Unit 2 Only: IF drwelI coolers continue to run, THEN:
  • In Panel XU-27, west side, place VA-CS-5993 (DNI Cit A&D Override Switch) in STOP C RO
  • in Panel XU-28, east side, place VA-CS-5994 (DM dr B&C Override Switch) in STOP C RO
6. iF drwelI coolers continue to run, THEN secure drwell coolers per Attachment 1 and continue at Section 2.7.3 Step 7 C RO
7. Ensure SW-V 141 fWell Water to Vital Header Vlv) CLOSED C RO
8. Ensure one valve OPEN
  • SW-Vt Ii (Cony SW To Vital Header Vlv) C RD
  • SW-Vt 17 (Nuc SW To Vital Header Viv) C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 73 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 3 of 6 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-Oi-SEP-02 Rev. 16 Page 6 of 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

9. if Loop A RHR will be used for drywell spray.

THEN:

NOTE El l-FO17A will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal [1

a. IF El 1-FO 15A (Inboard Injection Vlv) OPEN, THEN close El 1-FO17A (Outboard Injection VIv) I]

RD

b. Place El 1-CS-S 18A (213 Core Height LPCI Initiation Ovemde Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RO c Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 17A (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RD d Ensure El 1-F024A (Torus Cooling Isol Vlv) CLOSED C RD e Ensure one Loop A RHR Pump running C RD
f. Confirm requirements for Drywell Spray Initiation met
  • Safe region of Drywell Spray Initiation Limit C RO
  • Torus level below +21 inches C RD
g. Open El 1-FO21A (Drywell Spray lnbd Isol Vlv) C RO Ii Throttle open El l-FO16A(Drywell Spray Otbd Isol Vlv)to obtain between 8,000 gpm and 10000 gpm flow C RO
i. IF E-bus load stripping has occurred, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 11 C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 74 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 4 of 6 DRWJELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-Ol.-SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page 7 c 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

j. IF additional flow required.

THEN start the other RHR pump and limit flow to less than orequaltoil,500gpm C RO

k. Ensure RHRSW Loop A operating:

(1) Place El i-S19A (RHR SW Booster Pumps A & C LOCA Override Switch) in IANUAL OVERRD C RO (2) Align RHRSW to the heat exchanger fOP-43) C RO Est3blish RHR flow through the heat exchanger:

(1) Ensure El 1-F047A fHx A Inlet Vlv) OPEN C RO (2) Ensure El l-FQO3A(HxA Outlet Vlv) OPEN 0 RO NOTE El l-F048A will remain OPEN for three minutes following a LOCA signal C]

(3) Close Eli-F048A(HxABypassVlv) C RO

10. IF Loop B RHR will be used for drywell spray, THEN:

NOTE El i-F0l78 will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal C

a. IF E 1 l-F0l58 (Inboard Injection Vlv) OPEN.

THEN close El l-FO 178 (Outboard Injection Vlv) C]

RO

b. Place El 1-CS-S 188 f2f3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 75 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 5 of 6 DRYWELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0 1-SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page8ot 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

c. Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 17B (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL D RO U. Ensure Eii-F024B (Torus Cooling lsd Vlv) CLOSED ID RO
e. Ensure one Loop B RHR Pump wnning ID RO
f. Confirm requirements for Drywell Spray Initiation are met:
  • Safe region of the Drywell Spray Initiation Limit ID RO
  • Torus level below +21 inches ID RO
g. Open El 1-FO21B (Drwell Spray lnbd Isol Vlv) ID RO Ii. Throttle open El i-FO16B fDrvwell Spray Otbd lsol Vlv) to obtain between 8,000 gpm and 10,000 gpm flow ID RO I. IF. E-bus load stripping has occurred, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 11 ID RO
j. if additional flow required, THEN start the other RHR pump and limit flow to less than or equal to 11,500 gpm ID RO k Ensure RHRSW Loop B operating.

(1) Place Eil-S19B (RHR SW Booster Pumps B & D LOCA Override Switch) in MANUAL OVERRD U RO (2) Align RHRSW to the heat exchanger (OP-43) ID RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 76 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 6 of 6 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP.-O 1-SEP-02 Rev. 16 Page9ot 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

I. Establish RHR llc through the heat exchanger:

(1) Ensure El l-EcM7B (Hx B Inlet Vlv) OPEN D RO (2) Ensure El l-E0036 fHx B Outlet Vlv) OPEN . D RO NOTE El l-E048B will remain OPEN for three minutes foHoving a LOCA signal C (3) Close E1i-FO48BfHxB BpassVlv) C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 77 of 80 ENCLOSURE 8 Page 1 of2 TORUS SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-O 1-SEP-03 Rev. 012 Page 4 of?

1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS

  • As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Torus Spray 2.1.1 Manpower Required

. 1 Reactor Operator 11.2 Special Equipment None 2.1.3 Torus Spray Actions

1. Confirm tows pressure above 2.5 pstg . C RO
2. IF Loop A RHR Il be used.

THEN:

NOTE

[1 1-tO 1 1A will remain OPEN for live minutes fdlowinq a LOCA signal C

a. IF RPV injection NOT needed, THEN ensure at least one valve CLOSED:
  • El l-FO15A (Inboard Injection Vlv) C RO
  • El l.FOl?A (Outboard Injection Vlv) C RO
b. Place El 1-CS-S 1$A (2/3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Stch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RO c Momentarily place [11-CS-Si ZA (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RO
d. Ensure one Loop A RHR Pump running C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 78 of 80 ENCLOSURE 8 Page 2 of 2 TORUS SPRAY PROCEDURE 0EOP-01SEP-03 Rev. 012 Page 5 of?

2.1.3 Tows Spray Actions (continued)

e. Ensure El 1-F028A (Torus Discharge Isol Vlv) OPEN C]

RO

1. OpenE1l-tO2?AtIonsSprayIsoIVlv) C]

RO g Ensure operation ii LPCI. Torus Cooling or Drywelt Spray mode C]

RO

3. IE Loop B RHR wiU be used.

THEN:

NOTE El 1-TO 1 /B will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal C]

a IF RPV intection NOT needed.

THEN ensure at least one valve CLOSED:

  • Li 1-FO5B (Inboard Inlection Vlv) ....._ C]

RO

  • El 1 -FOl /B (Outboard Injection Vlv) . C]

RO

b. Place ElI-CS-S 186 (2/3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C]

RO

c. Momentarily place Eli-CS-SuB (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C]

RO U. Ensure one Loop B RHR Pump running C]

RO

e. Ensure Eli-T028B (Torus Discharge Isol VIv) OPEN C]

RO

1. Open El 1-F0216 (Torus Spray lsol Vlv) C]

RO

g. Ensure operation ii LPCI, Torus Cooling OR Dry.vell Spray mode .. C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 79 of 80 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment NUREG 1021 Scenario Content Category Rev. 2 Supp. I Req.

Total Malfunctions 5-8 7 Malfunctions after EOP 1-2 2 Entry Abnormal Events 2-4 2 Major Transients 1-2 1 EOPs Used 1-2 2 EOP Contingency 0-2 2 Run Time 60-90 mm 90 Crew Critical Tasks 2-3 3 Tech Specs 2 2 Instrument I Component 2 OATC Failures before Major 2 - BOP Instrument I Component 2 2 Failures after Major Normal Operations 1 1 Reactivity manipulation 1 1

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Page 80 of 80 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover Brunswick Unit 2 Plant Status Station Duty Workweek B. Craig E. Neal Manager:

Manager:

Mode: I Rx Power: 100% Gross*INet MWe*: 977 / 951 Plant Risk:

. Green Current EOOS Risk Assessment is:

SEP Time to Days Online: 82 days 49.7 hrs 200 Deg F:

Turnover:

Protected 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2C Demin Transfer Pump for Equipment: Fuel Pool Decay Heat Removal and inventory makeup.

2A/B NSW Pumps due to IA NSW pump maintenance.

1A NSW Pump is under clearance for planned maintenance.

Comments: APRM 2 has failed downscale and is bypassed.

2C TCC Pump is in service on Unit One.

The Load Dispatcher has called to perform the following as soon as possible due to an emergent repairs required on the Delco West Line:

Shft

  • . The OATC is to reduce power to 850 MWe Gross Activities The BOP operator will then Isolate 230 kV Delco West (Line 30) lAW the marked up of 20P-50, Section 6.2.6.

DUKE ENERGY. Run 2 BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION OPERATIONS TRAINING INITIAL LICENSED OPERATOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOWER POWER, REMOVE 230KV LINE FROM SERVICE, ROD DRIFT, ADHR PP TRIP, RECIRC LOOP FLOW FAILURE, HDD PP TRIP, ATWS, SLC MODE SWITCH FAILURE, ARI FAIL TO RESET REVISION 0 Developer: Date: e7/t7/2O!6 Technical Review: Va% Date: 91/2120/6 Validators: Date: 09/06/16 4a Te Facility Representative: tâe Date: 09/221/6

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 2 of 80 REVISION

SUMMARY

o Scenario developed for 2016 NRC Exam.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev.0 Page 3 of 80 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE 4 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

5 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS 6 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA 6 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES 7 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 8 7.0 INTERVENTIONS 10 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES 12 ATTACHMENT 1 - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment 49 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover 80

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page4of8o 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE Event MaIf. No. Type* Event Description 1 R ATC

- Lower power to 850 MWe to remove 230 kV Line 30 2 N - BOP Remove 230 kV Line 30 from service RDOOIM C-ATC RodDrift 3 (26-11)

C CRS (TS)

K4526A C BOP

- ADHR Secondary pump trip 4

C-CRS (AOP)

C ATC

- Recirc Loop B Flow transmitter Failure 5

C-CRS (TS)

CFO89F C BOP

- Heater Drain Deaerator Pump Trip 6

C-CRS (AOP)

Small steam leak in DW results in an ATWS requiring 7 CAOO8F M terminate and prevent actions (RSP)(ATWS) 8 K2119A C SLC Mode Switch Failure 9 K2624A C Alternate Rod Insertion reset failure

  • (N)ormal (R)eactivity, (C)omponent or Instrument, (M)ajor

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev.0

. Page5of8O]

2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

Event Description 1 After taking the watch the CRS will direct power reduced to 850 MWe.

2 The BOP will isolate 230 kV Line 30.

F Control Rod -.4l start to drift in. The crew will enter OAOP-02.0 and take action lAW 2APP-A-05 (3-2). When the high temperature alarm is received Engineering will erCu fl (3 report that scram times cannot be assured based on past history of the control rod.

L Determine TS 3.1.3 condition Cl to insert the control rod in 3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> and 02 to disarm the control rod within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

After Tech Specs are addressed the Alternate Decay Heat Removal (ADHR)

Seconday pump will trip. AOP-38.0 will be entered The Recirc Loop B flow transmitter to APRM Channel 4 will fail wiiscale resulting in a rod block and a trip input to each voter. The crew will respond per APPs and bypass 5 APRM 4. The APRM will be declared Inoperable per TS 3.3.1.1, Condition A and placed in trip within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. APRM TS Actions to be taken requires the APRM mode selector switch to be place in INOP lAW 001-18 A motor overload will occur on Heater Drain Pump 2A. The crew will reference APP

. 6 UA-06 1-7, Bus 2D 4KV Motor OvId and determine which pump has the overload condition. The crew should start HDP 20 and secure HDP 2A. The crew may reference AOP-23.0.

A small steam leak in the DW results in rising Drywell pressure requiring a reactor 7 scram. An ATWS will occur, conditions will require terminate and prevent actions to be performed.

When SLO is initiated, the mode switch will fail and the pumps will not start. LEP-03 8

will be executed to inject the boron into the core.

Alternate Rod Insertion (ARI) will not reset, the crew will perform LEP-02 to drive 9 control rods into the core. When level is stabilized after terminating and preventing ARI will be repaired to allow the rods to be manually scrammed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 6 of 80 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS Critical Task #1 Prevent the automatic actuation of ADS (LL3) to prevent low pressure ECCS injection to the reactor.

Critical Task #2 Reduce reactor power/pressure to prevent exceeding Heat Capacity Temperature Limit (HCTL) 220

..i....r i1.1tt1iIi 210 4 - -- - UNSAFE ABOVE U

0 Lj SELECTED LINE w

200 zi:ETzJ 1.

190 D f::

180 Lii a 170 :L. f-) 025 FT

(-)1.2SFT U 160  %%

I. .  :-

(-) 2.50 FT 150 f-)3.25 FT 140 j SAFE BELOW (- ) 4.25 FT 130 ELECTED LINE

(-)5.5OFT 120 4.-

110  : -

100

..+/- 1 1,150 100 300 500 700 900 1,100 0 200 400 600 800 1,000 RPV PRESSURE (PSIG) 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF the scenario may be terminated.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page_7_of 80 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES NOTE: Refer to the most current revision of each Implementing Reference.

Number Title A-05, 3-2 ROD DRIFT OAOP-02.0 CONTROL ROD MALFUNCTION/MISPOSITION UA-18, 6-1 BUS E4 4KV MOTOR OVLD.

UA-01, 2-3 ADHR PRIMARY LOOP TROUBLE UA-01, 3-3 ADHR SECONDARY LOOP TROUBLE OAOP-38.O LOSS OF FUEL POOL COOLING A-06, 2-8 APRM UPSCALE A-06, 3-8 APRM UPSCALE TRIP/INOP A-06, 5-7 FLOW REF OFF NORMAL A-05, 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK A-05, 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED UA-5, 3-5 SBGT SYS B FAILURE UA-5, 4-6 SBGT SYS A FAILURE

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 8 of 80 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS list for

1. PERFORM TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 5, Check Simulator Exam Security.
2. RESET the Simulator to IC-il.
3. ENSURE the RWM is set up as required for the selected IC.
4. ENSURE appropriate keys have blanks in switches.
5. RESET alarms on SJAE, MSL, and RWM NUMACs.
6. ENSURE no rods are bypassed in the RWM.
7. PLACE all SPDS displays to the Critical Plant Variable display (#100).
8. ENSURE hard cards and flow charts are cleaned up
9. TAKE the SIMULATOR OUT OF FREEZE
10. LOAD Scenario File.

II. ALIGN the plant as follows:

Manipulation Ensure 20 TCC pump is in service on Unit One.

Bypass APRM 2 RCC Pump D in service for ADHR RCC Pump A in service for RBCCW

12. IF desired, take a SNAPSHOT and save into an available IC for later use.
13. PLACE a clearance on the following equipment.

Component Position APRM 2 Blue tag

14. INSTALL Protected Equipment sign age and UPDATE RTGB placard as follows:

Protected Equipment

1. 2A and 2B NSW pumps
2. 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D ROC Pump, and 20 Demin Transfer Pump.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOt SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 9 of 80

15. VERIFY OENP 24.5 Form 2 (Immediate Power Reduction Form) for IC-Il is in place.
16. ENSURE each Implementing References listed in Section 7 is intact and free of marks.
17. ENSURE all materials in the table below are in place and marked-up to the step identified.

Required Materials Marked up of 20P-50, Section 6.2.6

18. ADVANCE the recorders to prevent examinees from seeing relevant scenario details.
19. PROVIDE Shift Briefing sheet for the CRS.
20. VERIFY all actions contained in TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 4, Simulator Training Instructor Checklist, are complete.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page lOof8O 7.0 INTERVENTIONS TRIGGERS Trig Type ID 1 Malfunction RD0O1M [CONTROL ROD SLOW INSERTION DRIFT]

2 j Annunciator ZA512 [CRD HYD TEMP HIGH]

3 Trigger Command MFD:RD001M,26-11 4 Remote Function RD_RDELDIS [ELECTRICAL DISARM OF ROD]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DO Override Q4526AMW [RBCCW PMP D ADHR MODE]

5 DO Override Q4526LG4 [RBCCW PMP D OFF GJ Malfunction RPO11F [ATWS 4]

6 Remote Function CC_MODE [RBCCW/ADHR VALVE LINEUPS]

6 Remote Function CCMSS [RBCCW/ADHR PUMP MODE SELECTOR SWITCH]

7 Remote Function CC_PDV [RBCCW PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE]

8 Malfunction N1063F [RECIRC LOOP B XMIUER FAILURE]

9 Malfunction CF089F [HEATER DRAIN PUMP MOTOR WINDING FAULT]

10 Malfunction NBOO6F [MSL BRK BEFORE FLOW RESIRICTORJ 11 Remote Function EP_IAEOPJP - [BYPASS LL-3 GROUP I ISOL (SEP-10)]

Trig # Trigger Text 3 KM118EDN - [SCRAM TEST SWITCH 26-11] true deletes RDOO1M ANNUNCIATORS Override OVal AVaI Actime Dactime Trig Window Description Tagname 1-2 CRD HYD TEMP HIGH ZA512 ON ON OFF 2

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 11 of 80 MALFUNCTIONS taif Mult CUrreflt Thret Actime Dactime Trig Description CONTROL ROD SLOW INSERTION 1 RDOO1M 26-11 False True N1063F APRM 4 RECIRC LOOP B XMIUER FAILURE 0.00 125.00 8 NBOO6F A MSL BRK BEFORE FLOW RESTRICTOR 0.00 1.Oe-1 0:03:00 10 HEATER DRAIN PUMP MOTOR 9 CFO89F A False True WINDING FAULT RPO11F ATWS 4 False True 5 RPO0SF AUTO SCRAM DEFEAT True True NIO32F APRM 2 APRM FAILS LO ] True True REMOTES CUITeflt ThTt Actime Trig Remf Id Mult Id Description RD_RDELDIS 26-11 ELECTRICAL. DISARM OF ROD ARM DISARM 4 6

CC_MODE PUMP-A

[ RBCCW/ADHR VALVE LINEUPS RBCCW/ADHR PUMP MODE RBCCW ADHR CC MSS A RBCCW ADHR 6 SELECTOR SWITCH CC_PDV A_V38_V5114 RBCCW PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE 1.0000 1.Oe-01 7 CC_IACW4518 2CTBCCW PUMP UNIT ALIGNMENT 1 1 EP_IAEOP]P1 BYPASS LL-3 GROUP I SOC (SEP-10) OFF ON 11 PANEL OVERRIDES Position I Actual Override Actime Dactime Trig Tag ID Description K4526A RBCCW PUMP D OFF OFF/RESEST OFF ON 5 K4526A RBCCW PMP D AUTO AUTO OFF OFF 5 K4526A RBCCW PMP 0 ON ON ON OFF 5 Q4526LG4 RBCCW PMP D OFF G ON/OFF OFF OFF 5 Q4526AMW RBCCW PMP D ADHR MODE ON/OFF ON OFF 5 K2119A S/B LIQ PUMP A & B_______ PUMP_A OFF OFF K2119A S/BLIQPUMPA&B PUMP_A&B OFF OFF K2119A S/B CIQ PUMP A & B PUMP_B OFF OFF

  • K2624A CS-5562 ARI RESET OFF OFF K2625A CS-5560 ARI INOP OFF OFF

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 12of80 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES EVENT 1: LOWER POWER TO 850 MWE Simulator Operator Actions Ensure Monitored Parameters is open and Scenario Based Testing Variables are loaded.

Simulator Operator Role Play If asked as the NE, report that reactivity plan is to reduce power with recirc flow.

If asked as the NE, report that 850 MWe gross is 86% power and 65 Mlb/hr core flow Evaluator Notes Plant Response:

Objectives: SRO Directs power to be reduced to 850 MWe BOP Monitor the Plant RO Reduces power to 850 MWe.

Success Path: Power is lowered to 850 MWe Event Termination: When directed by the Lead Evaluator, go to Event 2.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 13 of 80 EVENT 1: LOWER POWER TO 850 MWE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response NOTES SRO Conduct shift turnover shift briefing.

Direct power to be reduced using recirc flow to

-850 MWe. (20P-02, Section 6.21)

Contacts chemistry for samples due to 15%

power change.

May contact Load dispatcher to inform of power decrease.

May conduct a brief (See Enclosure 1, page 62 for format of the brief.

Reduces reactor power using recirc lAW 20P-RO 02 Section 6.2.1 May null the DVM meter.

BOP Monitors the plant

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 14 of 80 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 166 Page 45 ot 250 6.2 Shutdown 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control

1. Contirm reactor recirculation pump in operation in accordance with Section 6.1.2 NOTE Recirculation Pump speed changes ate performed when directed by OGP-05.

Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes. Other operating procedures are used simultaneously with this procedure as directed by OGP-05, Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes C Speed changes are accomplished by depressing Lower Slow. Lower Medium, or Lower Fast pushbuttons The Lower Slow pushbutton changes Recfrc pump speed at 0.06%/decrement at 1 rpm/second The Lower Medium pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 0,28%/decrement at 5 rpm/second The Lower Fast pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 2.8%/decrement at 100rpm/second C

2. IF AT ANY TIME any ot the following conditions exist.

THEN enter 1AOP-04.0. Low Core Flow.{8.1.9}

  • Entry into Region A of Power to Flow Map
  • OPRM INOPERABLE AND any of the following O Entry into Region B of Power to Flow Map O Entry into 5% Buffer Region of Power to Flow Map O Entry into OPRM Enabled Region and indications of THI (Thermal Hydraulic Instability) exist

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 J Pagel5of8O REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 46 of 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

CAUTION

  • The OPRM System monitors LPRM5 for indication of thermal hydraulic instability (THI). When greater than or equal to 25% power and less than or equal to 60% recirculation flow, alarms and automatic trips are initiated upon detection of THI. Pump operations are governed by the limits of the applicable Power Flow Map, as specified in the COLR. {8. 1 .9} C
  • Entry into the 5% Buffer Region warrants increased monitoring of reactor instrumentation for signs of Thermal Hydraulic Instability. Time in the 5% Buffer Region presents additional risk and is rninimtzed.{8. 1.9) C
  • Wfth core flow less than 57.5 x 108 lbslhr, jet pump loop tlows are required within 10% (maximum indicated difference 6.0 x 108 lbslhr). With core flow greater than or equal to 57.5 x 10 lbsThr. jet pump loop flows are required within 5% (maximum indicated difference 3.0 x 108 lbs/br) C
  • When Recirc Pump speeds are less than 40%, decreasing speed using a Lower Fast pushbutton can result in a Speed Hold condition due to exceeding the regen torque limit C BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
3. IF desired to lower the speed of both recirculation pumps simultaneously.

THEN depress Recirc Master Control Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

4. IF desired to lower the speed of an individual recitculaon pump, THEN depress the Recirc VFD AC B) Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 16 of 80 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 47 ot 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeediPower Using individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

5. Confirm the following, as applicable:
  • Recirc Pump A(B) Speed Demand, Calculated Speed, and Actual Speed have lowered
  • Reactor power lowers
  • 632-R617(R613) [Recirc Pump A(B) Discharge Flowl lowers
  • B32-VFD-IDS-003A(B) [Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Wattmeter]

lowers

  • 832-VFD-IDS-OQ1A(B)]Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Frequency Meter] lowers END R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION Date/Time Completed Perrormed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By:

Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 17of80 EVENT 2: ISOLATE 230 KV DELCO WEST LINE 30 Simulator Operator Actions Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the Load Dispatcher acknowledge report.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: 230 kV Delco West line is isolated Objectives: SRO - Direct 230kV Delco West Line isolated ATC Plant monitoring BOP Performs 20P-50 Section 6.2.6 for isolating ONLY the Delco West Line Success Path: 230 kV Delco West (Line 30) isolated Event Termination: Go to Event 3 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 18 of 80 EVENT 2: ISOLATE 230 KV DELCO WEST LINE 30 Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Directs 230kV Delco West Line isolated lAW SRO marked up version of 2OP-50, Section 6.2.6.

BOP Performs 20P-50, Section 6.2.6 RO Monitors the plant.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Pagel9of8O PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 147 Page 58 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard

1. Ensure the Unit 2 230 kV switchyard is ENERGIZED AD
2. Ensure the 4kV Auxihary Electrical Systems are DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6,2.3 N-i SRO
3. Ensure the SAT is DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6.2.4 N-i SRO
4. Ensure Caswefl Beach Pumptng Station is DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6.2.5 N-i SRO
5. Ensure required LCOs for Technical Specification Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.7 and 3.6.8 are initiated cRO
6. Obtain Load Dispatchets permission to de-energize the 230 kV switcrlyard AD A Powers the Delco West Line ONLY Person Contacted
7. Place Auto Reclose switches for the following PCBs in MAN:
  • 31 B (Bus 26 Whitevifle 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 31 A (Bus 2A Wtiitevdle 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • SOB (Bus 26 Delco West Line 230 KV Breaker)
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRI)
  • 278 (Bus 28 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRI)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 20 of 80 PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 137 Page 59 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard (continued)

CAUTION PC8 Supervisory switch must be in LOCAI. before the associated PCB fs operated from Panel XU-5 13

8. Place Supervisory switches for the following PCBs in LOCAL:
  • 31 B (Bus 28 Whitevifle 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 308 (Bus 2B Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 288 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 278 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 31A (Bus 2A Whiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
9. Open 316 (Bus 26 Whiteville 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
10. Confirm 3iB (Bus 28 Whiteville 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO 11 Open 31A(Bus 2A Whiteville 230kV PCB) N-i SRO 12 Confirm 3iA (Bus 2A Wheville 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO
13. Open 306 (Bus 28 Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) 14 Confirm 306 (Bus 26 Delco West Line 230 Ky PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights
15. Open 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) 16 Confirm 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights 17 Open 288 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 21 of8O PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATiNG 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 147 Page 60 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard (continued)

18. Confirm 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing N-i SRO the indicating ligrns
19. Open 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 Ky PCB) N-i SRO
20. Confirm 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing NI SRO the indicating lights
21. Open 276 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
22. Confirm 27B (Bus 28 Towli Creek 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by N-i SRO observing the indicating lights
23. Open 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
24. Confirm 27A (Bus 2ATown Creek 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO NOTE IT work is to be performed on a 230 kV bus, the manual disconnects are to be opened C
25. Place Supervisory switches for the following PCBs in REMOTE;
  • 316 (Bus 28 Wtiiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 306 (Bus 28 Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 278 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker N-i SRO
  • 3 JA (Bus 2A Whiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 22 of 80 PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev, 147 Page 61 01281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 KV Switchyard (continued)

Daterflme Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO N-i, Partial usage to isolate only the Delco West 230 kV Line (Line 30)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 23 of 80 EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger I to drift CR 26-1 1 into the core.

When CR 26-1 1 is inserted to 00, Initiate Trigger 2 to activate CRD High Temperature alarm.

Two minutes after control rod is disarmed or scrammed, delete CRD HYD TEMP HIGH alarm.

If asked to disarm CRD 26-1 1 Initiate Trigger 4.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the RE to address thermal limits, acknowledge the request.

When contacted for scramming control rod 26-1 1, report that Thermal Limits will NOT be exceeded by this single rod scram.

If asked as the RBAO to investigate HCU for control 26-1 1, report that the HCU scram outlet riser is hot to the touch.

When contacted as the RBAO and after high temperature alarm has been actuated, report that the CRD temperature is 390° F and slowly rising.

When contacted as the System Engineer report that based on past history of this rod (26-11) scram times cannot be guaranteed.

If contacted as the WCC to perform the single rod scram, report that there are no operators available to perform the task.

If asked as the RBAO to disarm control rod, coordinate with Sim Operator after 5 minutes.

If requested, close/reopen the 1 13 valve (Charging Header Isolation Valve) as necessary As RBAO, Report Accumulator pressure 980# after rod has been scrammed.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Control Rod 26-1 1 will drift full in. Crew should enter AOP-02.0 and take action lAW 2APP-A-05 (3-2). When the high temperature alarm is received, Engineering will report that scram times cannot be assured based on past history of the control rod. Determine TS 3.1.3 condition Cl in 3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> and C2 within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions in response to a drifting control rod and evaluate Tech Specs.

RO - Respond to a drifting control rod.

Success Path: The drifting control rod is fully inserted, determined that the control rod must be placed under clearance and electrically disarmed.

Event Termination: Go to Event 4 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 24 of 80]

EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct actions of 2APP-A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT Direct entry into OAOP-02.0, Control Rod SRO Malfunction/Misposition.

After System Engineer reports that the scram times cannot be guaranteed, according to Note 2 in TS Table 3.1.4-1 the rod must be declared inoperable.

Tech Spec 3.1.3 Control Rod Operability SRO Condition C. One or more control rods inoperable for reasons other than Condition A or B Required Action C.1 Fully insert inoperable control rod (3 hrs)

C.2 Disarm the associated CRD (4 hrs)

Contact System Engineer on high temperature condition of control rod.

SRO Contact RE to inform of rod drift and to evaluate thermal limits May direct the control rod to be scrammed to attempt to reseat the leaking outlet valve SRO lAW A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT May conduct a brief (See Enclosure 1, page 62 for format of the brief.

Monitor reactor plant parameters during evolution.

BOP May read APP actions for the OATC to perform

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 25 of 80 EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Acknowledge alarms:

A-05 (5-2) Rod Block RWM/RMCS Sys Trouble ATC A-05 (3-2) Rod Drift Announce and enter OAOP-02.0, Control Rod Malfunction/Misposition.

Perform the actions of APP-A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT as follows:

D Determine which control rod is drifting.

Select the drifting control rod and determine direction of drift.

Attempt to arrest the drift by giving a withdraw signal.

0 If rod continues to drift in, apply an RMCS insert signal and fully insert to position 00.

ATC U Attempt to locate and correct the cause of the rod malfunction as follows:

U Check and adjust cooling water header pressure if required.

U Direct AO to check for leaking scram valve.

U May direct an AO to check HCU temperature on R018 temperature recorder_(in_the_Rx_Bldg.)

Monitor core parameters, main steam line ATC radiation and off-gas activity.

Perform 20P-07 Section 6.3.17, Single Rod The examiner will prompt the Scram from RPS Test Panel. performer that the blue light is ON ATC and indication is 00 when step CRS will NA appropriate steps.

6.3.17.11 is performed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 26 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-O1 PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 94 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel Confirm the following initial conditions are met:

  • All applicable prerequisites in Section 5.0 are met
  • Attachment 1 has been reviewed
  • Communications are estabLished beeen RPS Test Panel and the Control Room
  • Reactor Engineer recommends performance of this section and has determined Technical Spedtication Thermal Limits will NOT be exceeded by this single rod scram Reador Engineer
2. IF AT ANY TIME it becomes necessary to sciarn a single control rod for operability concerns THEN perform OPT-14.2.1, Single Rod Scram Insertion Times Test for that control rod
3. Obtain permission from the Unit CR5 to perform this section CRS
4. Document applicable control rod to be scrammed in the space provided Control Rod
5. IF recommended by Reactor Engineering to support diagnostic data.

THEN record the following

  • Reactor pressure:

psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 27 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERA1YNG 20P-0? I PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 95 of 16j 6.3.1 7 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued)

BEGiN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION 6 Select applicable control rod at P603 Cv

7. Close C 12-1 13 (Charging Water Riser Isolation Valve) for the applicable control rod . - -
8. IF RWM scram time recording is recommended by Reactor Enginoenng, THEN perform the fdlowng
a. Have Reactor Enqineenng connect temporary scram time test cable to single rod scram interface box (located on terminal strip GM in P616-RMCS cabinet) and route cable up to RPS Test Panel P610 in accordance with Attachment 12. (Reference Use) -Test Cable Arranqement For RWM Scram Recordtng Reatar Engrneor (1) Insert black load into N[UTRAL socket on the P610 test panel IV (2) Insert red lead into socket corresponding to control rod to be tested at P610 IV
9. Monitor control rod position 10 IF AT ANY TIME the control rod does NOT fully scram after lovring the scram test switch.

THEN immediately notify the Unit CRS to determine operability of the rod (Technical Specificaton 3.1.3)

11. Using a currently licensed ROISRO, perform the following:
a. Scram the applicable control rod by lowering the scram test switch on RPS Test Panel P610 to the scram (down) position CV

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 28 of 80 REACTOR MANUAI CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-0/

PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 96 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued)

b. WHEN the scrammed control rod is fully inserted OR 10 seconds have elapsed (whichever ours first).

THEN return applicable scram test switch to the normal (up) position .-

IV

12. Confirm rod position display indicates O0 for scrammed rod and the GREEN Full In light is ON
13. IF control rod U NOT fully insert, THEN reference Technical Specifications for OPERABILITY - -

CR5 NOTE Holding Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch in EMERGENCY ROD IN position for a period of time will flush any ingested crud from the drive to help prevent double notching LI

14. Hold the Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch in EMERGENCY ROD IN position for at least 15 seconds and record insert stall flow.

stall tbw stall flow stall flow 1: 2: 3:

15 Repeat Seion 6.3.17 Step 14 two additional times END RM. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

16. Slowly open applicable C12-.11 3 (Charging Water Riser Isolation Valve) _J..

IV

17. Confirm associated accumulator pressure is greater than 955 psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 29 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATiNG 20P-0f PROCEDURE nov. los Page 97 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued) 1& IF RWM scram time was recorded.

THEN perform the folowing:..

a- Contact Reactor Engineering to upload Reador Enaineer

b. Remove temporary scram timing cables from P616 and P610 ............

lv

c. Perform the following to delete RWM scram data buffers:

(1) Select SCRAM DATA screen on RWM Operator Display n the Control Room (2) Press DELETE softkcy to delete scram data (3) Confirm SCRAM DATA screen displa - -

  • ROD SCRA-1 TIMING FUNCTION: READY
  • ROD SCRAM TIMING DATA: NOT TRANSFERRED

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 30 of 80 EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 5 to trip the running ADHR Pump.

When informed to align 2A RCC pump to ADHR mode Initiate Trigger 6 If asked to throttle closed the RCC-V51 14, Initiate Trigger 7.

When asked to re-open the RCC-V51 14, then adjust the remote to 1.0.

Simulator Operator Role Play If directed to investigate the trip of RCC Pump D, report the pump is tripped on overcurrent.

When directed to align RBCCW Pump 2A to ADHR mode lAW 20P-21 Section 6.3.16 (steps 2b through 2i) have Sim Op align pump to ADHR mode and inform BOP Op that the steps are complete.

When contacted as RBAO report radiation monitor is aligned per 2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 step 4.

RCC-V5154 (Rad Monitor Bypass Standby Isolation Valve) is CLOSED RCC-V5116 (Rad Monitor Bypass ADHR Isolation Valve) is OPEN RCC-V5115 (Rad Monitor Bypass Common Mode Isolation Valve) is OPEN When contacted report RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve) is throttled 90% closed. (2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 Step 5a)

When contacted report RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve) is full open. (2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 Step 5c)

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The running ADHR Secondary Loop Pump (RCC Pump D) will trip. The crew will have to start RCC Pump C. Shutdown RCC Pump A. Re-align RCC Pump A for ADHR mode and then start the pump for ADHR. (AOP-38.0 will be entered).

Objectives: SRO Direct swapping of RCC pumps and then direct starting of RCC Pump in ADHR Mode.

RO - Swap RCC pumps, Place RCC Pump in ADHR Mode.

Success Path: Standby ADHR Pump placed in service.

Event Termination: Go to Event 5 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 31 of 80]

EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct entry into OAOP-38.0, Loss of Fuel Pool SRO Cooling Direct swapping of RBCCW pumps Start RBCCW Pump C, secure A.

Direct alignment of RBCCW Pump A to ADHR Mode.

Direct starting RBCCW Pump 2A in ADHR Mode.

Direct I/C to investigate trip of RBCCW Pump 2D.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 62 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 32 of 80 EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments RO Plant Monitoring Report trip of RBCCW Pump 2D (running in ADHR Mode)

SOP UA-01 3-3, ADHR SECONDARY LOOP TROUBLE May secure the primary pump lAW this APP Announce and enter AOP-38.0, Loss of Fuel Pool Cooling Perform 20P-21, Section 6.3.10 (page 33) to swap RBCCW pumps. (Start C and secure A)

Plant announcement for the start of 2C RCC Pump and securing of 2A RCC Pump.

Perform 2OP-21, Section 6.3.16 (page 34) to align RBCCW Pump A into ADHR Mode.

Direct RB AO to perform steps 2b through 2i.

Step 3 is N/A Perform 2OP-21, Section 6.3.18 (page 37) to start RBCCW Pump A in ADHR Mode.

Notifies E&C, starting ADHR pump Step 2 is N/A Step 3 is N/A Direct the RB AO to perform step 4 and 5a.

Announce starting of RCC Pump 2A.

Direct the RB AO to perform step 5c.

May direct AO to ensure primary loop is operating lAW 2OP-1 3.1.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 33 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P.21 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 47 of 149 6.3.10 Transferring to the Standby RBCCW Pump RBCCW Mode-Ensure the following initaI conditions are met:

  • Applicable prerequisites listed in Section 5.0, Prerequisites are met
  • RBCCW System in operation with two pumps aligned for RBCCW Mode in service
2. Start the standby RBCCW pump by placing the associated pump control switch in ON:
  • RBCCWPUMP2A
  • RBCCWPUMP2C
3. Secure the desired RBCCW pump by placing the associated pump control switch in OFF:
  • RBCCWPUMP2C
  • RBCCWPUMP2D
4. lEa third RBCCW pump is aligned to RBCCW Mode, 4p RBCCW discharge header pressure has stabilized, THEN place the pump control switch in AUTO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 34 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-21 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 68 of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode

1. Ensure the following initial condition is met:
  • One RBCCW Heat Exchanger is aligned to ADHR Mode per Section6.3.14
  • Key for RBCCW/ADHR Mode Selectot Switch has been obtained from one of the following:

O Control Rm Key Locket key 98 O WCC Key Locker key 167 or 168 NOTE RBCCW Pump 2A and RBCCW Pump 2D can support either RGCCW Mode or ADHR Mode. A Mode Selector Switch Is located on the pump breaker and a white ADHR Mode indicating light is on the RTGB. This switch determines which of the two header pressures (RBCCW or ADHR) wilt be monitored for the pump auto start on low header pressure when the pump control switch is placed in AUTO. When the Mode Selector Switch is placed in the ADHR Mode position, the white light is ON on the RTGB C

2. IF aligning RBCCW Pump 2A to ADHR Mode.

THEN perform the following

a. Ensure RBCCW Pump 2A control switch is in OFF
b. Close RCC-V32 (RBCCW Pump 2A RBCCW Suction)
c. Close RCC-V38 (RBCCW Pump 2A RBCCW Mode Discharge Valve)

U. Open RCC-V5105 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Suction Valve)

e. Open RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
f. Open RCC-V303 (RBCCW Pump 2A Casing Vent Valve)
g. WHEN a steady stream of water is present.

THEN close RCC-V303 (RBCCW Pump 24 Casing Vent Valve)

h. Ensure 2-RCC-SS-7667 (Pump 24 RBCCW,ADHR Mode Selector Switch) located at MCC 2XE. in ADHR

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 35 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2i SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 69of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode (continued)

i. Remove key from 2-RCC-SS-7667 (Pump 2A RBCCW/ADHR Mode Selector Swxtch)
j. Confirm the ADHR white indicating light on the RTGB for RBCCW Pump 2A is ON
3. IF aligning RBCCW Pump 2D to ADHR Mode, THEN perform the following
a. Ensure RBCCW Pump 2D control switch is m OFF
b. Close RCC-V5 107 (RBCCW Pump 20 RBCCW Mode Suction Valve)
c. Close RCC-V51 11 <RBCCW Pump 20 RBCCW Mode Discharge Valve) d Open RCC-V5104 (R5CCW Pump 2D ADHR Mode Suction Valve)
e. Open RCC-V51 13 (RBCCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
1. Open RCC-V5139 (RBCCW Pump 2D Casing Vent Valve)
g. WHEN a steady stream of water is present.

THEN close RCC-V5 139 (RBCCW Pump 20 Casing Vent Valve)

h. Ensure 2-RCC-SS-7668 (Pump 2D RBCCWIADHR Mode Selector Switch) located at MCC 2XD, in ADHR
i. Remove key from 2-RCC-SS-7668 (Pump 2D RBCCW1ADHR Mode Selector Switch)
j. Confirm the ADHR white indicating light on the RTGB for RBCCW Pump 2D is ON

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 36 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 2OP2 1 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 70 of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode (continued)

NOTE ADHR Mode piping is placed either in Standby Mode or in service to ensure RBCCW circulation and proper chemistry control wtien NOT undergoing maintenance D

4. Place ADHR in service per Section 63.18, Starting an RBCCW Pump-ADHR Mode Date/Time Completed Performed By (Pnnt) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 37 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2 1 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 74 of 149 6.3.18 Starting an RBCCW Pump ADHR Mode

1. Ensure the following initial conditions are met
  • Designated RBCCW Pump is aligned to ADHR Mode per Section 6.3.16
  • RBCCW pump is operating in ADHR Mode, THEN E&C notified commencing startup of ADHR t1ode Person Notified NOTE RBCCW Pump 2A and RBCCW Pump 2D can support either RBCCW Mode or ADHR Mode. A Mode Selector Switch is located on the pump breaker and a white ADHR Mode indicating light is on the RTGB. This switch determines which of the two header pressures (RBCCW or ADHR) wilt be monitored for the pump auto start on low header pressure wtien the pump control switch is placed in AUTO. When the Mode Selector Switch is placed in the ADHR Mode position, the wtite light is ON on the RTGB 0 RBCCW Pump 2D will NOT auto re-start wtien power returns after a LOOP or bus under voltage condition with the control switch in ON or AUTO. The control switch must be placed in OFF/RESET prior to restarting the pump 0 CAUTION Two pump operation in ADHR Mode subjects RCC-V37 (RBCCW Pump IA Discharge Check Valve) and RCC-V51 10 (RBCCW Pump 1D Discharge Check Valve) to accelerated wear. This lineup is expected to be utilized only when maximum ADHR capacity is required. [8.7.2] 0
2. IF desired to start a second pump aligned to ADHR Mode, THEN perform the following a Obtain concurrence from Engineering to start a second pump in the ADHR Mode Person Coitacted
b. Go to Step 5.b

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 38 of 8]

REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 75 of 149 6.318 Starting an RBCCW Pump ADHR Mode (continued)

3. IF the ADHR Mode has been shutdown for greater than 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> OR maintenance has been petfomied, THEN fill and vent the ADHR piping per Section 63.13
4. Ensure the following valve alignment for system radiation monitoring:
  • RCC-V51 54 fRau Monitor Bypass Standby Isolation Valve) is CLOSED
  • RCC-V5i 16 (Rad Monitor Bypass ADHR Isolation Valve) is OPEN
  • RCC-V51 15 fRad Monitor Bypass Common Mode Isolation Valve) is OPEN
5. For the RBCCW pump aligned to ADHR Mode to be started, perform the following
a. Throttle 80% to 95% dosed the associated pump discharge valve:
  • RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
  • RCC-V51 13 (RBCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
b. Start an RBCCW pump aligned to ADHR Mode by placing the associated pump control switch in ON:
  • RBCCWPUMP2A
  • RBCCWPUMP2D
c. IF throttled in Step 5.a, THEN slowly open the associated pump discharge valve
  • RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
  • RCC-V5 113 (RBCCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 39 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-21 I SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev1 Page 76 of 149 6.3.18 Starting an RBCCW Pump -ADHR Mode (continued)

d. Ensure a log entry is made stating RBCCW pumps are in service in the ADHR Mode and Engineering has been notified NOTE The normal parameters for Supplemental Spent Fuel Pool Cooling are provided in Attachment 1, Normal System Operation Parameters. Equipment manipulations to maintain these parameters are performed per 20-13.1, Alternate Decay Heat Removal System Primary Loop Operating Procedure C
6. IF a Primary Loop pump is operating, THEN maintain Primary Loop flow per 20-13.1, Alternate Decay Heat Removal System Primary Loop Opemhng Procedure
7. Ensure Plant Process Computer setup as follows per OOP-55, Plant Process and ERFIS Computer Systems Operating Procedure
  • PPC U2RCCM 11 point ENABLED
  • PPC U2RCCAO95 Value Monitoring setup with the nominal flow values per Attachment 1 Section 2.5 for the number of RBCCW Pumps in ADHR Mode to provide audible alarms for ADHR secondary flow changes Date/Time Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 40 of 80 EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 8 to activate Recirc Loop B Flow failure.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as l&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

After LCD entries have been determined and SRO is waiting for l&C, call as WCCSRO and request APRM 4 be placed in tripped condition to support l&C trouble shooting. The WCC will hang the status control tag paperwork.

If asked to pull fuses (for TRM 3.3 actions, 2-C12A-F1 Labeled ROD OUT BLOCK RELAYS CI2A in P616 panel) acknowledge the request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Flow reference off normal alarm, rod block and scram signal to all 4 voters Flow transmitter signals are displayed on PC display 845, and on individual NUMACs by selecting Input Status.

Objectives: SRO - Determine LCO for APRM 4 inoperability and direct placing channel in trip.

RD Respond To A Flow Unit/Transmitter Failure Per APP A-06 5-7.

Success Path: APRM 4 TS 3.3.1.1 declaration and placed in trip condition lAW 001-18.

Event Termination: Go to Event 6 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 41 of8O EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct actions of APPs SRO Direct I&C to investigate Evaluate Tech Spec 3.3.1.1 Reactor Protection System Instrumentation TS 3.3.11, Function 2b, Required Action Al.

With one or more required channels inoperable, place in trip condition in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Evaluate TRM 3.3 Control Rod Block Instrumentation TRM 3.3, Function Ia, Required Condition Al.

With one of the required channels not operable -

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to restore to operable.

Refers to 001-18 for actions to place APRM 4 in a tripped condition.

Direct APRM 4 mode selector switch placed in INOP to allow I&C troubleshooting.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 62 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 42 of 80 EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Monitors the plant.

May check back panel APRM indications.

Acknowledges, refers to & reports annunciators A-6 2-8 APRM UPSCALE 3-8 APRM UPSCALE TRIP/INOP ATC 5-7 FLOW REF OFF NORMAL A-5 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED Diagnose and report failure of APRM 4 Flow Transmitter Obtains key number 1 14 from the SRO key locker to place APRM 4 in trip.

Places APRM mode selector switch in INOP lAW 001-18.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 43 of 80 EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 9 to trip a Heater Drain Pump.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as AC to investigate, wait until pump is tripped and report over-current flags for all phases of 2A HDP 4KV breaker on Bus 2D If contacted as RE for reduced EW Temp, acknowledge any requests.

If asked as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Heater Drain Pump 2A shaft seizes and trips on overcurrent. Heater Drain tank level will rise and the crew will throttle HD-V57 to stabilize HD Tank level. If the standby HDP is not started, REP suction pressure will lower during the transient requiring power reduction to stabilize Condensate/feedwater.

Objectives: SRO Directs OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures, and possible OAOP-03.0, Positive Reactivity Addition, entry.

RO Diagnose HDP pump trip and start the standby HDP.

Success Path: 2C HDP started with HDD level recovered in the normal band.

Event Termination: Go to Event 7 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 44 0180]

EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct annunciator response for UA-04:

4-10 HD PUMP A TRIP 2-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH-LOW 3-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP SRO Direct entry into OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures Direct starting standby HDP.

May direct 2AOP-3.0, Positive Reactivity Addition, entry if power rises due to the HDD Ext Trip.

May direct monitoring of final feedwater temperature.

May direct maintenance to investigate trip May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 62 forformat)

RO Plant Monitoring May reduce power lAW OAOP-23 to stabilize reactor water level.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 45 of 80 EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP SOP Recognize and report annunciators UA-04 4-10 HO PUMP A TRIP 2-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH-LOW 3-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP UA-06 1-7 BUS 204 KV MOTOR OVLD Manually starts 2C HDP lAW APP or AOP.

Enter and announce OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures.

Monitors final feedwater temperature (FFWT) lAW 20 1-03.2 May open the HD-V57 to assist in HDD level recovery.

Directs an A0 to 4.16 Ky Switchgear Bus 2D to investigate 2A HDP trip Verifies auto actions for HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP, if it occurs.

1. Non-return valves (EX-VI I and EX-Vi 2) to deaerator close. (Only close if turbine load is below 500 MWe)
2. HDD Extraction Line B moisture removal valves (MVD-LV-266 and MVD-LV-267) open.

May reference 20P-35 to recover MRVs following HDD level restoration.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 46 of 80]

EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN DW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARt RESET FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger IOta activate small steam leak in DW.

If requested to defeat Group I LL3, wait 2 minutes, and install jumpers (Trigger II)

If requested to install LEP-02, Section 2.3 jumpers, wait 5 minutes, and inform the SRO that the jumpers are installed (RPOO5F already active).

Simulator Operator Role Play Acknowledge request as l&C to investigate failure of SLC switch.

If requested as I&C to investigate the failure of the ARt reset failure, acknowledge the request.

Acknowledge request to perform LEP-03 actions.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Most control rods will fail to insert on the scram. The crew will respond to the ATWS per EOP-01-ATWS. When SLC initiation is attempted, the switch positions will not work. The crew will enter LEP-03 and align for alternate boron injection using CRD.

The scram cannot be reset due to failure of the ARI to reset.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions to control reactor power per EOP-01-ATWS..

RD - Perform actions for an ATWS per EOP-01-ATWS.

Success Path: Lower level to control power, inject SLC, insert control rods.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 47 of 80 EVENTS 71819: STEAM LEAK IN DW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Enter RSP and transition to ATWS.

Direct mode switch to shutdown when steam flow < 3 Mlbs/hr.

Direct ARI initiation.

Direct Recirc Pumps Tripped. CRITICAL TASK #2 SRO Direct SLC initiation, then LEP-03, Alternate Boron Injection.

Direct ADS inhibited. CRITICAL TASK #1 Direct RWCU isolation verification.

Direct LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion CRITICAL TASK #2 Direct Group 10 switches to override reset.

Direct terminate and prevent HPCUFeedwater (CS/RHR when LOCA signal received) to CRITICAL TASK #2 lower level to 90 inches.

When level reaches 90 inches, evaluate Table Q-2:

If not met, establishes a level band of LL4 to +90 inches.

If met, directs RPV injection to remain terminated.

Enters POOP Directs Torus cooling when Torus temperature is greater than 95° F, (See Enclosure 5, page 68)

Directs Torus Sprays before torus pressure reaches 11.5 psig (See Enclosure 8, page 77)

Directs Drywell Sprays when torus pressure exceeds 11.5 psig (See Enclosure 7, page 71)

Direct injection established to maintain RPV level LL4 to TAF (or the level at which APRMs indicate downscale)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 48 of 80 EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN OW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Place mode switch to shutdown when steam RO flow < 3x106 lb/hr.

Initiates ARI.

Trips Recirc Pumps. CRITICAL TASK #2 Initiates SLC.

Determines SLC switch failure.

Directs LEP-03, Alternate Boron Injection Recognizes failure of SLC switch and reports to CRS.

Monitor APRMs for downscale.

Performs LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion.

Section 2.1, Initial Actions (see page 48)

Section 2.3, Reset RPS and Initiate a Manual CRITICAL TASK #2 Scram (see page 51)

Section 2.4, Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) (see page 54)

May also perform Section 2.5, Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure (see page 56).

Recognizes failure of ARI to reset, informs CRS

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 49 of 8p]

EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN OW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Places ADS in inhibit. CRITICAL TASK #1 Places Group 10 switches to override I reset Terminate and prevent injection to RPV. CRITICAL TASK #2 Terminates and prevents HPCI lAW Hard Card. (Enclosure 2, page 63)

Terminates and Prevents Feedwater lAW Hard Card. (Enclosure 3, page 64)

May place HPCI in service for level control during ATWS when directed by the SRO.

(Enclosure 6, page 70)

Restart RFP to maintain level as directed by SRO. (Enclosure 4, page 65)

When Torus temperature is greater than 95° F, places Torus Cooling in service.

(Enclosure 5, page 68)

When directed, places Torus Sprays in service.

(Enclosure 8, page 77)

When directed, places Drywell Sprays in service.

(Enclosure 7, page 71)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 50 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 R3ge4of37 1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS

  • As dwected by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs)
  • As directed by Severe Accident Management GudeIine (SAMGs) 2.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 2.1 Initial Actions 2.1.7 Manpower Required
  • 1 Reactor Operator
  • 1 Auxiliary Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment None NOTE
  • Two-handed operation is allowed during implementation of this procedure in order to minimize delay in control rod insertion D
  • Section 2.1.3 Step 1 through Step 6 may be performed concurrently with the test of this procedure C
  • The system designation Cii is for Unit 1 and C12 for Unit 2 C 2.1.3 Operator Actions
1. Monitor reactor power on APRMs until IRM recorders on scale C RO
2. Insert IRMs and monitor reactor power on IRM recorders C RO
3. Downrange IRMs to bring them on scale C RO
4. WHEN IRM5 on Range 3 OR below.

THEN insert SRMs C RO

5. Monitor reactor period C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 51 of8O ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 I Rev. 029 Page 5 otT]

2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

6. Monitor control rod position using:
  • Process computer RO
  • Four rod [3 RO
  • Full core display C RO
7. WHEN either:
  • Reactor engineering has determined the reactor ill remain shutdovai under all conditions without boron C RO THEN perform Section 2.2, Control Rod Insertion Verification on Page7 C RO

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 52 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 6 of 37 2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

8. Insert control rods by one or more methods:
  • Section 2.4, Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) on Page 18 C RO
  • Section 2.5, Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure on Page 20 C RO
  • Section 2,8, Venting Over Piston Area on Page 32 C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 53 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-0 1 -LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 15 of 37 2.3 Reset RPS and Initiate a Manual Scram 2.3.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.3.2 Special Equipment
  • RO Desk Locked Drawer 0 4 jumpers (15, 16, 17 and 18) C]

2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions NOTE Section 2.3.3 Step 1 and Step 2 may be performed concurrently C]

IF an automatic scram signal present AND power available to RPS bus.

THEN install jumpers to bypass reactor scram:

  • Jumper 15 in Panel H 12-P609, Terminal Board DD, from right side of Fuse C71A(C72A)-F 14A to Terminal 4 of Relay C7JA(C72A)-K12E C]

RO

  • Jumper 16 in Panel Hi 2-P609, Terminal Board 88, from left side of Fuse C71A(C72A)-F14C to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-K12G C]

RO

  • Jumper 17 in Panel H12-P611, Terminal Board DD, from right side of Fuse C7IAfC72A)-F 148 to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-KI2F C]

RO

  • Jumper 18 in Panel H12-P611, Terminal Board BB, from left side of Fuse C7 1Af C72A)-F 14D to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-K12H C]

RO

2. Inhibit ARI:
a. Place CII (Cl 2)-CS-5560 (ARI Auto/Manual Initiation Switch) t0INOP C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 54 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-O1-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 16 of 37 2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions (continued)

b. Place and hold Cli (C12)-CS-5562 (ARI Reset) switch in RESET 0 RO
c. WHEN 5 seconds have elapsed.

THEN release 0 RO

d. Confirm ted TRIP light located above CI 1(C12)-CS-556 1 (ARI Initiation) OFF 0 RO
3. Ensure Disch Vol Vent & Drain Test switch in ISOLATE 0 RO
4. Conhrm CLOSED:
  • C1i(CI2)-V139(DischVolVentVlv) 0 RO
  • Cl 1fC 12)-CV-F0 10 (Disch Vol Vent VIv) 0 RO
  • Cl 1(C12)-V 140 fDisch Vol Drain Vlv) 0 RO Cl 1fCI2)-CV-F0i 1 fDisch Vol Drain VIv) 0 RO
5. Reset RPS 0 RO
6. IF either RPS A OR B can be RESET, THEN go to Section 2.3.3 Step 8 0 RO
7. IF RPS CANNOT be RESET, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 0 RO
8. Place Disch Vol Vent & Drain Test switch to NORMAL 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 55 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 17 of 37 2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions (continued)

9. Confirm OPEN:
  • Ci i(C12)-V 139 (Disch Vol Vent Vlv) C]

RO

  • Ci l(C12)-CV-F0l0 (Disch Vol Vent Vlv) C]

RO

  • Ci 1fC12)-V140 (Disch Vol Drain Vtv) C]

RO

  • Cl i(C12-CV-F0i 1 fDisch Vol Drain Vlv) C]

RO

10. WHEN the scram discharge volume has drained for approximately 2 minutes OR A-05 1-6, SDV Hi-Hi Level RPS Thp clears, THEN continue C]

RO ii. IF venting control rod over piston area per Section 2.8, THEN notify AO to secure venting prior to inserting a manual scram C]

RO

12. Manually scram the reactor C]

RO 13 IF control rods moved inward AND ll control rods NOT inserted to

.Q.. beyond Position 00, THEN return to Section 2.3.3 Step 3 C]

RO

14. IF.II control rods inserted to OR beyond Position 00 9 control rods did NOT move inward, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 56 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSER11ON OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 180137 2.4 Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) 2.4.7 Manpower Required I Reactor Operator 2.4.2 Special Equipment RO Desk Locked Dravr Unit 1 Only: 1 5450 key for RWM D 0 Unit 2 Only: 1 5451 key ror RWM 0 2.4.3 RMCS Actions

1. IF a reactor scram sealed in, THEN ensure available CR0 pumps operating 0 RO
2. Ensure Ci1(C12)-FC-R600fCRD Flow Control) in MAN 0 RO
3. IF a CRD pump NOT operating, THEN:
a. Close the in-service Cl 1(C12)-FOO2A(F0028) (Flow Control Vlv) 0 RO
b. Start one CR0 pump 0 RO c, Adjust CI 1fC 12)-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to greater than or equal to 30 gpm 0 RO
d. IF avalabte, THEN start the second CRD pump 0 RO
4. IFNO CR0 pump can be started, THEN return to Section 21.3 Step 7 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 57 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 19 of 37 2.4.3 RMCS Actions (continued)

5. Insert control rods with RMCS:

a Throttle open ci 1(C12)-EOO2A(E0026)fFIow Control Vlv) until drive water differential pressure greater than or equal to 26opsid D RO

b. IF drive water differential pressure less than 260 psid, THEN throttle closed Cli (Cl 2)-PC V-F003 (Drive Pressure Vlv) until drive water differential pressure greater than or equal to 260 psid C RO
c. Bypass RWM C RO d Insert control rods with Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch C RO
6. WHEN fl control rods inserted to beyond Position 00 .Q CANNOT be inserted with RMCS.

THEN return to Section 2.7.3 Step 7 C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 58 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-0 1 -LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 20 of 37 2.5 Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure 2.5.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.5.2 Special Equipment None 2.5.3 Cooling Water Header Actions
1. IF a reactor scram sealed in, THEN ensure available CRD pumps operating D RO
2. JE a CR0 pump QI operating, THEN:
a. Ensure Cl 7fC12)-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) in MAN D RO
b. Close the in-service Cl 1fC12)-FOO2AfFOO2B) (Flow Control Vlv) D RO
c. Start one CRD pump D RO ci. Adjust Cl i(Ci2-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to greater than or equal to 30 gpm C RO
e. IF available, THEN start the second CRD pump C RO
3. IFNO CRD pump can be started, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 C RO t

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 59 of 80 OEOP-01-LEP-02 I ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION Rev. 029 I Page2lof37 L

2.5.3 Cooling Water Header Actions (continued)

4. IF a reactor scram NOT sealed in, THEN maximize cooling water header pressure:
a. Ensure Cl 1fC12)-FC-R600 (CRD flow Control) in MAN and fully open the in service Cl 1(C12).-FOO2A(F0026)fFlow Control Vlv) D RO b Fully open Cii (C12)-PCV-F003 (Drive Pressure VIv) D RO
5. WHEN jj control rods inserted to beyond Position 00 control rods NOT moving inward, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 60 of 80 TERMINATION Simulator Operator Actions When directed by the Lead Evaluator, delete the following commands:

Malfunction K2624A, ARI Reset Malfunction K2625A, ARI INOP Malfunction RPOI 1 F, ATWS 4 (Make sure RPS is reset and scram air header pressurized before deleting)

When directed by the Lead Evaluator, place the simulator in FREEZE DO NOT RESET THE SIMULATOR PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF CONCURRENCE TO DO SO FROM THE LEAD EXAMINER Simulator Operator Role Play After Sim Operator has deleted SDV malfunction, Inform the CRS that a loose wire was found on ARI switch and it has been repaired.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: When actions are taken to control reactor water level during the ATWS after terminating and preventing, ARt will be repaired and rods can be inserted.

Objectives: SRO - Directs actions for an ATWS.

RO Insert control rods lAW LEP-02.

Success Path: Rods inserted with LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion.

Scenario Termination: When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF with injection established, the scenario may be terminated.

Remind students not to erase any charts and not to discuss the scenario until told to do so by the evaluatorlinstructor.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 61 of 80 TERMINATION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Exit ATWS and enter RVCP when all rods are SRO in.

Direct level restored to 170 200 inches after rods are all in.

RO Confirms ARI reset when reported fixed.

Inserts a scram after discharge volume has drained for 2 minutes.

Reports all rods in.

Maintains reactor pressure as determined by the BOP CRS.

Maintains level as directed by the SCO.

Restores level to 170 200 inches after all rod inserted. (Enclosure 4, page 65, contains actions for restart of Condensate and Feedwater)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 62 of 80 ENCLOSURE I Page 1 of I CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS AD-OP-ALL-i 000 Rev. 6 Page 90 of go AUACHMENT $

Page 1 of 1

<< Crew Brief Template>>

1] Announce Crew Brief Begin Brie?

D NI crew members acknowledge announcement (AZ Required)

I] Updatetflecrewas needed:

D Descnbe what happened and major actions taken D Procedures in-progress D Notifications:

Recap 0 Maintenance 0 Engineering 0 Others tDispatcher, Station Management. etc.)

0 Future Direction and pnonties C Discuss any contingency plans (AZ Required)

C Solicit questionstoncerns from each crew member:

DROs Input 0 CRS C STA 0 Are there any alarms unexpected for the plant conditions?

C What is the status of Cnticat Parameters?

(AZ Required)

EAt.

C Provide EAL and potential escalation criteria C Restore normal alarm announcement7 fYesNo)

Flnl:h Brief C Announce End of Bnet

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 63 of 80 ENCLOSURE 2 Page 1 of 1 SECURING HPCI INJECTION 1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS WHEN DIRECTED BY 2EOP-O1-LPC TO TERMINAIE AND PREVENT HPCI INJECTION, OR D

2. WHEN DIRECTED BY OEOP-Oi-RXFP TO TERMINATE AND PREVENT HPCI INJECTION. OR C
3. WHEN PERMISSION GIVEN DY THE UNIT CRS TO SECURE HPCI INJECTION WITH A HPCI AUTO START SIGNAL PRESENT C 2.0 PROCEDURAL STEPS
1. IF HPCI IS NOT OPERATING. PERFORM THE TOLLOWING:

a PLACE HPCI AUXILIARY OIL PUMP CONTROL SWITCH IN PULL-TO-LOCK C

2. IF HPC( IS OPERATING. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING:
b. DEPRESS AND HOLD THE HPCI TURBINE TRIP PUSHBUTTON C
c. WHEN HPCI TURBINE SPEED IS 0 RPM. AND HPCI TURBINE CONTROL VALVE, E41-V9 IS CLOSED. THEN PLACE HPCI AUXILIARY OIL PUMP CONTROL SWITCH IN PULL-TO-LOCK C U. WHEN HPCI TURD BRG OIL PRESS LO.

A-01 4- 2. IS SEALED IN. THEN RELEASE THE HPCI TURBINE TRIP PUSHBUTTON C

e. ENSURE HPCI TURBINE STOP VALVE, [41-VS.

AND HPCI TURBINE CONTROL VALVE. E41-V9.

REMAIN CLOSED, AND HPCI DOES NOT RESTART C 1 2)1368 Sf1369

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 64 of 8_Qj ENCLOSURE 3 Page 1 of 1 Terminating and Preventing Injection From Condensate and Feedwater During EOPs (20P-32)

1. IF desired TRIP all operating REPs. []
2. IF one or more REPS are in service IDLE one REP as tollows
a. IF two RFPs are operating THEN TRIP one E
b. PERFORM either of the following for the operating REP
1. PLACE MANIDFCS control switch to MAN.

2, RAPIDLY REDUCE speed to approximately 1000 rpm with the LOWERJRAISE speed control switch.

OR 1 PLACE REPT Speed Control in M (MANUAL)

2. SELECT DEM and RAPIDLY REDUCE speed to approximately 2550 rpm.
3. CLOSE the following valves

- FW HTR 5A OUTLET VLVS, FW-V6

- FW HTR 55 OUTLET VLVS, FW-V8 OR

- FW HTR 4A INLET VLV, EW-Vi 1$

- FW HTR 45 INLET VLV, FW-Vi 19

4. ENSURE the SULCV is dosed by performing the following
a. PLACE SULCV, in M (Manual),
b. SELECT DEM and DECREASE signal until VALVE DEM E indicates 0%
5. ENSURE EW-V120. is closed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 65 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 1 of 3 Aligning Condensate and Feedwater After Terminating and Preventing Ensure FW.FV-177 (Feedwater Recwc to Condenser Vlv) CLOSED .......El

2. Ensure FW Control Mode Select in 1 ELEM El
3. Ensure at least one valve OPEN El
  • 821-F0325 (Feedwater Isol Vlv) El 4 IFNO REP operating, THEN: El
a. Ensure REPT A(S) Sp CD.

(1) lnM(manual) El (2) Pmp A(S) Dern at 0.0 PCT El

b. Place EW-FV-46f47) tREP (NB) Recirc Vlv] in OPEN El
c. Ensure El
  • FW-V3(V4) [RFP (A/B) Disch Vlv] OPEN El
  • REP A(S) ManuatIDFCS control switch in MANUAL El d Depress: El (1) Reactor Water Level High Reset A El (2) Reactor Water Level High Reset B El (3) Reactor Water Level High Reset C El (4) REP A(S) Reset El
e. Confirm OPEN El
  • REP A(S) HP Stop Vlvs El f Depress REP A(S) REPT Start El
g. WHEN at 1000 rpm.

THEN raise REP A(S) to at least 2550 rpm El

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 66 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 2 of 3 Aligning Condensate and Feedwater After Terminating and Preventing (continued)

5. IE desired to transier REP Af 5) to DFCS, THEN D
a. Ensure speed at least 2550 rpm D
b. Depress DFCS Ctfl Reset D c Place Manual/DFCS control switch in DFCS D
6. Raise RFP A(S) speed until discharge pressure approximately 100 psig above RPV pressure band D 011550 S/I 372

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 67 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 3 of 3 Injection After Terminating and Preventing Condensate and Fe.dwater WHEN RPV injection directed.

THEN as needed C

  • Adjust SULCV Valve Dem C
  • Throttle FW-V 120 (FW Htrs 4&5 Byp VIv) C
2. WHEN automatic control desired, THEN: C
a. Confirm RPV level greater than + 170 inches C
b. Ensure FW-V 120 (FW Htrs 4&5 Byp VIv) CLOSED C c Open FW-V 10 (FW Recirc To Cond Isol VIv) C
d. Adjust SULCV to between 25 PCT and 55 PCI using C
  • SULCV Valve Dem C
  • FW-FV-177 (Feedwater Recirc To Condenser Vlv) C
e. Ensure Mstr RFPT Sp/Rx LVI Ctl: C (1) lnM(manual) C (2) Level Setpoint at current RPV level C
1. Place SULCV in A (automatic) C
g. Adjust as needed to control RPV level C
  • Mstr RFPT SpIRx Lvi CtI Level Setpoint C
  • FW-FV-i 77 (Feedwater Recirc To Condenser VIv) C 0/1551 511552

, 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page 68 of 80 ENCLOSURE 5 Page 1 of 2 ATTACHMENT 8A Page 1 of 1 Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop A f20P-17)

NOTE: Ths attachment is NOT to be used for nomaI system operations START RHR SW A LOOP CCONV) START RHR SW A LOOP fNUC)

OPEN SW-ViOl OPEN SW-V105 CLOSE SW-V143 U OPEN SW-V102 START CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED CLOSE SW-V143 IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN START PUMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED PLACE RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN PLACE A & C LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS A & C LOCA TO MANUAL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE START RHR SW PMP START RHR SW PMP ADJUST Eli-PD V-F068A ADJUST El f-PDV-F068A ESTABLISH CLG WIR TO VITAL HDR ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED START RHR LOOP A IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, THEN VERIFY COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF El 1-FOI5A IS OPEN, THEN CLOSE Elf-FO17A START LOOP A RHR PMP E OPEN Eil-F028A E THROTTLE Ell-F024A THROTTLE EI1-F018A START ADDITIONAL LOOP A RHR PMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED 2 2/1061 2 S1062

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 69 of 80 ENCLOSURE 5 Page 2 of 2 ATTACHMENT 8B Page 1 of 1 Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop B (20P-i7)

NOTE This attachment is NOT to be used for normal system operabons START RHR SW B LOOP CNUC) START RHR SW B LOOP (CONV)

OPEN SW-V105 OPEN SW-Viol CLOSE SW-V143 OPEN SW-V 1 02 START PMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED CLOSE SW-V743 IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN START CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED PLACE RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN PLACE B & D LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS B & 0 LOCA TO MANUAL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE STARTRHRSWPMP START RHR SW PMP ADJUST Elf-PD V-F0688 ADJUST Eli-PD V-F0688 ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED START RHR LOOP B IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT. THEN VERIFY COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF Ell-F0f58 IS OPEN. THEN CLOSE Ell-F0178 START LOOP B RHR PMP OPEN E11-F0288 THROTTLE E1l-F024B THROTTLE E1l-F048B START ADDITIONAL LOOP B RHR PMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED 2 21063 2 S. 1064

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 70 of 80 ENCLOSURE 6 Page 1 of 1 HPCI INJECTION IN EOPs

1. IF HPCI IS TRIPPED ON HIGH WATER LEVEL, DEPRESS HIGH E WATER LEVEL SIGNAL RESET, E41-S25. PUSH BUTTON, AND ENSURE THE INDICATING LIGHT IS OFF
2. ENSURE AUXILIARY OIL PUMP IS NOT RUNNiNG E
3. ENSURE E41-V9 AND E$1-V8 ARE CLOSED
4. OPEN E41-F059
5. PLACE HPCI FLOW CONTROL. E41-FIC-R600, IN MANUAL fM),

AND ADJUST OUTPUT DEMAND TO APPROXIMATELY MIDSCALE, USING THE MANUAL LEVER.

6. START VACUUM PUMP AND LEAVE IN START
7. OPEN E41-F001
8. START AUXILIARY OIL PUMP AND LEAVE IN START
9. OPEN E41-F006, IMMEDIATELY AFTER E41-V8 HAS DUAL INDICATION
10. ENSURE E4i-V9 AND E41-V8 ARE OPEN E ii. WHEN SPEED STOPS INCREASING, THEN ADJUST SPEED TO APPROXIMATELY 2100 RPM
12. ADJUST HPCI FLOW CONTROL, E41-FIC-R600, TO OBTAIN DESIRED FLOW RATE
13. ENSURE E41-F0 12 IS CLOSED WHEN FLOW IS GREATER THAN 1400 GPM
14. ADJUST HPCI FLOW CONTROL, E41-FIC-R600, SETPOINT TO MATCH SYSTEM FLOW, AND THEN PLACE E41-FIC-R600 IN AUTO (A)
15. ENSURE E41-F025 AND E41-F026 ARE CLOSED
16. START SBGT (OP-b)
17. ENSURE BAROMETRIC CNDSR CONDENSATE PUMP IS OPERATING

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page7lofSO ENCLOSURE 7 Page 1 016 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0i -SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page 4 of 18 1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Drywell Spray Initiation 2.1.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment
  • RO Desk Locked Drawer 0 23095keys C]

2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions

1. Ensure reactor recirculation pumps tripped C RO
2. if E-bus load stripping has occurred.

THEN:

a. Confirm electrical power has been aligned per EOP-0 1-SBO-i4 C]

RD

b. Secure drywell coolers per Attachment 1 and continue at Section 2.1.3 Step 2.c C]

RO c IF RHR Loop A will be used for sprays, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 9 C]

RO U. IF RHR Loop B will be used for spras, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 10 C]

RD 3 Place afl drywell cooler control switches to OFF (LID) C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 72 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 2 of 6 DRTWELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0 1-SEP-02 Rev. 78 Page 50118 2.1.3 Dryweli Spray Actions (continued)

4. Unit 1 Only: IF drywell coolers continue to run, THEN:
  • in Panel XU-27. west side, place VA-CS-5993 (01W Cit A&D Override Switch) in STOP C RO
  • In Panel XU-28, west side, place VA-CS-5993 (01W Cit B&C Override Switch) in STOP C RO
5. Unit 2 Only: IF drwelI coolers continue to run, THEN:
  • In Panel XU-27, west side, place VA-CS-5993 (DNI Cit A&D Override Switch) in STOP C RO
  • in Panel XU-28, east side, place VA-CS-5994 (DM dr B&C Override Switch) in STOP C RO
6. iF drwelI coolers continue to run, THEN secure drwell coolers per Attachment 1 and continue at Section 2.7.3 Step 7 C RO
7. Ensure SW-V 141 fWell Water to Vital Header Vlv) CLOSED C RO
8. Ensure one valve OPEN
  • SW-Vt Ii (Cony SW To Vital Header Vlv) C RD
  • SW-Vt 17 (Nuc SW To Vital Header Viv) C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 73 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 3 of 6 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-Oi-SEP-02 Rev. 16 Page 6 of 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

9. if Loop A RHR will be used for drywell spray.

THEN:

NOTE El l-FO17A will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal [1

a. IF El 1-FO 15A (Inboard Injection Vlv) OPEN, THEN close El 1-FO17A (Outboard Injection VIv) I]

RD

b. Place El 1-CS-S 18A (213 Core Height LPCI Initiation Ovemde Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RO c Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 17A (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RD d Ensure El 1-F024A (Torus Cooling Isol Vlv) CLOSED C RD e Ensure one Loop A RHR Pump running C RD
f. Confirm requirements for Drywell Spray Initiation met
  • Safe region of Drywell Spray Initiation Limit C RO
  • Torus level below +21 inches C RD
g. Open El 1-FO21A (Drywell Spray lnbd Isol Vlv) C RO Ii Throttle open El l-FO16A(Drywell Spray Otbd Isol Vlv)to obtain between 8,000 gpm and 10000 gpm flow C RO
i. IF E-bus load stripping has occurred, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 11 C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 74 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 4 of 6 DRWJELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-Ol.-SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page 7 c 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

j. IF additional flow required.

THEN start the other RHR pump and limit flow to less than orequaltoil,500gpm C RO

k. Ensure RHRSW Loop A operating:

(1) Place El i-S19A (RHR SW Booster Pumps A & C LOCA Override Switch) in IANUAL OVERRD C RO (2) Align RHRSW to the heat exchanger fOP-43) C RO Est3blish RHR flow through the heat exchanger:

(1) Ensure El 1-F047A fHx A Inlet Vlv) OPEN C RO (2) Ensure El l-FQO3A(HxA Outlet Vlv) OPEN 0 RO NOTE El l-F048A will remain OPEN for three minutes following a LOCA signal C]

(3) Close Eli-F048A(HxABypassVlv) C RO

10. IF Loop B RHR will be used for drywell spray, THEN:

NOTE El i-F0l78 will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal C

a. IF E 1 l-F0l58 (Inboard Injection Vlv) OPEN.

THEN close El l-FO 178 (Outboard Injection Vlv) C]

RO

b. Place El 1-CS-S 188 f2f3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 75 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 5 of 6 DRYWELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0 1-SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page8ot 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

c. Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 17B (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL D RO U. Ensure Eii-F024B (Torus Cooling lsd Vlv) CLOSED ID RO
e. Ensure one Loop B RHR Pump wnning ID RO
f. Confirm requirements for Drywell Spray Initiation are met:
  • Safe region of the Drywell Spray Initiation Limit ID RO
  • Torus level below +21 inches ID RO
g. Open El 1-FO21B (Drwell Spray lnbd Isol Vlv) ID RO Ii. Throttle open El i-FO16B fDrvwell Spray Otbd lsol Vlv) to obtain between 8,000 gpm and 10,000 gpm flow ID RO I. IF. E-bus load stripping has occurred, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 11 ID RO
j. if additional flow required, THEN start the other RHR pump and limit flow to less than or equal to 11,500 gpm ID RO k Ensure RHRSW Loop B operating.

(1) Place Eil-S19B (RHR SW Booster Pumps B & D LOCA Override Switch) in MANUAL OVERRD U RO (2) Align RHRSW to the heat exchanger (OP-43) ID RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 76 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 6 of 6 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP.-O 1-SEP-02 Rev. 16 Page9ot 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

I. Establish RHR llc through the heat exchanger:

(1) Ensure El l-EcM7B (Hx B Inlet Vlv) OPEN D RO (2) Ensure El l-E0036 fHx B Outlet Vlv) OPEN . D RO NOTE El l-E048B will remain OPEN for three minutes foHoving a LOCA signal C (3) Close E1i-FO48BfHxB BpassVlv) C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 77 of 80 ENCLOSURE 8 Page 1 of2 TORUS SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-O 1-SEP-03 Rev. 012 Page 4 of?

1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS

  • As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Torus Spray 2.1.1 Manpower Required

. 1 Reactor Operator 11.2 Special Equipment None 2.1.3 Torus Spray Actions

1. Confirm tows pressure above 2.5 pstg . C RO
2. IF Loop A RHR Il be used.

THEN:

NOTE

[1 1-tO 1 1A will remain OPEN for live minutes fdlowinq a LOCA signal C

a. IF RPV injection NOT needed, THEN ensure at least one valve CLOSED:
  • El l-FO15A (Inboard Injection Vlv) C RO
  • El l.FOl?A (Outboard Injection Vlv) C RO
b. Place El 1-CS-S 1$A (2/3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Stch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RO c Momentarily place [11-CS-Si ZA (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RO
d. Ensure one Loop A RHR Pump running C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 78 of 80 ENCLOSURE 8 Page 2 of 2 TORUS SPRAY PROCEDURE 0EOP-01SEP-03 Rev. 012 Page 5 of?

2.1.3 Tows Spray Actions (continued)

e. Ensure El 1-F028A (Torus Discharge Isol Vlv) OPEN C]

RO

1. OpenE1l-tO2?AtIonsSprayIsoIVlv) C]

RO g Ensure operation ii LPCI. Torus Cooling or Drywelt Spray mode C]

RO

3. IE Loop B RHR wiU be used.

THEN:

NOTE El 1-TO 1 /B will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal C]

a IF RPV intection NOT needed.

THEN ensure at least one valve CLOSED:

  • Li 1-FO5B (Inboard Inlection Vlv) ....._ C]

RO

  • El 1 -FOl /B (Outboard Injection Vlv) . C]

RO

b. Place ElI-CS-S 186 (2/3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C]

RO

c. Momentarily place Eli-CS-SuB (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C]

RO U. Ensure one Loop B RHR Pump running C]

RO

e. Ensure Eli-T028B (Torus Discharge Isol VIv) OPEN C]

RO

1. Open El 1-F0216 (Torus Spray lsol Vlv) C]

RO

g. Ensure operation ii LPCI, Torus Cooling OR Dry.vell Spray mode .. C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 79 of 80 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment NUREG 1021 Scenario Content Category Rev. 2 Supp. I Req.

Total Malfunctions 5-8 7 Malfunctions after EOP 1-2 2 Entry Abnormal Events 2-4 2 Major Transients 1-2 1 EOPs Used 1-2 2 EOP Contingency 0-2 2 Run Time 60-90 mm 90 Crew Critical Tasks 2-3 3 Tech Specs 2 2 Instrument I Component 2 OATC Failures before Major 2 - BOP Instrument I Component 2 2 Failures after Major Normal Operations 1 1 Reactivity manipulation 1 1

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Page 80 of 80 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover Brunswick Unit 2 Plant Status Station Duty Workweek B. Craig E. Neal Manager:

Manager:

Mode: I Rx Power: 100% Gross*INet MWe*: 977 / 951 Plant Risk:

. Green Current EOOS Risk Assessment is:

SEP Time to Days Online: 82 days 49.7 hrs 200 Deg F:

Turnover:

Protected 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2C Demin Transfer Pump for Equipment: Fuel Pool Decay Heat Removal and inventory makeup.

2A/B NSW Pumps due to IA NSW pump maintenance.

1A NSW Pump is under clearance for planned maintenance.

Comments: APRM 2 has failed downscale and is bypassed.

2C TCC Pump is in service on Unit One.

The Load Dispatcher has called to perform the following as soon as possible due to an emergent repairs required on the Delco West Line:

Shft

  • . The OATC is to reduce power to 850 MWe Gross Activities The BOP operator will then Isolate 230 kV Delco West (Line 30) lAW the marked up of 20P-50, Section 6.2.6.

DUKE ENERGY.

Run 3 BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION OPERATIONS TRAINING INITIAL LICENSED OPERATOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOWER POWER, REMOVE 230KV LINE FROM SERVICE, ROD DRIFT, ADHR PP TRIP, RECIRC LOOP FLOW FAILURE, HDD PP TRIP, ATWS, SLC MODE SWITCH FAILURE, ARI FAIL TO RESET REVISION 0 Developer: Date: e7/t7/2O!6 Technical Review: Va% Date: 91/2120/6 Validators: Date: 09/06/16 4a Te Facility Representative: tâe Date: 09/221/6

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 2 of 80 REVISION

SUMMARY

o Scenario developed for 2016 NRC Exam.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev.0 Page 3 of 80 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE 4 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

5 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS 6 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA 6 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES 7 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 8 7.0 INTERVENTIONS 10 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES 12 ATTACHMENT 1 - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment 49 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover 80

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page4of8o 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE Event MaIf. No. Type* Event Description 1 R ATC

- Lower power to 850 MWe to remove 230 kV Line 30 2 N - BOP Remove 230 kV Line 30 from service RDOOIM C-ATC RodDrift 3 (26-11)

C CRS (TS)

K4526A C BOP

- ADHR Secondary pump trip 4

C-CRS (AOP)

C ATC

- Recirc Loop B Flow transmitter Failure 5

C-CRS (TS)

CFO89F C BOP

- Heater Drain Deaerator Pump Trip 6

C-CRS (AOP)

Small steam leak in DW results in an ATWS requiring 7 CAOO8F M terminate and prevent actions (RSP)(ATWS) 8 K2119A C SLC Mode Switch Failure 9 K2624A C Alternate Rod Insertion reset failure

  • (N)ormal (R)eactivity, (C)omponent or Instrument, (M)ajor

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev.ç]

Page 50180 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

Event Description 1 After taking the watch the CRS will direct power reduced to 850 MWe.

2 The B0P will isolate 230 kV Line 30.

ti?

Control Rod 26-14 will start to drift in. The crew will enter OAOP-02.0 and take action lAW 2APP-A-05 (3-2). When the high temperature alarm is received Engineering will 3 report that scram times cannot be assured based on past history of the control rod.

Determine TS 3.1.3 condition Cl to insert the control rod in 3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> and C2 to disarm the control rod within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

After Tech Specs are addressed the Alternate Decay Heat Removal (ADHR)

Seconday pump will trip. AOP-38.0 will be entered The Recirc Loop B flow transmitter to APRM Channel 4 will fail wtiscale resulting in a rod block and a trip input to each voter. The crew will respond per APPs and bypass 5 APRM 4. The APRM will be declared Inoperable per TS 3.3.1 .1, Condition A and placed in trip within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. APRM TS Actions to be taken requires the APRM mode selector switch to be place in IN0P lAW 001-18 A motor overload will occur on Heater Drain Pump 2A. The crew will reference APP UA-06 1-7, Bus 2D 4KV Motor OvId and determine which pump has the overload 6

condition. The crew should start HDP 2C and secure HDP 2A. The crew may reference AOP-23.0.

A small steam leak in the DW results in rising Drywell pressure requiring a reactor 7 scram. An ATWS will occur, conditions will require terminate and prevent actions to be performed.

When SLC is initiated, the mode switch will fail and the pumps will not start. LEP-03 8

will be executed to inject the boron into the core.

Alternate Rod Insertion (ARI) will not reset, the crew will perform LEP-02 to drive 9 control rods into the core. When level is stabilized after terminating and preventing ARI will be repaired to allow the rods to be manually scrammed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 6 of 80 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS Critical Task #1 Prevent the automatic actuation of ADS (LL3) to prevent low pressure ECCS injection to the reactor.

Critical Task #2 Reduce reactor power/pressure to prevent exceeding Heat Capacity Temperature Limit (HCTL) 220

..i....r i1.1tt1iIi 210 4 - -- - UNSAFE ABOVE U

0 Lj SELECTED LINE w

200 zi:ETzJ 1.

190 D f::

180 Lii a 170 :L. f-) 025 FT

(-)1.2SFT U 160  %%

I. .  :-

(-) 2.50 FT 150 f-)3.25 FT 140 j SAFE BELOW (- ) 4.25 FT 130 ELECTED LINE

(-)5.5OFT 120 4.-

110  : -

100

..+/- 1 1,150 100 300 500 700 900 1,100 0 200 400 600 800 1,000 RPV PRESSURE (PSIG) 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF the scenario may be terminated.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page_7_of 80 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES NOTE: Refer to the most current revision of each Implementing Reference.

Number Title A-05, 3-2 ROD DRIFT OAOP-02.0 CONTROL ROD MALFUNCTION/MISPOSITION UA-18, 6-1 BUS E4 4KV MOTOR OVLD.

UA-01, 2-3 ADHR PRIMARY LOOP TROUBLE UA-01, 3-3 ADHR SECONDARY LOOP TROUBLE OAOP-38.O LOSS OF FUEL POOL COOLING A-06, 2-8 APRM UPSCALE A-06, 3-8 APRM UPSCALE TRIP/INOP A-06, 5-7 FLOW REF OFF NORMAL A-05, 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK A-05, 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED UA-5, 3-5 SBGT SYS B FAILURE UA-5, 4-6 SBGT SYS A FAILURE

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 8 of 80 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS list for

1. PERFORM TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 5, Check Simulator Exam Security.
2. RESET the Simulator to IC-il.
3. ENSURE the RWM is set up as required for the selected IC.
4. ENSURE appropriate keys have blanks in switches.
5. RESET alarms on SJAE, MSL, and RWM NUMACs.
6. ENSURE no rods are bypassed in the RWM.
7. PLACE all SPDS displays to the Critical Plant Variable display (#100).
8. ENSURE hard cards and flow charts are cleaned up
9. TAKE the SIMULATOR OUT OF FREEZE
10. LOAD Scenario File.

II. ALIGN the plant as follows:

Manipulation Ensure 20 TCC pump is in service on Unit One.

Bypass APRM 2 RCC Pump D in service for ADHR RCC Pump A in service for RBCCW

12. IF desired, take a SNAPSHOT and save into an available IC for later use.
13. PLACE a clearance on the following equipment.

Component Position APRM 2 Blue tag

14. INSTALL Protected Equipment sign age and UPDATE RTGB placard as follows:

Protected Equipment

1. 2A and 2B NSW pumps
2. 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D ROC Pump, and 20 Demin Transfer Pump.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOt SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 9 of 80

15. VERIFY OENP 24.5 Form 2 (Immediate Power Reduction Form) for IC-Il is in place.
16. ENSURE each Implementing References listed in Section 7 is intact and free of marks.
17. ENSURE all materials in the table below are in place and marked-up to the step identified.

Required Materials Marked up of 20P-50, Section 6.2.6

18. ADVANCE the recorders to prevent examinees from seeing relevant scenario details.
19. PROVIDE Shift Briefing sheet for the CRS.
20. VERIFY all actions contained in TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 4, Simulator Training Instructor Checklist, are complete.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page lOof8O 7.0 INTERVENTIONS TRIGGERS Trig Type ID 1 Malfunction RD0O1M [CONTROL ROD SLOW INSERTION DRIFT]

2 j Annunciator ZA512 [CRD HYD TEMP HIGH]

3 Trigger Command MFD:RD001M,26-11 4 Remote Function RD_RDELDIS [ELECTRICAL DISARM OF ROD]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DI Override K4526A [RBCCW PMP D AUTO]

5 DO Override Q4526AMW [RBCCW PMP D ADHR MODE]

5 DO Override Q4526LG4 [RBCCW PMP D OFF GJ Malfunction RPO11F [ATWS 4]

6 Remote Function CC_MODE [RBCCW/ADHR VALVE LINEUPS]

6 Remote Function CCMSS [RBCCW/ADHR PUMP MODE SELECTOR SWITCH]

7 Remote Function CC_PDV [RBCCW PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE]

8 Malfunction N1063F [RECIRC LOOP B XMIUER FAILURE]

9 Malfunction CF089F [HEATER DRAIN PUMP MOTOR WINDING FAULT]

10 Malfunction NBOO6F [MSL BRK BEFORE FLOW RESIRICTORJ 11 Remote Function EP_IAEOPJP - [BYPASS LL-3 GROUP I ISOL (SEP-10)]

Trig # Trigger Text 3 KM118EDN - [SCRAM TEST SWITCH 26-11] true deletes RDOO1M ANNUNCIATORS Override OVal AVaI Actime Dactime Trig Window Description Tagname 1-2 CRD HYD TEMP HIGH ZA512 ON ON OFF 2

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 11 of 80 MALFUNCTIONS taif Mult CUrreflt Thret Actime Dactime Trig Description CONTROL ROD SLOW INSERTION 1 RDOO1M 26-11 False True N1063F APRM 4 RECIRC LOOP B XMIUER FAILURE 0.00 125.00 8 NBOO6F A MSL BRK BEFORE FLOW RESTRICTOR 0.00 1.Oe-1 0:03:00 10 HEATER DRAIN PUMP MOTOR 9 CFO89F A False True WINDING FAULT RPO11F ATWS 4 False True 5 RPO0SF AUTO SCRAM DEFEAT True True NIO32F APRM 2 APRM FAILS LO ] True True REMOTES CUITeflt ThTt Actime Trig Remf Id Mult Id Description RD_RDELDIS 26-11 ELECTRICAL. DISARM OF ROD ARM DISARM 4 6

CC_MODE PUMP-A

[ RBCCW/ADHR VALVE LINEUPS RBCCW/ADHR PUMP MODE RBCCW ADHR CC MSS A RBCCW ADHR 6 SELECTOR SWITCH CC_PDV A_V38_V5114 RBCCW PUMP DISCHARGE VALVE 1.0000 1.Oe-01 7 CC_IACW4518 2CTBCCW PUMP UNIT ALIGNMENT 1 1 EP_IAEOP]P1 BYPASS LL-3 GROUP I SOC (SEP-10) OFF ON 11 PANEL OVERRIDES Position I Actual Override Actime Dactime Trig Tag ID Description K4526A RBCCW PUMP D OFF OFF/RESEST OFF ON 5 K4526A RBCCW PMP D AUTO AUTO OFF OFF 5 K4526A RBCCW PMP 0 ON ON ON OFF 5 Q4526LG4 RBCCW PMP D OFF G ON/OFF OFF OFF 5 Q4526AMW RBCCW PMP D ADHR MODE ON/OFF ON OFF 5 K2119A S/B LIQ PUMP A & B_______ PUMP_A OFF OFF K2119A S/BLIQPUMPA&B PUMP_A&B OFF OFF K2119A S/B CIQ PUMP A & B PUMP_B OFF OFF

  • K2624A CS-5562 ARI RESET OFF OFF K2625A CS-5560 ARI INOP OFF OFF

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 12of80 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES EVENT 1: LOWER POWER TO 850 MWE Simulator Operator Actions Ensure Monitored Parameters is open and Scenario Based Testing Variables are loaded.

Simulator Operator Role Play If asked as the NE, report that reactivity plan is to reduce power with recirc flow.

If asked as the NE, report that 850 MWe gross is 86% power and 65 Mlb/hr core flow Evaluator Notes Plant Response:

Objectives: SRO Directs power to be reduced to 850 MWe BOP Monitor the Plant RO Reduces power to 850 MWe.

Success Path: Power is lowered to 850 MWe Event Termination: When directed by the Lead Evaluator, go to Event 2.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 13 of 80 EVENT 1: LOWER POWER TO 850 MWE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response NOTES SRO Conduct shift turnover shift briefing.

Direct power to be reduced using recirc flow to

-850 MWe. (20P-02, Section 6.21)

Contacts chemistry for samples due to 15%

power change.

May contact Load dispatcher to inform of power decrease.

May conduct a brief (See Enclosure 1, page 62 for format of the brief.

Reduces reactor power using recirc lAW 20P-RO 02 Section 6.2.1 May null the DVM meter.

BOP Monitors the plant

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 14 of 80 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 166 Page 45 ot 250 6.2 Shutdown 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control

1. Contirm reactor recirculation pump in operation in accordance with Section 6.1.2 NOTE Recirculation Pump speed changes ate performed when directed by OGP-05.

Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes. Other operating procedures are used simultaneously with this procedure as directed by OGP-05, Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes C Speed changes are accomplished by depressing Lower Slow. Lower Medium, or Lower Fast pushbuttons The Lower Slow pushbutton changes Recfrc pump speed at 0.06%/decrement at 1 rpm/second The Lower Medium pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 0,28%/decrement at 5 rpm/second The Lower Fast pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 2.8%/decrement at 100rpm/second C

2. IF AT ANY TIME any ot the following conditions exist.

THEN enter 1AOP-04.0. Low Core Flow.{8.1.9}

  • Entry into Region A of Power to Flow Map
  • OPRM INOPERABLE AND any of the following O Entry into Region B of Power to Flow Map O Entry into 5% Buffer Region of Power to Flow Map O Entry into OPRM Enabled Region and indications of THI (Thermal Hydraulic Instability) exist

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 J Pagel5of8O REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 46 of 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

CAUTION

  • The OPRM System monitors LPRM5 for indication of thermal hydraulic instability (THI). When greater than or equal to 25% power and less than or equal to 60% recirculation flow, alarms and automatic trips are initiated upon detection of THI. Pump operations are governed by the limits of the applicable Power Flow Map, as specified in the COLR. {8. 1 .9} C
  • Entry into the 5% Buffer Region warrants increased monitoring of reactor instrumentation for signs of Thermal Hydraulic Instability. Time in the 5% Buffer Region presents additional risk and is rninimtzed.{8. 1.9) C
  • Wfth core flow less than 57.5 x 108 lbslhr, jet pump loop tlows are required within 10% (maximum indicated difference 6.0 x 108 lbslhr). With core flow greater than or equal to 57.5 x 10 lbsThr. jet pump loop flows are required within 5% (maximum indicated difference 3.0 x 108 lbs/br) C
  • When Recirc Pump speeds are less than 40%, decreasing speed using a Lower Fast pushbutton can result in a Speed Hold condition due to exceeding the regen torque limit C BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
3. IF desired to lower the speed of both recirculation pumps simultaneously.

THEN depress Recirc Master Control Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

4. IF desired to lower the speed of an individual recitculaon pump, THEN depress the Recirc VFD AC B) Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 16 of 80 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 47 ot 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeediPower Using individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

5. Confirm the following, as applicable:
  • Recirc Pump A(B) Speed Demand, Calculated Speed, and Actual Speed have lowered
  • Reactor power lowers
  • 632-R617(R613) [Recirc Pump A(B) Discharge Flowl lowers
  • B32-VFD-IDS-003A(B) [Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Wattmeter]

lowers

  • 832-VFD-IDS-OQ1A(B)]Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Frequency Meter] lowers END R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION Date/Time Completed Perrormed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By:

Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 17of80 EVENT 2: ISOLATE 230 KV DELCO WEST LINE 30 Simulator Operator Actions Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the Load Dispatcher acknowledge report.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: 230 kV Delco West line is isolated Objectives: SRO - Direct 230kV Delco West Line isolated ATC Plant monitoring BOP Performs 20P-50 Section 6.2.6 for isolating ONLY the Delco West Line Success Path: 230 kV Delco West (Line 30) isolated Event Termination: Go to Event 3 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 18 of 80 EVENT 2: ISOLATE 230 KV DELCO WEST LINE 30 Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Directs 230kV Delco West Line isolated lAW SRO marked up version of 2OP-50, Section 6.2.6.

BOP Performs 20P-50, Section 6.2.6 RO Monitors the plant.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Pagel9of8O PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 147 Page 58 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard

1. Ensure the Unit 2 230 kV switchyard is ENERGIZED AD
2. Ensure the 4kV Auxihary Electrical Systems are DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6,2.3 N-i SRO
3. Ensure the SAT is DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6.2.4 N-i SRO
4. Ensure Caswefl Beach Pumptng Station is DE-ENERGIZED in accordance with Section 6.2.5 N-i SRO
5. Ensure required LCOs for Technical Specification Sections 3.8.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.7 and 3.6.8 are initiated cRO
6. Obtain Load Dispatchets permission to de-energize the 230 kV switcrlyard AD A Powers the Delco West Line ONLY Person Contacted
7. Place Auto Reclose switches for the following PCBs in MAN:
  • 31 B (Bus 26 Whitevifle 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 31 A (Bus 2A Wtiitevdle 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • SOB (Bus 26 Delco West Line 230 KV Breaker)
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRI)
  • 278 (Bus 28 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRI)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 20 of 80 PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 137 Page 59 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard (continued)

CAUTION PC8 Supervisory switch must be in LOCAI. before the associated PCB fs operated from Panel XU-5 13

8. Place Supervisory switches for the following PCBs in LOCAL:
  • 31 B (Bus 28 Whitevifle 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 308 (Bus 2B Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 288 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 278 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 31A (Bus 2A Whiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
9. Open 316 (Bus 26 Whiteville 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
10. Confirm 3iB (Bus 28 Whiteville 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO 11 Open 31A(Bus 2A Whiteville 230kV PCB) N-i SRO 12 Confirm 3iA (Bus 2A Wheville 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO
13. Open 306 (Bus 28 Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) 14 Confirm 306 (Bus 26 Delco West Line 230 Ky PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights
15. Open 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) 16 Confirm 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights 17 Open 288 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 21 of8O PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATiNG 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev. 147 Page 60 of 281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 kV Switchyard (continued)

18. Confirm 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing N-i SRO the indicating ligrns
19. Open 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 Ky PCB) N-i SRO
20. Confirm 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing NI SRO the indicating lights
21. Open 276 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
22. Confirm 27B (Bus 28 Towli Creek 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by N-i SRO observing the indicating lights
23. Open 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV PCB) N-i SRO
24. Confirm 27A (Bus 2ATown Creek 230 kV PCB) is OPEN by observing the indicating lights N-i SRO NOTE IT work is to be performed on a 230 kV bus, the manual disconnects are to be opened C
25. Place Supervisory switches for the following PCBs in REMOTE;
  • 316 (Bus 28 Wtiiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-I SRO
  • 306 (Bus 28 Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 286 (Bus 26 Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 278 (Bus 26 Town Creek 230 kV Breaker N-i SRO
  • 3 JA (Bus 2A Whiteville 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 30A (Bus 2A Delco West Line 230 kV Breaker)
  • 28A (Bus 2A Wallace 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO
  • 27A (Bus 2A Town Creek 230 kV Breaker) N-i SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 22 of 80 PLANT ELECTRIC SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-50 PROCEDURE Rev, 147 Page 61 01281 6.2.6 De-energizing The 230 KV Switchyard (continued)

Daterflme Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO N-i, Partial usage to isolate only the Delco West 230 kV Line (Line 30)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 23 of 80 EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger I to drift CR 26-1 1 into the core.

When CR 26-1 1 is inserted to 00, Initiate Trigger 2 to activate CRD High Temperature alarm.

Two minutes after control rod is disarmed or scrammed, delete CRD HYD TEMP HIGH alarm.

If asked to disarm CRD 26-1 1 Initiate Trigger 4.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the RE to address thermal limits, acknowledge the request.

When contacted for scramming control rod 26-1 1, report that Thermal Limits will NOT be exceeded by this single rod scram.

If asked as the RBAO to investigate HCU for control 26-1 1, report that the HCU scram outlet riser is hot to the touch.

When contacted as the RBAO and after high temperature alarm has been actuated, report that the CRD temperature is 390° F and slowly rising.

When contacted as the System Engineer report that based on past history of this rod (26-11) scram times cannot be guaranteed.

If contacted as the WCC to perform the single rod scram, report that there are no operators available to perform the task.

If asked as the RBAO to disarm control rod, coordinate with Sim Operator after 5 minutes.

If requested, close/reopen the 1 13 valve (Charging Header Isolation Valve) as necessary As RBAO, Report Accumulator pressure 980# after rod has been scrammed.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Control Rod 26-1 1 will drift full in. Crew should enter AOP-02.0 and take action lAW 2APP-A-05 (3-2). When the high temperature alarm is received, Engineering will report that scram times cannot be assured based on past history of the control rod. Determine TS 3.1.3 condition Cl in 3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> and C2 within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions in response to a drifting control rod and evaluate Tech Specs.

RO - Respond to a drifting control rod.

Success Path: The drifting control rod is fully inserted, determined that the control rod must be placed under clearance and electrically disarmed.

Event Termination: Go to Event 4 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 24 of 80]

EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct actions of 2APP-A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT Direct entry into OAOP-02.0, Control Rod SRO Malfunction/Misposition.

After System Engineer reports that the scram times cannot be guaranteed, according to Note 2 in TS Table 3.1.4-1 the rod must be declared inoperable.

Tech Spec 3.1.3 Control Rod Operability SRO Condition C. One or more control rods inoperable for reasons other than Condition A or B Required Action C.1 Fully insert inoperable control rod (3 hrs)

C.2 Disarm the associated CRD (4 hrs)

Contact System Engineer on high temperature condition of control rod.

SRO Contact RE to inform of rod drift and to evaluate thermal limits May direct the control rod to be scrammed to attempt to reseat the leaking outlet valve SRO lAW A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT May conduct a brief (See Enclosure 1, page 62 for format of the brief.

Monitor reactor plant parameters during evolution.

BOP May read APP actions for the OATC to perform

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 25 of 80 EVENT 3: ROD DRIFT Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Acknowledge alarms:

A-05 (5-2) Rod Block RWM/RMCS Sys Trouble ATC A-05 (3-2) Rod Drift Announce and enter OAOP-02.0, Control Rod Malfunction/Misposition.

Perform the actions of APP-A-05 (3-2) ROD DRIFT as follows:

D Determine which control rod is drifting.

Select the drifting control rod and determine direction of drift.

Attempt to arrest the drift by giving a withdraw signal.

0 If rod continues to drift in, apply an RMCS insert signal and fully insert to position 00.

ATC U Attempt to locate and correct the cause of the rod malfunction as follows:

U Check and adjust cooling water header pressure if required.

U Direct AO to check for leaking scram valve.

U May direct an AO to check HCU temperature on R018 temperature recorder_(in_the_Rx_Bldg.)

Monitor core parameters, main steam line ATC radiation and off-gas activity.

Perform 20P-07 Section 6.3.17, Single Rod The examiner will prompt the Scram from RPS Test Panel. performer that the blue light is ON ATC and indication is 00 when step CRS will NA appropriate steps.

6.3.17.11 is performed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 26 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-O1 PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 94 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel Confirm the following initial conditions are met:

  • All applicable prerequisites in Section 5.0 are met
  • Attachment 1 has been reviewed
  • Communications are estabLished beeen RPS Test Panel and the Control Room
  • Reactor Engineer recommends performance of this section and has determined Technical Spedtication Thermal Limits will NOT be exceeded by this single rod scram Reador Engineer
2. IF AT ANY TIME it becomes necessary to sciarn a single control rod for operability concerns THEN perform OPT-14.2.1, Single Rod Scram Insertion Times Test for that control rod
3. Obtain permission from the Unit CR5 to perform this section CRS
4. Document applicable control rod to be scrammed in the space provided Control Rod
5. IF recommended by Reactor Engineering to support diagnostic data.

THEN record the following

  • Reactor pressure:

psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 27 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERA1YNG 20P-0? I PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 95 of 16j 6.3.1 7 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued)

BEGiN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION 6 Select applicable control rod at P603 Cv

7. Close C 12-1 13 (Charging Water Riser Isolation Valve) for the applicable control rod . - -
8. IF RWM scram time recording is recommended by Reactor Enginoenng, THEN perform the fdlowng
a. Have Reactor Enqineenng connect temporary scram time test cable to single rod scram interface box (located on terminal strip GM in P616-RMCS cabinet) and route cable up to RPS Test Panel P610 in accordance with Attachment 12. (Reference Use) -Test Cable Arranqement For RWM Scram Recordtng Reatar Engrneor (1) Insert black load into N[UTRAL socket on the P610 test panel IV (2) Insert red lead into socket corresponding to control rod to be tested at P610 IV
9. Monitor control rod position 10 IF AT ANY TIME the control rod does NOT fully scram after lovring the scram test switch.

THEN immediately notify the Unit CRS to determine operability of the rod (Technical Specificaton 3.1.3)

11. Using a currently licensed ROISRO, perform the following:
a. Scram the applicable control rod by lowering the scram test switch on RPS Test Panel P610 to the scram (down) position CV

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 28 of 80 REACTOR MANUAI CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-0/

PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 96 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued)

b. WHEN the scrammed control rod is fully inserted OR 10 seconds have elapsed (whichever ours first).

THEN return applicable scram test switch to the normal (up) position .-

IV

12. Confirm rod position display indicates O0 for scrammed rod and the GREEN Full In light is ON
13. IF control rod U NOT fully insert, THEN reference Technical Specifications for OPERABILITY - -

CR5 NOTE Holding Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch in EMERGENCY ROD IN position for a period of time will flush any ingested crud from the drive to help prevent double notching LI

14. Hold the Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch in EMERGENCY ROD IN position for at least 15 seconds and record insert stall flow.

stall tbw stall flow stall flow 1: 2: 3:

15 Repeat Seion 6.3.17 Step 14 two additional times END RM. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

16. Slowly open applicable C12-.11 3 (Charging Water Riser Isolation Valve) _J..

IV

17. Confirm associated accumulator pressure is greater than 955 psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 29 of 80 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATiNG 20P-0f PROCEDURE nov. los Page 97 of 162 6.3.17 Single Rod Scram From RPS Test Panel (continued) 1& IF RWM scram time was recorded.

THEN perform the folowing:..

a- Contact Reactor Engineering to upload Reador Enaineer

b. Remove temporary scram timing cables from P616 and P610 ............

lv

c. Perform the following to delete RWM scram data buffers:

(1) Select SCRAM DATA screen on RWM Operator Display n the Control Room (2) Press DELETE softkcy to delete scram data (3) Confirm SCRAM DATA screen displa - -

  • ROD SCRA-1 TIMING FUNCTION: READY
  • ROD SCRAM TIMING DATA: NOT TRANSFERRED

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 30 of 80 EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 5 to trip the running ADHR Pump.

When informed to align 2A RCC pump to ADHR mode Initiate Trigger 6 If asked to throttle closed the RCC-V51 14, Initiate Trigger 7.

When asked to re-open the RCC-V51 14, then adjust the remote to 1.0.

Simulator Operator Role Play If directed to investigate the trip of RCC Pump D, report the pump is tripped on overcurrent.

When directed to align RBCCW Pump 2A to ADHR mode lAW 20P-21 Section 6.3.16 (steps 2b through 2i) have Sim Op align pump to ADHR mode and inform BOP Op that the steps are complete.

When contacted as RBAO report radiation monitor is aligned per 2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 step 4.

RCC-V5154 (Rad Monitor Bypass Standby Isolation Valve) is CLOSED RCC-V5116 (Rad Monitor Bypass ADHR Isolation Valve) is OPEN RCC-V5115 (Rad Monitor Bypass Common Mode Isolation Valve) is OPEN When contacted report RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve) is throttled 90% closed. (2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 Step 5a)

When contacted report RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve) is full open. (2OP-21 Section 6.3.18 Step 5c)

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The running ADHR Secondary Loop Pump (RCC Pump D) will trip. The crew will have to start RCC Pump C. Shutdown RCC Pump A. Re-align RCC Pump A for ADHR mode and then start the pump for ADHR. (AOP-38.0 will be entered).

Objectives: SRO Direct swapping of RCC pumps and then direct starting of RCC Pump in ADHR Mode.

RO - Swap RCC pumps, Place RCC Pump in ADHR Mode.

Success Path: Standby ADHR Pump placed in service.

Event Termination: Go to Event 5 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 31 of 80]

EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct entry into OAOP-38.0, Loss of Fuel Pool SRO Cooling Direct swapping of RBCCW pumps Start RBCCW Pump C, secure A.

Direct alignment of RBCCW Pump A to ADHR Mode.

Direct starting RBCCW Pump 2A in ADHR Mode.

Direct I/C to investigate trip of RBCCW Pump 2D.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 62 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 32 of 80 EVENT 4: ADHR SECONDARY PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments RO Plant Monitoring Report trip of RBCCW Pump 2D (running in ADHR Mode)

SOP UA-01 3-3, ADHR SECONDARY LOOP TROUBLE May secure the primary pump lAW this APP Announce and enter AOP-38.0, Loss of Fuel Pool Cooling Perform 20P-21, Section 6.3.10 (page 33) to swap RBCCW pumps. (Start C and secure A)

Plant announcement for the start of 2C RCC Pump and securing of 2A RCC Pump.

Perform 2OP-21, Section 6.3.16 (page 34) to align RBCCW Pump A into ADHR Mode.

Direct RB AO to perform steps 2b through 2i.

Step 3 is N/A Perform 2OP-21, Section 6.3.18 (page 37) to start RBCCW Pump A in ADHR Mode.

Notifies E&C, starting ADHR pump Step 2 is N/A Step 3 is N/A Direct the RB AO to perform step 4 and 5a.

Announce starting of RCC Pump 2A.

Direct the RB AO to perform step 5c.

May direct AO to ensure primary loop is operating lAW 2OP-1 3.1.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 33 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P.21 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 47 of 149 6.3.10 Transferring to the Standby RBCCW Pump RBCCW Mode-Ensure the following initaI conditions are met:

  • Applicable prerequisites listed in Section 5.0, Prerequisites are met
  • RBCCW System in operation with two pumps aligned for RBCCW Mode in service
2. Start the standby RBCCW pump by placing the associated pump control switch in ON:
  • RBCCWPUMP2A
  • RBCCWPUMP2C
3. Secure the desired RBCCW pump by placing the associated pump control switch in OFF:
  • RBCCWPUMP2C
  • RBCCWPUMP2D
4. lEa third RBCCW pump is aligned to RBCCW Mode, 4p RBCCW discharge header pressure has stabilized, THEN place the pump control switch in AUTO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 34 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-21 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 68 of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode

1. Ensure the following initial condition is met:
  • One RBCCW Heat Exchanger is aligned to ADHR Mode per Section6.3.14
  • Key for RBCCW/ADHR Mode Selectot Switch has been obtained from one of the following:

O Control Rm Key Locket key 98 O WCC Key Locker key 167 or 168 NOTE RBCCW Pump 2A and RBCCW Pump 2D can support either RGCCW Mode or ADHR Mode. A Mode Selector Switch Is located on the pump breaker and a white ADHR Mode indicating light is on the RTGB. This switch determines which of the two header pressures (RBCCW or ADHR) wilt be monitored for the pump auto start on low header pressure when the pump control switch is placed in AUTO. When the Mode Selector Switch is placed in the ADHR Mode position, the white light is ON on the RTGB C

2. IF aligning RBCCW Pump 2A to ADHR Mode.

THEN perform the following

a. Ensure RBCCW Pump 2A control switch is in OFF
b. Close RCC-V32 (RBCCW Pump 2A RBCCW Suction)
c. Close RCC-V38 (RBCCW Pump 2A RBCCW Mode Discharge Valve)

U. Open RCC-V5105 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Suction Valve)

e. Open RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
f. Open RCC-V303 (RBCCW Pump 2A Casing Vent Valve)
g. WHEN a steady stream of water is present.

THEN close RCC-V303 (RBCCW Pump 24 Casing Vent Valve)

h. Ensure 2-RCC-SS-7667 (Pump 24 RBCCW,ADHR Mode Selector Switch) located at MCC 2XE. in ADHR

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 35 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2i SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 69of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode (continued)

i. Remove key from 2-RCC-SS-7667 (Pump 2A RBCCW/ADHR Mode Selector Swxtch)
j. Confirm the ADHR white indicating light on the RTGB for RBCCW Pump 2A is ON
3. IF aligning RBCCW Pump 2D to ADHR Mode, THEN perform the following
a. Ensure RBCCW Pump 2D control switch is m OFF
b. Close RCC-V5 107 (RBCCW Pump 20 RBCCW Mode Suction Valve)
c. Close RCC-V51 11 <RBCCW Pump 20 RBCCW Mode Discharge Valve) d Open RCC-V5104 (R5CCW Pump 2D ADHR Mode Suction Valve)
e. Open RCC-V51 13 (RBCCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
1. Open RCC-V5139 (RBCCW Pump 2D Casing Vent Valve)
g. WHEN a steady stream of water is present.

THEN close RCC-V5 139 (RBCCW Pump 20 Casing Vent Valve)

h. Ensure 2-RCC-SS-7668 (Pump 2D RBCCWIADHR Mode Selector Switch) located at MCC 2XD, in ADHR
i. Remove key from 2-RCC-SS-7668 (Pump 2D RBCCW1ADHR Mode Selector Switch)
j. Confirm the ADHR white indicating light on the RTGB for RBCCW Pump 2D is ON

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 36 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 2OP2 1 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 70 of 149 6.3.16 Alignment of RBCCW Pump from RBCCW Mode to ADHR Mode (continued)

NOTE ADHR Mode piping is placed either in Standby Mode or in service to ensure RBCCW circulation and proper chemistry control wtien NOT undergoing maintenance D

4. Place ADHR in service per Section 63.18, Starting an RBCCW Pump-ADHR Mode Date/Time Completed Performed By (Pnnt) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 37 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2 1 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 74 of 149 6.3.18 Starting an RBCCW Pump ADHR Mode

1. Ensure the following initial conditions are met
  • Designated RBCCW Pump is aligned to ADHR Mode per Section 6.3.16
  • RBCCW pump is operating in ADHR Mode, THEN E&C notified commencing startup of ADHR t1ode Person Notified NOTE RBCCW Pump 2A and RBCCW Pump 2D can support either RBCCW Mode or ADHR Mode. A Mode Selector Switch is located on the pump breaker and a white ADHR Mode indicating light is on the RTGB. This switch determines which of the two header pressures (RBCCW or ADHR) wilt be monitored for the pump auto start on low header pressure wtien the pump control switch is placed in AUTO. When the Mode Selector Switch is placed in the ADHR Mode position, the wtite light is ON on the RTGB 0 RBCCW Pump 2D will NOT auto re-start wtien power returns after a LOOP or bus under voltage condition with the control switch in ON or AUTO. The control switch must be placed in OFF/RESET prior to restarting the pump 0 CAUTION Two pump operation in ADHR Mode subjects RCC-V37 (RBCCW Pump IA Discharge Check Valve) and RCC-V51 10 (RBCCW Pump 1D Discharge Check Valve) to accelerated wear. This lineup is expected to be utilized only when maximum ADHR capacity is required. [8.7.2] 0
2. IF desired to start a second pump aligned to ADHR Mode, THEN perform the following a Obtain concurrence from Engineering to start a second pump in the ADHR Mode Person Coitacted
b. Go to Step 5.b

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 38 of 8]

REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-2 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 93 Page 75 of 149 6.318 Starting an RBCCW Pump ADHR Mode (continued)

3. IF the ADHR Mode has been shutdown for greater than 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> OR maintenance has been petfomied, THEN fill and vent the ADHR piping per Section 63.13
4. Ensure the following valve alignment for system radiation monitoring:
  • RCC-V51 54 fRau Monitor Bypass Standby Isolation Valve) is CLOSED
  • RCC-V5i 16 (Rad Monitor Bypass ADHR Isolation Valve) is OPEN
  • RCC-V51 15 fRad Monitor Bypass Common Mode Isolation Valve) is OPEN
5. For the RBCCW pump aligned to ADHR Mode to be started, perform the following
a. Throttle 80% to 95% dosed the associated pump discharge valve:
  • RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
  • RCC-V51 13 (RBCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
b. Start an RBCCW pump aligned to ADHR Mode by placing the associated pump control switch in ON:
  • RBCCWPUMP2A
  • RBCCWPUMP2D
c. IF throttled in Step 5.a, THEN slowly open the associated pump discharge valve
  • RCC-V51 14 (RBCCW Pump 2A ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)
  • RCC-V5 113 (RBCCW Pump 20 ADHR Mode Discharge Valve)

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 39 of 80 REACTOR BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER 20P-21 I SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev1 Page 76 of 149 6.3.18 Starting an RBCCW Pump -ADHR Mode (continued)

d. Ensure a log entry is made stating RBCCW pumps are in service in the ADHR Mode and Engineering has been notified NOTE The normal parameters for Supplemental Spent Fuel Pool Cooling are provided in Attachment 1, Normal System Operation Parameters. Equipment manipulations to maintain these parameters are performed per 20-13.1, Alternate Decay Heat Removal System Primary Loop Operating Procedure C
6. IF a Primary Loop pump is operating, THEN maintain Primary Loop flow per 20-13.1, Alternate Decay Heat Removal System Primary Loop Opemhng Procedure
7. Ensure Plant Process Computer setup as follows per OOP-55, Plant Process and ERFIS Computer Systems Operating Procedure
  • PPC U2RCCM 11 point ENABLED
  • PPC U2RCCAO95 Value Monitoring setup with the nominal flow values per Attachment 1 Section 2.5 for the number of RBCCW Pumps in ADHR Mode to provide audible alarms for ADHR secondary flow changes Date/Time Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 40 of 80 EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 8 to activate Recirc Loop B Flow failure.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as l&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

After LCD entries have been determined and SRO is waiting for l&C, call as WCCSRO and request APRM 4 be placed in tripped condition to support l&C trouble shooting. The WCC will hang the status control tag paperwork.

If asked to pull fuses (for TRM 3.3 actions, 2-C12A-F1 Labeled ROD OUT BLOCK RELAYS CI2A in P616 panel) acknowledge the request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Flow reference off normal alarm, rod block and scram signal to all 4 voters Flow transmitter signals are displayed on PC display 845, and on individual NUMACs by selecting Input Status.

Objectives: SRO - Determine LCO for APRM 4 inoperability and direct placing channel in trip.

RD Respond To A Flow Unit/Transmitter Failure Per APP A-06 5-7.

Success Path: APRM 4 TS 3.3.1.1 declaration and placed in trip condition lAW 001-18.

Event Termination: Go to Event 6 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 41 of8O EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct actions of APPs SRO Direct I&C to investigate Evaluate Tech Spec 3.3.1.1 Reactor Protection System Instrumentation TS 3.3.11, Function 2b, Required Action Al.

With one or more required channels inoperable, place in trip condition in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Evaluate TRM 3.3 Control Rod Block Instrumentation TRM 3.3, Function Ia, Required Condition Al.

With one of the required channels not operable -

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to restore to operable.

Refers to 001-18 for actions to place APRM 4 in a tripped condition.

Direct APRM 4 mode selector switch placed in INOP to allow I&C troubleshooting.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 62 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 42 of 80 EVENT 5: RECIRC LOOP B FLOW TRANSMITTER FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Monitors the plant.

May check back panel APRM indications.

Acknowledges, refers to & reports annunciators A-6 2-8 APRM UPSCALE 3-8 APRM UPSCALE TRIP/INOP ATC 5-7 FLOW REF OFF NORMAL A-5 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED Diagnose and report failure of APRM 4 Flow Transmitter Obtains key number 1 14 from the SRO key locker to place APRM 4 in trip.

Places APRM mode selector switch in INOP lAW 001-18.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 43 of 80 EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 9 to trip a Heater Drain Pump.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as AC to investigate, wait until pump is tripped and report over-current flags for all phases of 2A HDP 4KV breaker on Bus 2D If contacted as RE for reduced EW Temp, acknowledge any requests.

If asked as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Heater Drain Pump 2A shaft seizes and trips on overcurrent. Heater Drain tank level will rise and the crew will throttle HD-V57 to stabilize HD Tank level. If the standby HDP is not started, REP suction pressure will lower during the transient requiring power reduction to stabilize Condensate/feedwater.

Objectives: SRO Directs OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures, and possible OAOP-03.0, Positive Reactivity Addition, entry.

RO Diagnose HDP pump trip and start the standby HDP.

Success Path: 2C HDP started with HDD level recovered in the normal band.

Event Termination: Go to Event 7 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 44 0180]

EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct annunciator response for UA-04:

4-10 HD PUMP A TRIP 2-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH-LOW 3-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP SRO Direct entry into OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures Direct starting standby HDP.

May direct 2AOP-3.0, Positive Reactivity Addition, entry if power rises due to the HDD Ext Trip.

May direct monitoring of final feedwater temperature.

May direct maintenance to investigate trip May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 62 forformat)

RO Plant Monitoring May reduce power lAW OAOP-23 to stabilize reactor water level.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 45 of 80 EVENT 6: HEATER DRAIN DEAERATOR PUMP TRIP SOP Recognize and report annunciators UA-04 4-10 HO PUMP A TRIP 2-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH-LOW 3-10 HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP UA-06 1-7 BUS 204 KV MOTOR OVLD Manually starts 2C HDP lAW APP or AOP.

Enter and announce OAOP-23, Condensate/Feedwater System Failures.

Monitors final feedwater temperature (FFWT) lAW 20 1-03.2 May open the HD-V57 to assist in HDD level recovery.

Directs an A0 to 4.16 Ky Switchgear Bus 2D to investigate 2A HDP trip Verifies auto actions for HD DEAERATOR LEVEL HIGH TRIP, if it occurs.

1. Non-return valves (EX-VI I and EX-Vi 2) to deaerator close. (Only close if turbine load is below 500 MWe)
2. HDD Extraction Line B moisture removal valves (MVD-LV-266 and MVD-LV-267) open.

May reference 20P-35 to recover MRVs following HDD level restoration.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 46 of 80]

EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN DW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARt RESET FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger IOta activate small steam leak in DW.

If requested to defeat Group I LL3, wait 2 minutes, and install jumpers (Trigger II)

If requested to install LEP-02, Section 2.3 jumpers, wait 5 minutes, and inform the SRO that the jumpers are installed (RPOO5F already active).

Simulator Operator Role Play Acknowledge request as l&C to investigate failure of SLC switch.

If requested as I&C to investigate the failure of the ARt reset failure, acknowledge the request.

Acknowledge request to perform LEP-03 actions.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Most control rods will fail to insert on the scram. The crew will respond to the ATWS per EOP-01-ATWS. When SLC initiation is attempted, the switch positions will not work. The crew will enter LEP-03 and align for alternate boron injection using CRD.

The scram cannot be reset due to failure of the ARI to reset.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions to control reactor power per EOP-01-ATWS..

RD - Perform actions for an ATWS per EOP-01-ATWS.

Success Path: Lower level to control power, inject SLC, insert control rods.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 47 of 80 EVENTS 71819: STEAM LEAK IN DW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Enter RSP and transition to ATWS.

Direct mode switch to shutdown when steam flow < 3 Mlbs/hr.

Direct ARI initiation.

Direct Recirc Pumps Tripped. CRITICAL TASK #2 SRO Direct SLC initiation, then LEP-03, Alternate Boron Injection.

Direct ADS inhibited. CRITICAL TASK #1 Direct RWCU isolation verification.

Direct LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion CRITICAL TASK #2 Direct Group 10 switches to override reset.

Direct terminate and prevent HPCUFeedwater (CS/RHR when LOCA signal received) to CRITICAL TASK #2 lower level to 90 inches.

When level reaches 90 inches, evaluate Table Q-2:

If not met, establishes a level band of LL4 to +90 inches.

If met, directs RPV injection to remain terminated.

Enters POOP Directs Torus cooling when Torus temperature is greater than 95° F, (See Enclosure 5, page 68)

Directs Torus Sprays before torus pressure reaches 11.5 psig (See Enclosure 8, page 77)

Directs Drywell Sprays when torus pressure exceeds 11.5 psig (See Enclosure 7, page 71)

Direct injection established to maintain RPV level LL4 to TAF (or the level at which APRMs indicate downscale)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 48 of 80 EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN OW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Place mode switch to shutdown when steam RO flow < 3x106 lb/hr.

Initiates ARI.

Trips Recirc Pumps. CRITICAL TASK #2 Initiates SLC.

Determines SLC switch failure.

Directs LEP-03, Alternate Boron Injection Recognizes failure of SLC switch and reports to CRS.

Monitor APRMs for downscale.

Performs LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion.

Section 2.1, Initial Actions (see page 48)

Section 2.3, Reset RPS and Initiate a Manual CRITICAL TASK #2 Scram (see page 51)

Section 2.4, Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) (see page 54)

May also perform Section 2.5, Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure (see page 56).

Recognizes failure of ARI to reset, informs CRS

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 49 of 8p]

EVENTS 7/819: STEAM LEAK IN OW ATWS I SLC SWITCH FAILURE I ARI RESET FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Places ADS in inhibit. CRITICAL TASK #1 Places Group 10 switches to override I reset Terminate and prevent injection to RPV. CRITICAL TASK #2 Terminates and prevents HPCI lAW Hard Card. (Enclosure 2, page 63)

Terminates and Prevents Feedwater lAW Hard Card. (Enclosure 3, page 64)

May place HPCI in service for level control during ATWS when directed by the SRO.

(Enclosure 6, page 70)

Restart RFP to maintain level as directed by SRO. (Enclosure 4, page 65)

When Torus temperature is greater than 95° F, places Torus Cooling in service.

(Enclosure 5, page 68)

When directed, places Torus Sprays in service.

(Enclosure 8, page 77)

When directed, places Drywell Sprays in service.

(Enclosure 7, page 71)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 50 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 R3ge4of37 1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS

  • As dwected by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs)
  • As directed by Severe Accident Management GudeIine (SAMGs) 2.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 2.1 Initial Actions 2.1.7 Manpower Required
  • 1 Reactor Operator
  • 1 Auxiliary Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment None NOTE
  • Two-handed operation is allowed during implementation of this procedure in order to minimize delay in control rod insertion D
  • Section 2.1.3 Step 1 through Step 6 may be performed concurrently with the test of this procedure C
  • The system designation Cii is for Unit 1 and C12 for Unit 2 C 2.1.3 Operator Actions
1. Monitor reactor power on APRMs until IRM recorders on scale C RO
2. Insert IRMs and monitor reactor power on IRM recorders C RO
3. Downrange IRMs to bring them on scale C RO
4. WHEN IRM5 on Range 3 OR below.

THEN insert SRMs C RO

5. Monitor reactor period C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 51 of8O ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 I Rev. 029 Page 5 otT]

2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

6. Monitor control rod position using:
  • Process computer RO
  • Four rod [3 RO
  • Full core display C RO
7. WHEN either:
  • Reactor engineering has determined the reactor ill remain shutdovai under all conditions without boron C RO THEN perform Section 2.2, Control Rod Insertion Verification on Page7 C RO

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 52 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 6 of 37 2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

8. Insert control rods by one or more methods:
  • Section 2.4, Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) on Page 18 C RO
  • Section 2.5, Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure on Page 20 C RO
  • Section 2,8, Venting Over Piston Area on Page 32 C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 53 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-0 1 -LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 15 of 37 2.3 Reset RPS and Initiate a Manual Scram 2.3.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.3.2 Special Equipment
  • RO Desk Locked Drawer 0 4 jumpers (15, 16, 17 and 18) C]

2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions NOTE Section 2.3.3 Step 1 and Step 2 may be performed concurrently C]

IF an automatic scram signal present AND power available to RPS bus.

THEN install jumpers to bypass reactor scram:

  • Jumper 15 in Panel H 12-P609, Terminal Board DD, from right side of Fuse C71A(C72A)-F 14A to Terminal 4 of Relay C7JA(C72A)-K12E C]

RO

  • Jumper 16 in Panel Hi 2-P609, Terminal Board 88, from left side of Fuse C71A(C72A)-F14C to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-K12G C]

RO

  • Jumper 17 in Panel H12-P611, Terminal Board DD, from right side of Fuse C7IAfC72A)-F 148 to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-KI2F C]

RO

  • Jumper 18 in Panel H12-P611, Terminal Board BB, from left side of Fuse C7 1Af C72A)-F 14D to Terminal 4 of Relay C71A(C72A)-K12H C]

RO

2. Inhibit ARI:
a. Place CII (Cl 2)-CS-5560 (ARI Auto/Manual Initiation Switch) t0INOP C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 54 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-O1-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 16 of 37 2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions (continued)

b. Place and hold Cli (C12)-CS-5562 (ARI Reset) switch in RESET 0 RO
c. WHEN 5 seconds have elapsed.

THEN release 0 RO

d. Confirm ted TRIP light located above CI 1(C12)-CS-556 1 (ARI Initiation) OFF 0 RO
3. Ensure Disch Vol Vent & Drain Test switch in ISOLATE 0 RO
4. Conhrm CLOSED:
  • C1i(CI2)-V139(DischVolVentVlv) 0 RO
  • Cl 1fC 12)-CV-F0 10 (Disch Vol Vent VIv) 0 RO
  • Cl 1(C12)-V 140 fDisch Vol Drain Vlv) 0 RO Cl 1fCI2)-CV-F0i 1 fDisch Vol Drain VIv) 0 RO
5. Reset RPS 0 RO
6. IF either RPS A OR B can be RESET, THEN go to Section 2.3.3 Step 8 0 RO
7. IF RPS CANNOT be RESET, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 0 RO
8. Place Disch Vol Vent & Drain Test switch to NORMAL 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 55 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 17 of 37 2.3.3 Manual Scram Actions (continued)

9. Confirm OPEN:
  • Ci i(C12)-V 139 (Disch Vol Vent Vlv) C]

RO

  • Ci l(C12)-CV-F0l0 (Disch Vol Vent Vlv) C]

RO

  • Ci 1fC12)-V140 (Disch Vol Drain Vtv) C]

RO

  • Cl i(C12-CV-F0i 1 fDisch Vol Drain Vlv) C]

RO

10. WHEN the scram discharge volume has drained for approximately 2 minutes OR A-05 1-6, SDV Hi-Hi Level RPS Thp clears, THEN continue C]

RO ii. IF venting control rod over piston area per Section 2.8, THEN notify AO to secure venting prior to inserting a manual scram C]

RO

12. Manually scram the reactor C]

RO 13 IF control rods moved inward AND ll control rods NOT inserted to

.Q.. beyond Position 00, THEN return to Section 2.3.3 Step 3 C]

RO

14. IF.II control rods inserted to OR beyond Position 00 9 control rods did NOT move inward, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 56 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSER11ON OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 180137 2.4 Reactor Manual Control System (RMCS) 2.4.7 Manpower Required I Reactor Operator 2.4.2 Special Equipment RO Desk Locked Dravr Unit 1 Only: 1 5450 key for RWM D 0 Unit 2 Only: 1 5451 key ror RWM 0 2.4.3 RMCS Actions

1. IF a reactor scram sealed in, THEN ensure available CR0 pumps operating 0 RO
2. Ensure Ci1(C12)-FC-R600fCRD Flow Control) in MAN 0 RO
3. IF a CRD pump NOT operating, THEN:
a. Close the in-service Cl 1(C12)-FOO2A(F0028) (Flow Control Vlv) 0 RO
b. Start one CR0 pump 0 RO c, Adjust CI 1fC 12)-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to greater than or equal to 30 gpm 0 RO
d. IF avalabte, THEN start the second CRD pump 0 RO
4. IFNO CR0 pump can be started, THEN return to Section 21.3 Step 7 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 57 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-01-LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 19 of 37 2.4.3 RMCS Actions (continued)

5. Insert control rods with RMCS:

a Throttle open ci 1(C12)-EOO2A(E0026)fFIow Control Vlv) until drive water differential pressure greater than or equal to 26opsid D RO

b. IF drive water differential pressure less than 260 psid, THEN throttle closed Cli (Cl 2)-PC V-F003 (Drive Pressure Vlv) until drive water differential pressure greater than or equal to 260 psid C RO
c. Bypass RWM C RO d Insert control rods with Emergency Rod In Notch Override switch C RO
6. WHEN fl control rods inserted to beyond Position 00 .Q CANNOT be inserted with RMCS.

THEN return to Section 2.7.3 Step 7 C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 58 of 80 ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION OEOP-0 1 -LEP-02 Rev. 029 Page 20 of 37 2.5 Increasing Cooling Water Header Pressure 2.5.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.5.2 Special Equipment None 2.5.3 Cooling Water Header Actions
1. IF a reactor scram sealed in, THEN ensure available CRD pumps operating D RO
2. JE a CR0 pump QI operating, THEN:
a. Ensure Cl 7fC12)-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) in MAN D RO
b. Close the in-service Cl 1fC12)-FOO2AfFOO2B) (Flow Control Vlv) D RO
c. Start one CRD pump D RO ci. Adjust Cl i(Ci2-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to greater than or equal to 30 gpm C RO
e. IF available, THEN start the second CRD pump C RO
3. IFNO CRD pump can be started, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 C RO t

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 59 of 80 OEOP-01-LEP-02 I ALTERNATE CONTROL ROD INSERTION Rev. 029 I Page2lof37 L

2.5.3 Cooling Water Header Actions (continued)

4. IF a reactor scram NOT sealed in, THEN maximize cooling water header pressure:
a. Ensure Cl 1fC12)-FC-R600 (CRD flow Control) in MAN and fully open the in service Cl 1(C12).-FOO2A(F0026)fFlow Control Vlv) D RO b Fully open Cii (C12)-PCV-F003 (Drive Pressure VIv) D RO
5. WHEN jj control rods inserted to beyond Position 00 control rods NOT moving inward, THEN return to Section 2.1.3 Step 7 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 60 of 80 TERMINATION Simulator Operator Actions When directed by the Lead Evaluator, delete the following commands:

Malfunction K2624A, ARI Reset Malfunction K2625A, ARI INOP Malfunction RPOI 1 F, ATWS 4 (Make sure RPS is reset and scram air header pressurized before deleting)

When directed by the Lead Evaluator, place the simulator in FREEZE DO NOT RESET THE SIMULATOR PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF CONCURRENCE TO DO SO FROM THE LEAD EXAMINER Simulator Operator Role Play After Sim Operator has deleted SDV malfunction, Inform the CRS that a loose wire was found on ARI switch and it has been repaired.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: When actions are taken to control reactor water level during the ATWS after terminating and preventing, ARt will be repaired and rods can be inserted.

Objectives: SRO - Directs actions for an ATWS.

RO Insert control rods lAW LEP-02.

Success Path: Rods inserted with LEP-02, Alternate Rod Insertion.

Scenario Termination: When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF with injection established, the scenario may be terminated.

Remind students not to erase any charts and not to discuss the scenario until told to do so by the evaluatorlinstructor.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 61 of 80 TERMINATION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Exit ATWS and enter RVCP when all rods are SRO in.

Direct level restored to 170 200 inches after rods are all in.

RO Confirms ARI reset when reported fixed.

Inserts a scram after discharge volume has drained for 2 minutes.

Reports all rods in.

Maintains reactor pressure as determined by the BOP CRS.

Maintains level as directed by the SCO.

Restores level to 170 200 inches after all rod inserted. (Enclosure 4, page 65, contains actions for restart of Condensate and Feedwater)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 62 of 80 ENCLOSURE I Page 1 of I CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS AD-OP-ALL-i 000 Rev. 6 Page 90 of go AUACHMENT $

Page 1 of 1

<< Crew Brief Template>>

1] Announce Crew Brief Begin Brie?

D NI crew members acknowledge announcement (AZ Required)

I] Updatetflecrewas needed:

D Descnbe what happened and major actions taken D Procedures in-progress D Notifications:

Recap 0 Maintenance 0 Engineering 0 Others tDispatcher, Station Management. etc.)

0 Future Direction and pnonties C Discuss any contingency plans (AZ Required)

C Solicit questionstoncerns from each crew member:

DROs Input 0 CRS C STA 0 Are there any alarms unexpected for the plant conditions?

C What is the status of Cnticat Parameters?

(AZ Required)

EAt.

C Provide EAL and potential escalation criteria C Restore normal alarm announcement7 fYesNo)

Flnl:h Brief C Announce End of Bnet

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 63 of 80 ENCLOSURE 2 Page 1 of 1 SECURING HPCI INJECTION 1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS WHEN DIRECTED BY 2EOP-O1-LPC TO TERMINAIE AND PREVENT HPCI INJECTION, OR D

2. WHEN DIRECTED BY OEOP-Oi-RXFP TO TERMINATE AND PREVENT HPCI INJECTION. OR C
3. WHEN PERMISSION GIVEN DY THE UNIT CRS TO SECURE HPCI INJECTION WITH A HPCI AUTO START SIGNAL PRESENT C 2.0 PROCEDURAL STEPS
1. IF HPCI IS NOT OPERATING. PERFORM THE TOLLOWING:

a PLACE HPCI AUXILIARY OIL PUMP CONTROL SWITCH IN PULL-TO-LOCK C

2. IF HPC( IS OPERATING. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING:
b. DEPRESS AND HOLD THE HPCI TURBINE TRIP PUSHBUTTON C
c. WHEN HPCI TURBINE SPEED IS 0 RPM. AND HPCI TURBINE CONTROL VALVE, E41-V9 IS CLOSED. THEN PLACE HPCI AUXILIARY OIL PUMP CONTROL SWITCH IN PULL-TO-LOCK C U. WHEN HPCI TURD BRG OIL PRESS LO.

A-01 4- 2. IS SEALED IN. THEN RELEASE THE HPCI TURBINE TRIP PUSHBUTTON C

e. ENSURE HPCI TURBINE STOP VALVE, [41-VS.

AND HPCI TURBINE CONTROL VALVE. E41-V9.

REMAIN CLOSED, AND HPCI DOES NOT RESTART C 1 2)1368 Sf1369

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 64 of 8_Qj ENCLOSURE 3 Page 1 of 1 Terminating and Preventing Injection From Condensate and Feedwater During EOPs (20P-32)

1. IF desired TRIP all operating REPs. []
2. IF one or more REPS are in service IDLE one REP as tollows
a. IF two RFPs are operating THEN TRIP one E
b. PERFORM either of the following for the operating REP
1. PLACE MANIDFCS control switch to MAN.

2, RAPIDLY REDUCE speed to approximately 1000 rpm with the LOWERJRAISE speed control switch.

OR 1 PLACE REPT Speed Control in M (MANUAL)

2. SELECT DEM and RAPIDLY REDUCE speed to approximately 2550 rpm.
3. CLOSE the following valves

- FW HTR 5A OUTLET VLVS, FW-V6

- FW HTR 55 OUTLET VLVS, FW-V8 OR

- FW HTR 4A INLET VLV, EW-Vi 1$

- FW HTR 45 INLET VLV, FW-Vi 19

4. ENSURE the SULCV is dosed by performing the following
a. PLACE SULCV, in M (Manual),
b. SELECT DEM and DECREASE signal until VALVE DEM E indicates 0%
5. ENSURE EW-V120. is closed.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 65 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 1 of 3 Aligning Condensate and Feedwater After Terminating and Preventing Ensure FW.FV-177 (Feedwater Recwc to Condenser Vlv) CLOSED .......El

2. Ensure FW Control Mode Select in 1 ELEM El
3. Ensure at least one valve OPEN El
  • 821-F0325 (Feedwater Isol Vlv) El 4 IFNO REP operating, THEN: El
a. Ensure REPT A(S) Sp CD.

(1) lnM(manual) El (2) Pmp A(S) Dern at 0.0 PCT El

b. Place EW-FV-46f47) tREP (NB) Recirc Vlv] in OPEN El
c. Ensure El
  • FW-V3(V4) [RFP (A/B) Disch Vlv] OPEN El
  • REP A(S) ManuatIDFCS control switch in MANUAL El d Depress: El (1) Reactor Water Level High Reset A El (2) Reactor Water Level High Reset B El (3) Reactor Water Level High Reset C El (4) REP A(S) Reset El
e. Confirm OPEN El
  • REP A(S) HP Stop Vlvs El f Depress REP A(S) REPT Start El
g. WHEN at 1000 rpm.

THEN raise REP A(S) to at least 2550 rpm El

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 66 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 2 of 3 Aligning Condensate and Feedwater After Terminating and Preventing (continued)

5. IE desired to transier REP Af 5) to DFCS, THEN D
a. Ensure speed at least 2550 rpm D
b. Depress DFCS Ctfl Reset D c Place Manual/DFCS control switch in DFCS D
6. Raise RFP A(S) speed until discharge pressure approximately 100 psig above RPV pressure band D 011550 S/I 372

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 67 of 80 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 3 of 3 Injection After Terminating and Preventing Condensate and Fe.dwater WHEN RPV injection directed.

THEN as needed C

  • Adjust SULCV Valve Dem C
  • Throttle FW-V 120 (FW Htrs 4&5 Byp VIv) C
2. WHEN automatic control desired, THEN: C
a. Confirm RPV level greater than + 170 inches C
b. Ensure FW-V 120 (FW Htrs 4&5 Byp VIv) CLOSED C c Open FW-V 10 (FW Recirc To Cond Isol VIv) C
d. Adjust SULCV to between 25 PCT and 55 PCI using C
  • SULCV Valve Dem C
  • FW-FV-177 (Feedwater Recirc To Condenser Vlv) C
e. Ensure Mstr RFPT Sp/Rx LVI Ctl: C (1) lnM(manual) C (2) Level Setpoint at current RPV level C
1. Place SULCV in A (automatic) C
g. Adjust as needed to control RPV level C
  • Mstr RFPT SpIRx Lvi CtI Level Setpoint C
  • FW-FV-i 77 (Feedwater Recirc To Condenser VIv) C 0/1551 511552

, 2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page 68 of 80 ENCLOSURE 5 Page 1 of 2 ATTACHMENT 8A Page 1 of 1 Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop A f20P-17)

NOTE: Ths attachment is NOT to be used for nomaI system operations START RHR SW A LOOP CCONV) START RHR SW A LOOP fNUC)

OPEN SW-ViOl OPEN SW-V105 CLOSE SW-V143 U OPEN SW-V102 START CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED CLOSE SW-V143 IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN START PUMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED PLACE RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN PLACE A & C LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS A & C LOCA TO MANUAL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE START RHR SW PMP START RHR SW PMP ADJUST Eli-PD V-F068A ADJUST El f-PDV-F068A ESTABLISH CLG WIR TO VITAL HDR ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED START RHR LOOP A IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, THEN VERIFY COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF El 1-FOI5A IS OPEN, THEN CLOSE Elf-FO17A START LOOP A RHR PMP E OPEN Eil-F028A E THROTTLE Ell-F024A THROTTLE EI1-F018A START ADDITIONAL LOOP A RHR PMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED 2 2/1061 2 S1062

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 69 of 80 ENCLOSURE 5 Page 2 of 2 ATTACHMENT 8B Page 1 of 1 Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop B (20P-i7)

NOTE This attachment is NOT to be used for normal system operabons START RHR SW B LOOP CNUC) START RHR SW B LOOP (CONV)

OPEN SW-V105 OPEN SW-Viol CLOSE SW-V143 OPEN SW-V 1 02 START PMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED CLOSE SW-V743 IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN START CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED PLACE RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT THEN PLACE B & D LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS B & 0 LOCA TO MANUAL OVERRIDE OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE STARTRHRSWPMP START RHR SW PMP ADJUST Elf-PD V-F0688 ADJUST Eli-PD V-F0688 ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR ESTABLISH CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP START ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED START RHR LOOP B IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT. THEN VERIFY COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF Ell-F0f58 IS OPEN. THEN CLOSE Ell-F0178 START LOOP B RHR PMP OPEN E11-F0288 THROTTLE E1l-F024B THROTTLE E1l-F048B START ADDITIONAL LOOP B RHR PMP AND ADJUST FLOW AS NEEDED 2 21063 2 S. 1064

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 70 of 80 ENCLOSURE 6 Page 1 of 1 HPCI INJECTION IN EOPs

1. IF HPCI IS TRIPPED ON HIGH WATER LEVEL, DEPRESS HIGH E WATER LEVEL SIGNAL RESET, E41-S25. PUSH BUTTON, AND ENSURE THE INDICATING LIGHT IS OFF
2. ENSURE AUXILIARY OIL PUMP IS NOT RUNNiNG E
3. ENSURE E41-V9 AND E$1-V8 ARE CLOSED
4. OPEN E41-F059
5. PLACE HPCI FLOW CONTROL. E41-FIC-R600, IN MANUAL fM),

AND ADJUST OUTPUT DEMAND TO APPROXIMATELY MIDSCALE, USING THE MANUAL LEVER.

6. START VACUUM PUMP AND LEAVE IN START
7. OPEN E41-F001
8. START AUXILIARY OIL PUMP AND LEAVE IN START
9. OPEN E41-F006, IMMEDIATELY AFTER E41-V8 HAS DUAL INDICATION
10. ENSURE E4i-V9 AND E41-V8 ARE OPEN E ii. WHEN SPEED STOPS INCREASING, THEN ADJUST SPEED TO APPROXIMATELY 2100 RPM
12. ADJUST HPCI FLOW CONTROL, E41-FIC-R600, TO OBTAIN DESIRED FLOW RATE
13. ENSURE E41-F0 12 IS CLOSED WHEN FLOW IS GREATER THAN 1400 GPM
14. ADJUST HPCI FLOW CONTROL, E41-FIC-R600, SETPOINT TO MATCH SYSTEM FLOW, AND THEN PLACE E41-FIC-R600 IN AUTO (A)
15. ENSURE E41-F025 AND E41-F026 ARE CLOSED
16. START SBGT (OP-b)
17. ENSURE BAROMETRIC CNDSR CONDENSATE PUMP IS OPERATING

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page7lofSO ENCLOSURE 7 Page 1 016 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0i -SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page 4 of 18 1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures (EOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Drywell Spray Initiation 2.1.1 Manpower Required

  • 1 Reactor Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment
  • RO Desk Locked Drawer 0 23095keys C]

2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions

1. Ensure reactor recirculation pumps tripped C RO
2. if E-bus load stripping has occurred.

THEN:

a. Confirm electrical power has been aligned per EOP-0 1-SBO-i4 C]

RD

b. Secure drywell coolers per Attachment 1 and continue at Section 2.1.3 Step 2.c C]

RO c IF RHR Loop A will be used for sprays, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 9 C]

RO U. IF RHR Loop B will be used for spras, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 10 C]

RD 3 Place afl drywell cooler control switches to OFF (LID) C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 72 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 2 of 6 DRTWELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0 1-SEP-02 Rev. 78 Page 50118 2.1.3 Dryweli Spray Actions (continued)

4. Unit 1 Only: IF drywell coolers continue to run, THEN:
  • in Panel XU-27. west side, place VA-CS-5993 (01W Cit A&D Override Switch) in STOP C RO
  • In Panel XU-28, west side, place VA-CS-5993 (01W Cit B&C Override Switch) in STOP C RO
5. Unit 2 Only: IF drwelI coolers continue to run, THEN:
  • In Panel XU-27, west side, place VA-CS-5993 (DNI Cit A&D Override Switch) in STOP C RO
  • in Panel XU-28, east side, place VA-CS-5994 (DM dr B&C Override Switch) in STOP C RO
6. iF drwelI coolers continue to run, THEN secure drwell coolers per Attachment 1 and continue at Section 2.7.3 Step 7 C RO
7. Ensure SW-V 141 fWell Water to Vital Header Vlv) CLOSED C RO
8. Ensure one valve OPEN
  • SW-Vt Ii (Cony SW To Vital Header Vlv) C RD
  • SW-Vt 17 (Nuc SW To Vital Header Viv) C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 73 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 3 of 6 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-Oi-SEP-02 Rev. 16 Page 6 of 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

9. if Loop A RHR will be used for drywell spray.

THEN:

NOTE El l-FO17A will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal [1

a. IF El 1-FO 15A (Inboard Injection Vlv) OPEN, THEN close El 1-FO17A (Outboard Injection VIv) I]

RD

b. Place El 1-CS-S 18A (213 Core Height LPCI Initiation Ovemde Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RO c Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 17A (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RD d Ensure El 1-F024A (Torus Cooling Isol Vlv) CLOSED C RD e Ensure one Loop A RHR Pump running C RD
f. Confirm requirements for Drywell Spray Initiation met
  • Safe region of Drywell Spray Initiation Limit C RO
  • Torus level below +21 inches C RD
g. Open El 1-FO21A (Drywell Spray lnbd Isol Vlv) C RO Ii Throttle open El l-FO16A(Drywell Spray Otbd Isol Vlv)to obtain between 8,000 gpm and 10000 gpm flow C RO
i. IF E-bus load stripping has occurred, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 11 C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 74 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 4 of 6 DRWJELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-Ol.-SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page 7 c 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

j. IF additional flow required.

THEN start the other RHR pump and limit flow to less than orequaltoil,500gpm C RO

k. Ensure RHRSW Loop A operating:

(1) Place El i-S19A (RHR SW Booster Pumps A & C LOCA Override Switch) in IANUAL OVERRD C RO (2) Align RHRSW to the heat exchanger fOP-43) C RO Est3blish RHR flow through the heat exchanger:

(1) Ensure El 1-F047A fHx A Inlet Vlv) OPEN C RO (2) Ensure El l-FQO3A(HxA Outlet Vlv) OPEN 0 RO NOTE El l-F048A will remain OPEN for three minutes following a LOCA signal C]

(3) Close Eli-F048A(HxABypassVlv) C RO

10. IF Loop B RHR will be used for drywell spray, THEN:

NOTE El i-F0l78 will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal C

a. IF E 1 l-F0l58 (Inboard Injection Vlv) OPEN.

THEN close El l-FO 178 (Outboard Injection Vlv) C]

RO

b. Place El 1-CS-S 188 f2f3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD 0 RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 75 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 5 of 6 DRYWELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-0 1-SEP-02 Rev. 18 Page8ot 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

c. Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 17B (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL D RO U. Ensure Eii-F024B (Torus Cooling lsd Vlv) CLOSED ID RO
e. Ensure one Loop B RHR Pump wnning ID RO
f. Confirm requirements for Drywell Spray Initiation are met:
  • Safe region of the Drywell Spray Initiation Limit ID RO
  • Torus level below +21 inches ID RO
g. Open El 1-FO21B (Drwell Spray lnbd Isol Vlv) ID RO Ii. Throttle open El i-FO16B fDrvwell Spray Otbd lsol Vlv) to obtain between 8,000 gpm and 10,000 gpm flow ID RO I. IF. E-bus load stripping has occurred, THEN go to Section 2.1.3 Step 11 ID RO
j. if additional flow required, THEN start the other RHR pump and limit flow to less than or equal to 11,500 gpm ID RO k Ensure RHRSW Loop B operating.

(1) Place Eil-S19B (RHR SW Booster Pumps B & D LOCA Override Switch) in MANUAL OVERRD U RO (2) Align RHRSW to the heat exchanger (OP-43) ID RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 76 of 80 ENCLOSURE 7 Page 6 of 6 DRWIELL SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP.-O 1-SEP-02 Rev. 16 Page9ot 18 2.1.3 Drywell Spray Actions (continued)

I. Establish RHR llc through the heat exchanger:

(1) Ensure El l-EcM7B (Hx B Inlet Vlv) OPEN D RO (2) Ensure El l-E0036 fHx B Outlet Vlv) OPEN . D RO NOTE El l-E048B will remain OPEN for three minutes foHoving a LOCA signal C (3) Close E1i-FO48BfHxB BpassVlv) C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 77 of 80 ENCLOSURE 8 Page 1 of2 TORUS SPRAY PROCEDURE OEOP-O 1-SEP-03 Rev. 012 Page 4 of?

1.0 ENTRY CONDITIONS

  • As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Torus Spray 2.1.1 Manpower Required

. 1 Reactor Operator 11.2 Special Equipment None 2.1.3 Torus Spray Actions

1. Confirm tows pressure above 2.5 pstg . C RO
2. IF Loop A RHR Il be used.

THEN:

NOTE

[1 1-tO 1 1A will remain OPEN for live minutes fdlowinq a LOCA signal C

a. IF RPV injection NOT needed, THEN ensure at least one valve CLOSED:
  • El l-FO15A (Inboard Injection Vlv) C RO
  • El l.FOl?A (Outboard Injection Vlv) C RO
b. Place El 1-CS-S 1$A (2/3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Stch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RO c Momentarily place [11-CS-Si ZA (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RO
d. Ensure one Loop A RHR Pump running C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 78 of 80 ENCLOSURE 8 Page 2 of 2 TORUS SPRAY PROCEDURE 0EOP-01SEP-03 Rev. 012 Page 5 of?

2.1.3 Tows Spray Actions (continued)

e. Ensure El 1-F028A (Torus Discharge Isol Vlv) OPEN C]

RO

1. OpenE1l-tO2?AtIonsSprayIsoIVlv) C]

RO g Ensure operation ii LPCI. Torus Cooling or Drywelt Spray mode C]

RO

3. IE Loop B RHR wiU be used.

THEN:

NOTE El 1-TO 1 /B will remain OPEN for five minutes following a LOCA signal C]

a IF RPV intection NOT needed.

THEN ensure at least one valve CLOSED:

  • Li 1-FO5B (Inboard Inlection Vlv) ....._ C]

RO

  • El 1 -FOl /B (Outboard Injection Vlv) . C]

RO

b. Place ElI-CS-S 186 (2/3 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C]

RO

c. Momentarily place Eli-CS-SuB (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C]

RO U. Ensure one Loop B RHR Pump running C]

RO

e. Ensure Eli-T028B (Torus Discharge Isol VIv) OPEN C]

RO

1. Open El 1-F0216 (Torus Spray lsol Vlv) C]

RO

g. Ensure operation ii LPCI, Torus Cooling OR Dry.vell Spray mode .. C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 2 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 79 of 80 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment NUREG 1021 Scenario Content Category Rev. 2 Supp. I Req.

Total Malfunctions 5-8 7 Malfunctions after EOP 1-2 2 Entry Abnormal Events 2-4 2 Major Transients 1-2 1 EOPs Used 1-2 2 EOP Contingency 0-2 2 Run Time 60-90 mm 90 Crew Critical Tasks 2-3 3 Tech Specs 2 2 Instrument I Component 2 OATC Failures before Major 2 - BOP Instrument I Component 2 2 Failures after Major Normal Operations 1 1 Reactivity manipulation 1 1

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Page 80 of 80 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover Brunswick Unit 2 Plant Status Station Duty Workweek B. Craig E. Neal Manager:

Manager:

Mode: I Rx Power: 100% Gross*INet MWe*: 977 / 951 Plant Risk:

. Green Current EOOS Risk Assessment is:

SEP Time to Days Online: 82 days 49.7 hrs 200 Deg F:

Turnover:

Protected 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2C Demin Transfer Pump for Equipment: Fuel Pool Decay Heat Removal and inventory makeup.

2A/B NSW Pumps due to IA NSW pump maintenance.

1A NSW Pump is under clearance for planned maintenance.

Comments: APRM 2 has failed downscale and is bypassed.

2C TCC Pump is in service on Unit One.

The Load Dispatcher has called to perform the following as soon as possible due to an emergent repairs required on the Delco West Line:

Shft

  • . The OATC is to reduce power to 850 MWe Gross Activities The BOP operator will then Isolate 230 kV Delco West (Line 30) lAW the marked up of 20P-50, Section 6.2.6.

DUKE ENERGY.

BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION OPERATIONS TRAINING INITIAL LICENSED OPERATOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE 2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 PT-40.2.1 1, DWEDT FAILURE, VFD CELL BYPASS, NSW PUMP TRIP, CWIP PUMP TRIP, RWCU LEAK, SBGT START FAILURE, ED, ADS VLV FAILURE REVISION 0 Developer: od o Date: 0710712016 Technical Review: Va44a Date: 9/12/2016 Validators: Vt% Date: 09/071/6 4gdez Facility Representative: ac Oe Date: 09/221/6

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 2 of 47 REVISION

SUMMARY

0 Scenario developed for 2016 NRC Exam.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 3 of 47 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE 4 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

5 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS 6 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA 6 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES 7 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 8 7.0 INTERVENTIONS 10 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES 12 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment 41 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover 47

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 4 of 47 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE Event MaIf. No. Event Description

]_Type*

Perform PT-40.2.11, Main Generator Voltage Regulator N-BOP Manual And Automatic Operational Check 2 ZA41 1 DWEDT Pump failure C-ATC VFD Cell Failure 3 RCO53F C-CRS (TS)(AOP) 4 R-ATC Power maneuver 5 C-BOP NSW Pump 2B Trip (failure of standby to start)

CWOJ9F C-CRS (TS)(AOP) 6 C-BOP CWIP Trip CWO39F C-CRS (AOP)

M RWCU leak / Scram 7 RWO13F C SBGT Fails to start (AOP)(RSP)(SCCP)

M ED 8 K1507A C Failure of 2 ADS valves to open (EDP)

  • (N)ormal (R)eactivity, (C)omponent or Instrument, (M)ajor

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page5of47 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

Event Description Perform PT-40.2.1J, Main Generator Voltage Regulator Manual And Automatic 1

Operational Check.

Annunciator A-04 1-1, Drywell Equip Drain Sump Lvl Hi, will annunciate and the 2

sumps will not auto start. One of the sump pumps will need to be manually started A power cell in VFD A will fail. Recirc Pump 2A speed will lower and a speed hold will initiate. Loop flows will be outside mismatch limits.

4 The crew will reset the speed hold and match loop flows.

NSW Pump B will trip and the crew will start NSW Pump A. Since IA NSW Pump is 5 out of service, Tech Specs will apply. Crew will enter OAOP-18.O, Nuclear Service Water System failure, and carry out appropriate actions.

Circulating Water Pump 2A will trip on motor winding fault, and the standby 6 Circulating Water Intake Pump will be started. OAOP-37.0 will be entered due to lowering vacuum.

A large un-isolable RWCU leak will occur. Crew will enter AOP-5.0 and SCCP. The 7 CRS should direct a SCRAM. SBGT train A will fail to auto start and should be manually started.

Secondary containment conditions will worsen, forcing the CRS to direct an Emergency Depressurization (or Anticipation of Emergency Depressurization) due to 8 high water levels. If Anticipation is performed, the second area high water level will annunciate requiring the emergency depressurization. Two ADS SRVs will fail to manually open. The CRS should direct opening two additional SRVs.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 6 of 47 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS Critical Task #1 Insert a reactor scram prior to any area reaching its Max Safe Operating Temperature Limit Critical Task #2 Isolate fire protection (PIC-33) to the Reactor Building within 15 minutes following a High Energy Line Break.

4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA When emergency depressurization has been performed and the reactor has been depressurized to <100 psig the scenario may be terminated.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 7 of 47 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES NOTE: Refer to the most current revision of each Implementing Reference.

Number Title A-04, 1-1 DRYWELL EQUIP DRAIN SUMP LVL HI A-06, 3-1 RECIRC VFD A ALARM UNACK A-06, 4-5 RECIRC LOOP A ONLY OUT OF SERV OAOP-04.0 Low Core Flow 2OP-02, 6.1.3 Reactor Recirculation System Operating Procedure 6.2.1 6.3.4 UA-01, 1-10 NUCLEAR HEADER SERV WTR PRESS-LOW UA-01, 4-10 NUCLEAR HDR SW PUMP B TRIP UA-18, 6-1 BUS E4 4KV MOTOR OVLD.

OAOP-18.0 NUCLEAR SERVICE WATER SYSTEM FAILURES UA-01, 1-7 CIRC WATER PUMP A TRIP OAOP-37.0 Low Condenser Vacuum UA-03, 2-7 AREA RAD RX BLDG HIGH OAOP-05.0 Radioactive Spills, High Radiation, And Airborne Activity UA-5, 4-6 SBGT SYS A FAILURE

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page8of47 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS

1. PERFORM TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 5, Checklist for Simulator Exam Security.
2. RESET the Simulator to IC-i 1.
3. ENSURE the RWM is set up as requited for the selected IC.
4. ENSURE appropriate keys have blanks in switches.
5. RESET alarms on SJAE, MSL, and RWM NUMACs.
6. ENSURE no rods are bypassed in the RWM.
7. PJ..ACE all SPDS displays to the Critical Plant Variable display (#100).
8. ENSURE hard cards and flow charts are cleaned up
9. TAKE the SIMULATOR OUT OF FREEZE
10. LOAD Scenario File.
11. ALIGN the plant as follows:

Manipulation Ensure 2C ICC pump is in service on Unit One. Loaded in Scenario File Ensure 2B NSW pump is running, 2A in standby Bypass APRM 2

12. IF desired, take a SNAPSHOT and save into an available IC for later use.
13. PLACE a clearance on the following equipment.

Component Position APRM 2 Blue Tag

14. INSTALL Protected Equipment signage and UPDATE RTGB placard as follows:

Protected Equipment

1. 2A and 2B NSW pumps
2. 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2A Demin Transfer Pump.
15. VERIFY OENP 24.5 Form 2 (Immediate Power Reduction Form) for IC-il is in place.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 9 of 4]

16. ENSURE each Implementing References listed in Section 7 is intact and free of marks.
17. ENSURE all materials in the table below are in place and marked-up to the step identified.

Requited Materials OPT-40.2.1 I

18. ADVANCE the recorders to prevent examinees from seeing relevant scenario details.
19. PROVIDE Shift Briefing sheet for the CRS.
20. VERIFY all actions contained in TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 4, Simulator Training Instructor Checklist, are complete.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOt SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 10 of 47 7.0 INTERVENTIONS TRIGGERS Trig Type ID 1 Annunciator ZA411 [DRYWELL EQUIP DRAIN SUMP LVL HI]

4 DI Override K2721K [VFD A LOWER FAST]

4 Malfunction RCO53F [VFD A POWER CELL COMMUNICATION FAILURE]

5 Malfunction CWO19F [NUC SERVICE WATER PUMP MOTOR WINDING FAULT]

6 Malfunction CWO39F [CIRC WATER INTAKE PUMP MOTOR WINDING FAULT]

7 Malfunction RWO13F [RWCU BRK IN TRIANGLE ROOM 77]

9 Remote Function RW_ZVRWOO4M [G31-F004 OUTBOARD ISOLATION VALVE]

10 Annunciator ZUA1214 [SOUTH RHR RM FLOOD LEVEL HI-HI]

Trig # frrigger Text 9 K141OJCK [RWCU VLV G31-F004]

11 K6O1WOV [SBGT SYS A]

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 11 of 47 MALFUNCTIONS MaIf Mult Current Target Rmp Dactime Trig Description Actime ID ID Value Value time RWO15F G31-F001 FAILURE TO AUTO CLOSE True True RW016F 631-FOO4 FAILURE TO AUTO CLOSE True True VFD A POWER CELL COMMUNICATION 00:00:01 4 RC053F CELL Bi False True FAILU RE NUC SERVICE WATER PUMP MOTOR 5 CW019F B False True WINDING FAULT CIRC WATER INTAKE PUMP MOTOR 6 CWO39F A False True WINDING FAULT RWO13F RWCU BRK IN TRIANGLE ROOM 77 0.00 100.00 00:10:00 7 RWO17F G31-F001 REACTOR WTR CLEANUP

REMOTES 1 Current I Target Rmp Actime Trig Remf Id Mult Id Description Value I Value time_[

CC_IACW451$ C TBCCW PUMP UNIT ALIGNMENT 1 RW_ZVRWOO4M G31-F004 OUTBOARD ISOTION VALVE ON OFF 9 PANEL OVERRIDES Position I Actual Override Rmp Actime Dactime Trig Tag ID Description Target Value Value time K61O1B SBGT SYS A PREF ON OFF Q61O1ARV SBGTSYSACONTPREFR4 ON/OFF OFF ON K1505A AUTO DEPRESS VLV B21-FO3D OPEN OFF OFF K1S11A AUTO DEPRESS VLV B21-FO13A OPEN OFF OFF K4B2OA NUC HDR SW PMP A DISCH VLV AUTO ON OFF K2721K VFD A LOWER FAST LOWER FAST OFF t ON 00:00:01 4 Q2721LWF VFD A LOWER FAST ON/OFF OFF hOFF ANNUNCIATORS Override AVaI Actime Dactime [Trig 1Window Description Tagname OVal Type

[ 3-1 DRYWELL EQUIP DRAIN SUMP LEAK HI 431 OFF OFF OFF 1-1 DRYWECCEQUIPDRAINSUMPLVLHI ZA4H ON ON OFF 1 1-4 SOUTH RHR RM FLOOD LEVEL HI-HI ZUA1214 ON ON OFF

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 12 of 47 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUC11ONAL STRATEGIES EVENT 1: P1-40.2.1 1 Simulator Operator Actions Ensure Monitored Parameters is open and Scenario Based Testing Variables are loaded.

Simulator Operator Role Play Acknowledge any requests for the Load Dispatcher.

When asked the voltage regulator operation was smooth and in the same direction of of the rheostat.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response:

Objectives: SRO Directs BOP to perform P1-40.2.11 SOP Performs PT-40.2.1 1 RO Monitor Balance of Plant Success Path: P1-40.2.11 is completed.

Event Termination: When directed by the Lead Evaluator, go to Event 2.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 13 of 47 EVENT 1: PT4O.2.11 Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response NOTES SRO Conduct shift turnover shift briefing.

Direct performance of PT-40.2.11 May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 45 for format)

RO Monitors the plant Performs PT-40.2.11 BOP See attached procedure.

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 14 of 47 I MAIN GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONAL CHECK OPT-$O.2. 11 Rev. 6 L Page4otl3 1.0 PURPOSE The purpose of this test is to demonstrate the OPERABILITY of the voltage regulator transfer circuitry and exercise the regulator potentiometers.

2.0 SCOPE

1. This test is performed once every 92 days and demonstrates OPERABILITY of voltage regulator transfer circuitry and exercises the regulator potentiometers.
2. This test may also be used to demonstrate proper operation of the voltage regulator potentiometer and transfer circuitry, after completion of maintenance 3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
1. Main generator loading is within the limits of the Generator Reactive Capability Curve shown on Attachment 1, Estimated Capability Curve, and with a minimum of 20 MVAR (positive) C
2. This test is NOT performed if erratic operation of the voltage regulator is noted immediately pnor to the performance of this test C
3. The Load Dispatcher is to be informed vvtien the main generator automatic voltage regulator is t4QI in service. Log entries are made documenting the notification. {9,1 .1] C 6.0 GENERAL INFORMATION None 5.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
1. This test may be considered satisfactory when the following criteria are met
a. DC regulator output variation is smooth and in the same direction as the rheostat movement.

b AC regulator output vanation is smooth and in the same direction as the rheostat movement.

2016 NRC SCENARIO LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 15 of 47 MAIN GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR MANUAL OPT-40.2. 11 AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONAL CHECK Rev 6 Page5otl3 6.0 PREREQUISITES

1. Confirm Generator and Exciter System in operation in accordance th 1 (2)OP-27, Generator and Exciter System Operating Procedure
2. Confirm Plant Electrical System in operation in accordance with (2)OP-50, Plant Electric System Operating Procedure
3. Confirm DC Electrical System in operation accordance with (2)OP-5 1, DC Electrical System Operating Procedure
4. Confirm 120 Volt AC UPS. Emergency, and Conventional Electrical Systems in operation in accordance with 1 f2)OP-52, 120 Volt AC UPS, Emergency, and Conventional Electrical Systems Operating Procedure
5. Confirm NO system load changes are anticipated

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 16 of 47 MAIN GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR MANUAL OPT-40.2.1 1 AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONAL CHECK Rev. 6 Page 6 of 13 7.0 INSTRUCTIONS 7.1 General

1. Obtain permission from Unit CRS to pertorm this
2. Ensure all Prerequisites listed in Section 5.0 are met 7.2 Operate 7OCS (Gen Manual Volt AdI Rheo)
1. Ensure 43CS (Regulator Mode Selector) in AUTO
2. Station an operator at the Excitation Regulator and Control cubicle in me Turl)ine Building on the 70 ft elevation west to monitor regulator output during the following steps NOTE
  • Section 7.2 Step 3 and Section 7.2 Step 4 ate repeated as necessary to ensure proper operation/indication of the manual rheostat D
  • DC regulator output is locally monitored using D 1VM (D.C. Req. Output) D
3. Raise 7OCS (Gen Manual Volt Adj Rheo) until the Upper Limit light comes ON NOTE The Intermed light will come ON during lowering of 7OCS (Gen Manual Volt Adj Rheo) and will remain ON after the Low Limit light is ON C
4. Lower 7OCS (Gen Manual Volt Ad] Rheo) until the Low Limit light comes ON
5. Using 7OCS (Gen Manual Volt Ad] Rheo) on the RTGB, null Gen Volt Reg Difi Volt meter
6. (F D1VM (D.C. Req. Output) variation was NOT smooth AND in the same direction as rheostat movement, THEN go to Section 73 Step 7

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 17 of 47 MAIN GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR MANUAL OPT-30.2 11 AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONAL CHECK Rev. 6 Page 7 of 13 7.2 Operate 7OCS (Gen Manual Volt AUj Rheo) (continued)

7. IF D1VM (D.C. Reg Output) variation was smooth AND in the same direction as rheostat movement, THEN perform the foUowing {9. 1. l}

a Notify the Load Dispatcher the main generator voltage regulator is being placed in MANUAL Person Notified

b. Document the Load Dispatcher notification in the log
c. Place 43CS (Regulator Mode Selector) in MAN

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOt SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 18 of 47 MAIN GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR MANUAL OPT-40.2 ii AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONAL CHECK Rev. 6 Page8of 13 7.3 Operate 9OCS (Gen Auto Volt Adj Rheo)

NOTE Section 7.3 Step; and Section 7.3 Step 2 may be repeated as necessary to ensure proper operationhindication of the automatic rheostat C AC regulator output may be locally monitored using Al VM fA.C. Reg. Output) C

1. Raise 9OCS (Gen Auto Volt Ad] Rheo) until the Upper Limit light comes ON
2. Lower 9OCS (Gen Auto Volt Adj Rheo) until the Low Limit light comes ON
3. Null Gen Volt Req Out Volt meter on the RTGB using 9OCS (Gen Auto Volt Adj Rheo)
4. IFA1VM fA.C. Req. Output) variation was NOT smooth AND in the same direction as rheostat movement, THEN go to Section 7.3 Step 6
5. IF A1VM (A,C, Reg. Output) variation was smooth in the same direction as rheostat movement, THEN perform the following: {9.l.1}

a, Place 43CS (Regulator Mode Selector) in AUTO

b. Notify the Load Dispatcher the main generator voltage regulator is in AUTOMATIC Person Notified
c. Document Load Dispatcher notification in the tog
6. IF extended manual voltage regulator operation becomes necessary.

THEN coordinate with the Load Dispatcher to maintain minimum generator MVAR load and generator voltage in accordance with the System Operation section of if2)OP-27, Generator and Exciter System Operating Procedure

7. 1f either regulator output variation was .QI smooth p in the same direction as the rheostat, THEN prepare a WJR for the regulator

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 19 of 47 MAIN GENERATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR MANUAL OPT-30.2 Ii AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONAL CHECK Rev. 6 Page 90113 7.4 Restoration

1. Perform review of completed procedure sections to verity Section 5.0.

Acceptance Criteria, for tests pertormed, have been met IV

2. jf. Acceptance Cntena is 4.QI met, THEN perform following:
a. Report any equipment found INOPERABLE or NOT meeting Acceptance Criteria to Supervisor b Ensure CR has been initiated
3. Ensure required information has been recorded on Attachment 2. Certification and Review Form
4. Notify Unit CRS when this procedure is complete or tound to be unsatisfactory

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 20 of 47 EVENT 2: DWEDT PUMP FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator or at simulator time 35 minutes, Initiate Trigger I to activate the DWED Sump Lvl Hi Annunciator.

If the simulator is left in run the DWED Sump Lvl Hi Alarm will annunciate on its own after NOTE approximately 40 minutes. (The sumps will automatically start pumping if allowed to annunciate)

When either sump pump has been running for 30 seconds delete malfunction for the DWED Sump Lvl Hi Annunciator.

Simulator Operator Role Play Acknowledge requests as I&C for troubleshooting DWED Sump Pump auto start failure.

If asked, the last time the sum ps were pump was 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> ago Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Annunciator A-04 (1-1), Drywell Equip Drain Sump Lvl Hi.

Objectives: RO - Pump the DWEDT Success Path: Pumps the DWEDT.

Event Termination: Go to Event 3 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 21 of4i]

EVENT 2: DWEDT PUMP FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct actions of APPs Direct RO to start DWEDS Pump, if asked.

SRO Contact I/C for troubleshooting the failure of the DWEDS to auto start.

Refer to APP:

RO A-04 (1-1), Drywell Equip Drain Sump Lvl Hi Diagnose failure of DWEDS Pump Start a DWEDS Pump (may use OOP-47 Section 5.3.5)

Verifies pump shuts off after a period of time.

BOP Monitors the plant

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 22 of 47 FLOOR AND EQUIPMENT DRAIN SYSTEM OOP-41 OPERATING PROCEDURE 28 Page 21 of 56 5.3.5 Manually Pumping Drywell Floor Or Equipment Drain Sumps Ensure the following

a. Drywell rto or Equipment Drain sump needs to be manually pumped to determine in-Leakage rates OR
b. Drywell Floor or Equipment Drain sump needs to be manually pumped as determined by the Unit CRS
2. On Panel P603. place control switches for the applicable sump pump(s) in START AND then in AUTO:
  • G16-COO1A (Drywell floor Drain Pump 12A) ..
  • G16-COOB (Drywell Floor Drain Pump 1(2)6)
  • G16-COO6A (Drywell Equip Drain Pump 6A)
  • G16-COO6B (Drywell Equip Drain Pump 66)

DateiFime Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSISRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 23 of 47 EVENT 314: VFD A CELL FAILURE I MANEUVER POWER Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 4 to activate VFD A Cell failure.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

If asked as Reactor Engineer for guidance on restoring Loop flow limits, ask the CRS for their recommendations, then concur with that recommendation.

If contacted as TBAO, report local indications consistant for a VFD Cell Bypass.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: A power cell in VFD A will fail. Recirc Pump 2A speed will lower and a speed hold will initiate. Loop flows will be outside mismatch limits. The crew will respond per AOP 04.0, reset the speed hold and match loop flows or lower the speed of 2B to get within Tech Spec limits.

Objectives: SRO - Direct Shift Response To A Recirculation Flow Control Failure Causing A Decreasing Flow Per AOP-04.0 RO - Respond To A Recirc Flow Control Failure Decreasing Per AOP-04.0 Success Path: Reset the speed hold condition and match recirc loop flows.

Event Termination: Go to Event 5 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 24 of 47 EVENT 314: VFD A CELL FAILURE I MANEUVER POWER Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct entry into AOP-04.0 With recirculation loops flows mismatched, enter LCO 3.4.1 Condition A.

NOTE: May balance loops and not enter Tech.

Specs. Question examinee about Tech Spec actions if not entered.

TS 3.4.1 Condition Al.

Satisfy the requirements of the LCD within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> by restoring matched flows or impose limits specified by the LCD.

NOTE: Declare the loop with lower flow not in operation.

Direct speed hold reset on VFD A Direct loop flow mismatch restored to within limit Direct l&C to investigate cell failure May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 45 for format)

BOP Monitors the plant.

Determine cause to be cell failure at HMI

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 25 of 47 EVENT 314: VFD A CELL FAILURE I MANEUVER POWER Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Reference applicable APPs:

RO A-06, 3-1, Recirc VFD A Alarm Unack A-06, 4-5, Recirc Loop A Only Out Of Serv Recognize/report lowering Recirc A speed/speed hold Enter/announce 2AOP-04.0, Low Core Flow Determine Loop flow outside mismatch limits Core flow >57.5 MIbs, Jet Pump flows must be within 3 MIbs.

Reset speed hold on VFD A lAW 2OP-02 Section 6.3.4. (see page 26)

Restore loop flows to within limits as directed by CRS.

Lower the B Recirc Pump Speed lAW 2OP-02 Section 6.2.1. (see page 27) or Raise the A Recirc Pump Speed lAW 20P-02 Section 6.1.3. (see page 28)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 26 of 4]

TEACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 66 of 250 6.3.4 Recovery From Recirc VFD Speed Hold Condition

1. Confirm Recirc VED A(S) Speed Hold yellow light ON at Panel P603
2. Ensure the cause of the Speed Hold condition has been identified
3. Ensure Plant conditions have stabilized
4. Check the following parameters are approximate[y the same
  • Recirc Pump A(S) Speed Demand
  • Recirc Pump A(S) Actual Speed
  • Recirc Pump A(S) Calculated Speed 5, Depress Recirc VFD A(S) SP Hold Reset to reset the speed hold condition
6. Confirm Recirc VFD A(S) Speed Hold yellow status light is OFF
7. Check flow conditions stable END R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
8. Adjust Recirc VFD speed and Recirc flow as directed by the Unit CRS END R.M. LEVEL R2IR3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION Completed Date/rime Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By:

Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 27 of 47 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 168 Page 4501250 6.2 Shutdown 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control

1. Confirm reactor recirculation pump in operation in accordance with Section 6.1.2 NOTE Recirculation Pump speed changes are performed when directed by OGP-05, Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes. Other operating procedures are used simultaneously with this procedure as directed by OGP-05, Unit Shutdown, and OGP-12, Power Changes C Speed changes are accomplished by depressing Lower Slow, Lower Medium, or Lower Fast pushbuttons. The Lower Slow pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 0.06%/decrement at 1 rpm/second The Lower Medium pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 028%/decrement at 5 rpm/second. The Lower Fast pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 2.8%/decrement at 100rpm/second C
2. IF AT ANY TIME any of the following conditions exist, THEN enter 1AOP-04.0, Low Core FIow.{8.i.9
  • Entry into Region A of Power to Flow Map
  • OPRM INOPERABLE any of the following Entry into Region B of Power to Flow Map 0 Entry into 5% Buffer Region of Power to Flow Map O Entry into OPRM Enabled Region and indications of Till (Thermal Hydraulic Instability) exist

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 28 of 4]

REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 46 of 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

CAUTION The OPRM System monitors LPRMs for indication of thermal hydraulic instability HI) When greater than or equal to 25% power and less than or equal to 60% recirculation flow, alarms and automatic tnps are initiated upon detection of THI. Pump operations are governed by the limits of the applicable Power Flow Map, as specified in the COLR. {8. 1 .9} D

  • Entry into the 5% Buffer Region warrants increased monitonng of reactor instrumentation for signs of Thermal Hydraulic Instability. Time in the 5% Buffer Region presents additional risk and is minimized.f6.1 .9) D
  • With core flow less than 57.5 x 10 lbs/br, jet pump loop flows are requited within 10% (maximum indicated driference 6.0 x 1 0 lbs/hf). With core flow greater than or equal to 57.5 x lbs/hr, jet pump loop flows ate reqinred within 5% (maximum indicated difference 3.0 x lD lbs/ht) C
  • When Recirc Pump speeds are less than 40%, decreasing speed using a Lower Fast pushbutton can result in a Speed Hold condition due to exceeding the regen torque limit C BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
3. IF desired to lower the speed of both recirculation pumps simultaneously, THEN depress Recirc Master Control Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton 4 IE desired to lower the speed of an individual recirculation pump.

THEN depress the Recwc VFD A(B) Lower (Slow Medium Fast) pushbutton

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 29 of 47 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPER4TING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 168 Page 47 of 250 6.2.1 Lowering SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculatlon Pump Control Or Recirc Master Control (continued)

5. Confirm the follov.ing, as applicable:

Recirc Pump Af B) Speed Demand, Calculated Speed, and Actual Speed have lowered

  • Reactor power lowers
  • 632-R617(R613) [Recirc Pump AtE) Discharge Flow] lowers
  • 632-VFD-IDS-003A(B) [Recirc VFD 2A(B) Output Waffmeterl lowers
  • B32-VFD-IDS-OO1A(B) JRecirc VFD 2AfB) Output Frequency Meter] lowers END R.M. LEVEL RVR3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION Date/Time Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By:

Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 30 of 47 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERT1NG 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 3801250 6.1.3 Raising SpeedlPower Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control or Recirc Master Control

1. Ensure the following Initial Conditons are met:
a. Reactor Recirculation Pumps in operation in accordance with Section 6.1.2
b. Recirculation Pump fl& limits are CLEAR NOTE
  • Recirculation Pump speed changes are performed wten directed by OGP-04, Increasing Turbine Load to Rated Power, and OGP-12. Power Changes. Other operating procedures are used simultaneously with this procedure as directed by OGP-04, Increasing Turbine Load to Rated Power, OGP-12. Power Changes, or the Unit CR5 D
  • Speed changes are accomplished by depressing Raise Slow or Raise Medium pushbuttons. The Raise Slow pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at O.06%1increment at I rpm/second The Raise Medium pushbutton changes Recirc pump speed at 0.28%/increment at 5 rpm/second C CAUTION The OPRM System monitors LPRMs for indication of thermal hydraulic instability (THI). When greater than or equal to 25% power and less than or equal to 60%

recirculation flow, alarms and automatic trips are initiated upon detection of THI.

Pump operations are governed by the limits of the applicable Power Flow Map, as specified in the COLR. {8. 1.9) C

2. IF AT ANY TIME any of the following conditions exist, THEN enter 2AOP-04.0, Low Core Flow. {8. 1.9)
  • Entry into Region A of Power to Flow Map
  • OPRM INOPERABLE AND any of the following G Entry into Region B of Power to Flow Map 0 Entry into 5% Buffer Region of Power to Flow Map 0 Entry into OPRM Enabled Region and indications of THI (Thermal Hydraulic Instability) exist

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 31 of47 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 168 Page 39 of 250 6.1.3 Raising SpeedlPower Using individual Recirculation Pump Control or Recirc Master Control (continued)

CAUTION

  • The OPRM System monitors LPRMs for indication of thermal hydraulic instability (THI). When greater than or equal to 25% power and less than or equal to 60% recirculation flow, alarms and automatic tnps are initiated upon detection of THI. Pump operations is be within the limits of the applicable Power-Flow Map, as specified in the COLR. The Scram Avoidance Region is avoided. {8.1 .9) D
  • With core flow less than 57.5 x l0 lbs/br, jet pump loop flows are required 10e within 10% (maximum indicated difference 6.0 x lbs/br). With core flow 10e lbs/hr. jet pump loop flows are requited greater than or equal to 57.5 x within 5% (maximum indicated difference 3.0 x l0 lbs/br) D
  • If total reactor feedwater flow lowers to less than 764% of rated flow. Speed Limiter Number I will cause the Recirculation Pumps to run back to M%

speed. This signal must be manually reset in accordance with Section 6.3.3 C

  • When total core flow is greater than 43 mlblhr, Speed Limiter Number 2 will cause a runback to approximately 48% speed if reactor water level is less than 182 inches and either reactor feed pump A or B suction flow is less than 14.9%

of individual RFP rated suction flow This signal must be manually reset using Section 6.3.3 C BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R2IR3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

3. IF desired to raise the speed of both Recirc Pumps simultaneously, as directed by the Unit CRS, THEN depress Recirc Master Control Raise Slow or Raise Medium pushbutton
4. IF desired to raise the speed of an individual Recirc Pump, as directed by the Unit CRS, THEN depress the VFD Af B) Raise Slow or Raise Medium pushbutton for the Recirc Pump
5. Confirm the following, as applicable:
  • A rise in Recirc Pump A(B) Speed Demand. Calculated Speed, and a rise in Actual Speed
  • A rise in Reactor power
  • A rise in 632-R617(R613) [Recirc Pump A(B) Discharge Flowl

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. o]

Page 32 oL]

REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev 168 Page 40 01250 6.1.3 Raising Speed/Power Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control or Recirc Master Control (continued)

  • A nse in B32-VFD-IDS-003A(B) [Recirc VED 2A(B) Output Wattmeter]
  • A rise in B32-VFD-IDS-OO1A(B) [Recirc VFD 2Af B) Output Frequency Meterj END R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION Datelflme Completed________________

Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By:

Unit CRSISRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 33 of 47 EVENT 5: NSW PUMP B TRIP (FAILURE OF STANDBY TO START)

Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 5 to trip the 2B NSW Pump.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as CAD to investigate NSW pump and breaker, After the pump has tripped report 51 devices on all three phases are tripped at the breaker on E4 If contacted as l&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The running NSW pump will TRIP on motor overload. The STBY NSW pump will fail to AUTO start. The BOP operator should recognize the failure and manually start the STBY NSW pump. With a UI NSW pump under clearance will require entry into TS.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions for loss of NSW Determine actions required for LCD per Technical Specifications RD Respond to the failure of an automatic start of the A NSW pump Success Path: Determine IS required actions and Start 2A NSW Pump.

Event Termination: Go to Event 6 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 34 of 47 EVENT 5: NSW PUMP B TRIP (FAILURE OF STANDBY TO START)

Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct entry into OAOP-18.O, NSW System SRO Failure.

Contact maintenance to investigate trip of 2B NSW Pump.

May also report to I/C that 2A NSW Pump did not auto start.

Evaluate Tech Spec 3.7.2 Service Water System and Ultimate Heat Sink.

. Determine 2B NSW pump inoperable

. Determine JA NSW Pump inoperable due to clearance.

. Per the Bases, 3 NSW pumps required site wide.

  • 3.7.2 Condition B. One required NSW pump inoperable for reasons other than condition A. Required Action B.1 Restore required NSW pump to Operable status in 7 days NOTE: Auto start feature for a NSW pump is not TS required, only that a NSW is available, so the 2A NSW pump is still operable.

May direct 2C CSW pump to be placed on the NSW header.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 45 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 35 of 47 EVENT 5: NSW PUMP B TRIP (FAILURE OF STANDBY TO START)

Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Monitor reactor plant parameters during ATC evolution.

Acknowledge / reference BOP UA-18 (6-1) BUS E4 4KV MOTOR OVLD Recognize trip of 2B NSW pump and lowering NSW system pressure.

Announce and execute OAOP-J8.0, NSW System Failure.

Recognize the failure of the STBY NSW pump to start and starts standby pump.

. Places 2A NSW pump in Manual.

. Starts 2A NSW Pump.

Refer to alarms.

. UA-01 (1-10) NUCLEAR HEADER SERV WTR PRESS-LOW

. UA-01 (4-10) NUCLEAR HDR SW PUMP B TRIP

. UA-05 (1-9) FAN CLG UNIT CS PUMP RM A INL PRESS LO

. UA-05 (2-9) FAN CLG UNIT CS PUMP RM B INL PRESS LO May align the 20 CSW pump to the NSW header.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 36 of 47 EVENT 6: CWIP TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 6 to activate OW Pump A trip Simulator Operator Role Play If asked as Outside AC, acknowledge request to check pump. After 2-3 minutes, call back and report no abnormalities noted.

If asked as TBAO, identify that breaker AB8 on 4160 V Switchgear 2C is tripped on overcurrent.

No other abnormalities.

If asked as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request If asked for prestart checks for the 2C CWIP, report prestart checks are SAT.

If asked to verify no personnel are around the 2C Bus, report all clear.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Circ Water Pump A will trip and annunciator UA-01, 1-7, CIRC WATER PUMP A TRIP, will alarm. After investigating the cause of the alarm, another Circ Water Pump should be started lAW the APP.

Objectives: SRO - Direct actions of APP-UA-01, 1-7, CIRC WATER PUMP A TRIP Direct Emergency Depressurization BOP Perform action of APP UA-01, 1-7, CIRC WATER PUMP A TRIP RO Monitor plant parameters Success Path: Another Circ Water pump is be started.

Event Termination: Go to Event 7 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 37 of 47 EVENT 6: CWIP TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct actions of APP-UA-01, 1-7, CIRC WATER SRO PUMP A TRIP.

May direct entry into enter OAOP-37.0, Loss Of Condenser Vacuum May direct power lowered to 90%

May conduct a brief on when Reactor Scram is req u i red (see Enclosure 1 on page 45 for format)

ATC Plant Monitoring May lower power as directed by the CRS.

(See page 27)

BOP Take actions lAW APP-UA-01, 1-7, CIRC WATER PUMP A TRIP (see page 38)

NOTE: CW ISOL VALVES MODE SELECTOR SWITCH will need to be placed into position D to start C CWIP May announce and enter OAOP-37.0, Loss Of Condenser Vacuum Direct AOs to investigate pump and pump breaker to determine cause of pump trip.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 38 of 47 Unit 2 APP UA-0l 1-7 Page 1 of 3 CW PUMP A TRIP AUTO ACTIONS

1. CWPumpAtiips CAUSE
1. Instantaneous overcurrent
2. Time overcurrent
3. Phase overcurrent
4. DifTerentiat overcurrent or phase angle (tockout relay)
5. Condenser pit flood level hf-hi
6. Low lube water flow
7. High traveling screen A UP (48 in. water) AND screen A stopped
8. High traveling screen A UP (48 in. water) AND high screen B, C or 0 UP (18 in. water)
9. LOCA Load Shed
10. Unit Tnp Load Shed ii Circuit malfunction OBSERVATIONS
1. Condenser vacuum decreasing process computer points 1000, TOOl, Recorder OG-PR-23 on XU-2, and l-OG-Pl-23-1A, -2A on XU-80)
2. Generator output decreasing
3. Local relay indication at the breaker compartment
4. Circulating water discharge temperature increasing (GOP typer)
5. CW PUMP LUBE WATER FLOW-LOW (UA-0i 5-7) alarm
6. TURB BLDG NW CNDSR PIT FLOOD LVL HI (UA-28 6-6) alarm
7. TURB BLDG E CNDSR PIT FLOOD LVL HI fUA-28 6-5) alarm
8. TURB BLDG SW CNDSR PIT FLOOD LVL HI fUA-28 6-7) alarm
9. CW SCREEN DIFF HI HI (UA-Q1 1-4) alarm 10 CW SCREEN A DIFF HIGH OR STOPPED fUA-Ol 1-5) alarm
11. CW SCREEN B DIFF HIGH OR STOPPED (UA-Ol 2-5) alarm
12. CW SCREEN C DIFF HIGH OR STOPPED (UA-O1 3-5) alarm 13 CW SCREEN D DIFF HIGH OR STOPPED (UA-O1 4-5) alarm ACTIONS
1. If a radioactive liquid release is in progress, terminate the release.
2. If reactor power is less than 90% OR a CWIP pump can be started within 5 minutes, THEN START an available CWIP.
3. If reactor power is greater than 90% AND an available CWIP pump was NOT started within 5 minutes, then power must be reduced to 90 to 92%

prior to starting a CWIP 2APP-UA-O 1 Rev. 83 Page 15 of 109 jf

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 39 of 47 EVENT 7: RWCU LEAK I SBGT FAILS TO START Simulator Operator Actions At the discretion of the lead evaluator, Initiate Trigger 7 to activate the RWCU Leak.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as engineering, acknowledge request for EQ envelopes for the U2 Reactor Building.

If HPs contacted to perform field surveys acknowledge the request.

If directed to reset breakers for the RWCU isolation valves, wait 2 minutes and report HP has restricted access to the reactor building.

If directed to co-ordinate entry with the HPs, wait 15 minutes and report the breakers will not reset.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: A large un-isolable RWCU leak will occur. Crew will enter AOP-5.0 and SCCP. SRO should direct a SCRAM.

Objectives: SRO - Direct response to un-isolable primary system breach in secondary containment.

RO Respond to un-isolable primary system breach in secondary containment.

Perform SCRAM actions.

Success Path: Reactor scram is inserted before max norm operating value is exceeded.

Event Termination: When a reactor scram is inserted and SCCP entered.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 40 of 47 EVENT 7: RWCU LEAK I SBGT FAILS TO START Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct entry into OAOP-5.0, Radioactive Spills, High Radiation, And Airborne Activity SRO May direct entry into AOP-05.4, Radiological Releases Direct RO to trip and isolate RWCU.

Announce and enter SCCP procedure Direct a reactor manual scram prior to any area reaching its Max Safe Operating Critical Task #1 Temperature Limit May direct a cool down at normal cool down rates (<100°F/hr).

Request EQ envelopes for the U2 Rx Bldg Enter and execute RVCP.

D Direct RO/BOP to stabilize reactor pressure below 1050 psig.

D Verify Instrument operability per Caution 1.

Direct crew to not use N026A/B due to 50 temperatures after 50 alarm reported.

LJ Direct verification of group isolations, ECCS initiations and DG starts as appropriate.

Direct RO/BOP to restore and maintain reactor water level I 70-200 Recognize when alarm A-2 6-8, RB 20/50 FT ELEV TEMP HI, is reported that if 50 elevation is greater than 140° F that the Wide Range (N026) level indicators are inaccurate.

Contact I/C for assistance with RWCU isolation valve failures

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 41 of 47 EVENT 7: RWCU LEAK I SBGT FAILS TO START Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Insert Reactor scram as directed by CRS Critical Task #1 Depresses both of the manual scram pushbuttons.

Place mode switch to shutdown when steam flow < 3x106 lb/hr.

IF reactor power is below 2% (APRM downscale ATC trip), THEN TRIP the main turbine.

ENSURE the master reactor level controller setpoint is +170.

IF two reactor feed pumps are running, AND reactor vessel level is above 160 AND rising, THEN TRIP one.

ATc/ Maintain reactor pressure as directed by CRS.

BOP ATC/ Maintain reactor water level as directed by SRO.

BOP

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 42 of 47 EVENT 7: RWCU LEAK I SBGT FAILS TO START Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Respond to UA-03 2-7, AREA RAD RX BLDG HI.

Enter and execute OAOP-5.0, Radioactive Spills, High Radiation, And Airborne Activity.

D Evacuate Unit 2 Reactor Bldg.

Direct AO to close PIV-33 RB Sprinkler Critical Task #2 BOP Shutoff Valve.

Direct E&RC to take applicable OAOP-5.0 actions.

D Check area radiation readings at back panels.

Diagnose source of radiation as RWCU leak.

Recognize and report to CRS alarm A-2 6-8, RB 20/50 FT ELEV TEMP HI.

Responds to UA-5, 4-6, SBGT SYSA Failure Recognize failure of SBGT to start, places SBGT train A switches to start ATc/ Maintain reactor pressure as directed by CRS.

BOP ATC/ Maintain reactor water level as directed by SRO.

BOP

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 43 of 47 EVENT 8: EMERG DEPRESS I ADS VALVE FAILURE I TERMINATION Simulator Operator Actions 2 minutes after receiving Annunciator UA-12 (2-4) SOUTH RHR RM FLOOD HI, or when anticipation of emergency depressurization is performed, Initiate TRIGGER 10 (South RHR RM Flood HI-HI)

When directed by the lead evaluator, place the simulator in FREEZE DO NOT RESET THE SIMULATOR PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF CONCURRENCE TO DO SO FROM THE LEAD EXAMINER Simulator Operator Role Play Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Secondary containment conditions will worsen, forcing the SRO to direct an Emergency Depressurization due to high water levels. Two ADS SRVs will fail to manually open. SRO should direct opening two additional SRVs. Scenario will end when reactor pressure reaches I OO#.

Objectives: SRO Evaluate plant conditions and direct an Emergency Depressurization.

RO Performs actions for Emergency Depressurization.

Success Path: ED has been performed.

Scenario Termination: When emergency depressurization has been performed and the reactor has been depressurized to <100 psig the scenario may be terminated.

Remind students not to erase any charts and not to discuss the scenario until told to do so by the evaluator/instructor.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 44 of 47 EVENT 8: EMERG DEPRESS I ADS VALVE FAILURE I TERMINATION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Continue reactor cooldown per SCCP direction.

May direct anticipation of emergency depressurization after second flood level hi alarm.

Directs Emergency Depressurization when RHR RM FLOOD LEVEL HI-HI alarm (Two plant areas with water levels above Max Safe South CS and RHR)

Direct ROIBOP to open 7 ADS valves.

If informed by RO/BOP that 2 SRVs failed to open, direct opening additional SRVs until 7 SRVs are open.

Enter PCCP when torus temperature exceeds 95°F.

Directs all available loops to be placed in suppression pool cooling.

Recognize and report South CS and South RHR ATC/

Room Flood Hi-Hi alarms.

Open seven ADS valves as directed by SRD.

Recognize failure of 2 ADS valves to OPEN and report to SRO.

Open 2 additional SRVs as directed by SRO.

Maintain reactor water level as directed by SRO.

Place available loops in suppression Pool Cooling lAW hard card. (see page 40)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3]

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 45 of]

ENCLOSURE 1 Page 1 of I CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS AD-OP-ALL-i 000 Rev. 6 Page 90 of 90 AUACHMENT 8 Page 1 of 1

< Crew BrIGf TQmpIato>>

a Announce Crew Bder Begin Brief a Afl crew members adnowIedge announcement (As Required)

C] Upclate the crew as needed:

a Describe tiat happened and major actions taken C] Procedures in-progress a Nobtications:

Recap a Maintenance a Engineering C Others (Dispatcher, Station Management, etc.)

C] Future Direction and priorities C] Discuss any contingency plans (As Required) a Soitcit questions/concerns from each crew member:

aROs input a CR5 DStA a Are there any alarms unexpected tor the plant conditions?

a what is the status of Critical Parameters?

(As Required)

EAL a Provide EAL and potential escalation criteria a Restore normal alarm announcement? (Yes/No)

FinIsh Brief a Announce End of Brief

2016 NRC SCENARIO 3 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 46 of 47 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment NUREG 1021 Scenario Content Category Rev. 2 Supp. I Req.

Total Malfunctions 5-8 7 Malfunctions after EOP 1-2 2 Entry Abnormal Events 2-4 4 Major Transients 1-2 2 EOPs Used 1-2 2 EOP Contingency 0-2 1 Run Time 60-90 mm 90 Crew Critical Tasks 2-3 2 Tech Specs 2 2 Instrument I Component 2 OATC Failures before Major 2 - BOP Instrument I Component 2 2 Failures after Major Normal Operations 1 1 Reactivity manipulation 1 1

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Page 47 of 47 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover Brunswick Unit 2 Plant Status Station Duty Workweek B. Craig E. Neal Manager:

Manager:

Mode: I Rx Power: 100% Mode: I Plant Risk:

Green Current EOOS Risk Assessment is:

SFPTirneto Days Online: 80 days 49.7 hrs Turnover:

Protected 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2A Demin Transfer Pump for Equipment: Fuel Pool Decay Heat Removal and inventory makeup.

2A/B NSW Pumps due to JA NSW pump maintenance IA NSW Pump is under clearance for planned maintenance.

2C ICC Pump is in service on Unit One.

Comments: APRM 2 has failed downscale and is bypassed.

The BOP will perform PT-40.2.11, Main Generator Voltage Regulator Manual And Automatic Operational Check.

DUKE ENERGY.

BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION OPERATIONS TRAINING INITIAL LICENSED OPERATOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE 2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 START CREV, NOO4A FAILURE, CRD FCV FAILURE, RCIC STEAM LEAK, TCC FAILURE, STATOR COOLING TRIP, LOOP, DG3 FAILURE, SRV TAILPIPE, ED REVISION 0 Developer: od o1i Date: 07/07/2016 Technical Review: Va%%ct Date: 9/12/2016 Vahdators: ,4aSe% Date: 11/03/16 o6e Facility Representative: zai9 Câe Date: 11/03/16

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page2of58 REVISION

SUMMARY

0 Scenario developed for 2016 NRC Exam.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page3of58 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE 4 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

5 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS 6 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA 7 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES 7 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 8 7.0 INTERVENTIONS 10 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES 12 ATTACHMENT 1 - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment 46 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover 58

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 4 of 58 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE Event MaIf. No. Type* Event Description I N-BOP Manual start of CREV in area high radiation mode.

C32-LT-NOO4A Fails high 2 NBOO7F (IS)

C-ATC 2a RDOJ7F CRD Flow Control Valve failure C-CRS C-ATC RCIC steam leak 3 ESO25F C-CRS (AOP)(TS)

C-BOP ICC Pump Failure 4 K4516A C-CRS (AOP) 5 R-ATC Power Reduction EEO3OM- C-BOP MCC 2TD trip I Standby Stator Water Cooling Pump fails to 6

21D C-CRS auto start M Loss of Off-Site Power / Scram 7 EEOO9F C DG3 Duff 0/C / DG4 failure to auto start (RSP)(PCCP)(AOP)

C SRV Failure I Tailpipe Break I DW Spray Logic Failure 8 M ED on PSP (AOP)(EDP)

  • (N)otmal (R)eactivity, (C)omponent or Instrument, (M)ajor

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 5 of 58 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

Event Description 1 The BOP will start CREV in the area high radiation mode lAW OOP-37, Section 6.1.3.

After CREV is started, C32-LT-NOO4A will fail high. The crew will reference Tech 2 Spec 3.3.2.2 and determine a 7 day LCO exists to place the failed channel in the tripped condition. The crew should select level B per OP-32.

The CRD flow control valve 2A will fail closed. The crew will place the standby CRD 2a flow control valve 2B in service per OP-08.

A break in the RCIC steam line in the south RHR room will occur. The break can be 3 isolated by closing either the E51-F007 or the E51-F008. The crew will respond to the steam leak lAW AOP-05.0.

TBCCW Pump 2B will trip and TBCCW low header pressure will alarm. The crew will 4 respond per OAOP-17.0. TBCCW pressure will recover and actions for partial loss of TBCCW will be performed.

5 A power reduction will be required lAW AOP-17.0.

MCC 2TD will trip and the standby stator cooling water pump will fail to auto start. The standby stator cooling water pump can be manually started. The 2D air compressor 6

will also be lost and OAOP-20.0 may be entered. Unit One may be contacted to place the 1D Air Compressor in lead.

A Loss of Offsite Power will occur. The crew will respond per OAOP-36. 1. DG3 will trip on Duff 0/C and DG4 will fail to auto start, can be started manually.

SRV F will fail open. AOP-30 will be entered. The SRV will not reset using the control switch. Pulling fuses lAW AOP-30 results in loss of indication but the SRV 8 remains open. SRV F tailpipe will rupture, pressurizing containment. The DW Spray logic (think switch) will fail causing an inability to spray the torus or drywell.

Emergency Depressurization is required when PSP is violated.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 6 of 58 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS Critical Task #1 Start DG4 to re-energize E4 within 60 minutes of Loss of Offsite Power.

Critical Task #2 Emergency Depressurize the Reactor when Pressure Suppression Pressure (PSP) cannot be maintained in the safe region within 30 minutes.

<<Pressure Suppression Pressure>>

-2 SAFE _:::

_EE - -

E

--UNSAFE--

0 -

1:  :
2:::

0 10 20 30 40 TORUS PRESSURE (PSIG)

Critical Task #3 Isolate RCIC or Insert a manual reactor scram prior to exceeding Max Safe Operating Temperature Limit.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 70158 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA When all rods are inserted and level is being controlled above TAF the scenario may be terminated.

5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES NOTE: Refer to the most current revision of each Implementing Reference.

Number Title UA-14 (4-2) CB MACH ROOM VENT FAN TRIP A-07 (4-2) FW CTL SYS TROUBLE OAOP-23.0 CONDENSATE/FEEDWATER SYSTEM FAILURE UA-06 (2-5) SUB 2F 480V FEEDER BKR TRIP UA-13 (6-6) RFP B CONTROL TROUBLE UA-02 (1-8) STAT COOLANT INLET FLOW-LOW UA-02 (1-9) LOSS OF STAT COOLANT TRIP CKT ENER UA-02 (2-8) STAT COOLANT PRESS-LOW UA-02 (6-9) EXCITER COOLANT FLOW-LOW UA-03 (2-4) TBCCW PUMP DISCH HEADER PRESS LOW OAOP-17.0 TURBINE BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER SYSTEM FAILURE A-03 (4-8) OPRM TRIP ENABLED OAOP-36.1 LOSS OF ANY 4160V BUSES OR 480V E-BUSES 20P-08 CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 8 of 58 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS

1. PERFORM TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 5, Checklist for Simulator Exam Security.
2. RESET the Simulator to 10-11.
3. ENSURE the RWM is set up as required for the selected IC.
4. ENSURE appropriate keys have blanks in switches.
5. RESET alarms on SJAE, MSL, and RWM NUMACs.
6. ENSURE no rods are bypassed in the RWM.
7. PLACE all SPDS displays to the Critical Plant Variable display (#100).
8. ENSURE hard cards and flow charts are cleaned up
9. TAKE the SIMULATOR OUT OF FREEZE
10. LOAD Scenario File.

II. ALIGN the plant as follows:

Manipulation Ensure 20 ICC pump is in service on Unit One. Loaded in Scenario File Ensure 2B Stator Cooling Pump running and 2A in standby Bypass APRM 2

12. IF desired, take a SNAPSHOT and save into an available IC for later use.
13. PLACE a clearance on the following equipment.

Component Position APRM 2 Blue Tag

14. INSTALL Protected Equipment signage and UPDATE RTGB placard as follows:

Protected Equipment

1. 2A and 2B NSW pumps
2. 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2A Demin Transfer Pump.
15. VERIFY OENP 24.5 Form 2 (Immediate Power Reduction Form) for IC-li is in place.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 9 of 58]

16. ENSURE each Implementing References listed in Section 7 is intact and free of marks.
17. ENSURE all materials in the table below are in place and marked-up to the step identified.

Required Materials

18. ADVANCE the recorders to prevent examinees from seeing relevant scenario details.
19. PROVIDE Shift Briefing sheet for the CRS.
20. VERIFY all actions contained in TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 4, Simulator Training Instructor Checklist, are complete.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 10 of 58 7.0 INTERVENTIONS TRIGGERS Trig Type ID 1 Malfunction NBO07F [RX LVLTRANSMIUER C32-NOO4A FAILS]

2 Malfunction EEO3OM [INDIVIDUAL BUS FAILURE]

4 Malfunction E5025F [RCIC STM BRK SOUTH RHR]

5 Annunciator ZUA324 [TBCCW PUMP DISCH HEADER PRESS LOW]

5 AD Override G4H11G14 [TBCCW DISCHARGE PRESS TOC-PI-556]

5 DI Override K4517A [TB CCW PMP B ON]

5 DI Override K4517A [TB CCW PMP B ON]

5 DO Override Q4517LG4 [TB CCW PMP B OFF G]

6 Malfunction EE0O9F [LOSS OF OFF-SITE POWER]

7 Remote Function SW_IAVSW193 [SW-V193 MAN ISOL NSW TO RBCCW]

7 Remote Function SW_VHSW146L [CONV SW TO RBCCW HXS V146]

8 Remote Function RP_IAEPAMGA [RPS M-G SET A EPA BKRSJ 8 Remote Function RP_IARPSA [RESTART RPS MG SET A]

9 Remote Function RP_IAEPAMGB [RPS M-G SET B EPA BKRS]

9 Remote Function RP_IARPSB [RESTART RPS MG SET B]

10 Remote Function ED_ZIEDH1 - [PNL 2AB-RX PWR (E7=NORM/E8=ALT)]

10 Remote Function ED_ZIEDH08 [PNL 2AB PWR (E7=NORM/E8=ALT)]

10 Remote Function ED_ZIEDHXO [PNL 32AB PWR fE7=NORM/E8=ALT)]

11 Malfunction ESOO4F [ADS VALVE F FAILS OPEN]

12 DO Override Q1SO8RRJ [SRV VLV B21-F013F RED]

12 DO Override Q1520SA9 [AMBER LED +5V]

12 DO Override Q15O8LGJ [SRV VLV B21-FO3F GREEN]

12 Malfunction CAO2OF [SRV F TAIL PIPE RUPTURE]

13 Remote Function MI_ZVACS98_1 [UNIT 1 CB MECHANICAL EQUIP ROOM VENT FANS CS]

14 Remote Function MI_IACBLRM1 [UNIT 1 CABLE SPREAD ROOM VENT FANS]

15 Remote Function ED_IARKAIO [X-TIE BKR E$-E7 (AlO) RACK STATUS]

15 Remote Function ED_IARKAX5 [X-TIE BKR E7-E8 (AX5) RACK STATUS]

16 Malfunction RDO17F [CRD FCV FAILS CLOSED]

17 Remote Function RD_VHRD47BL [CRD FCV B ISOLATION VALVE]

17 Remote Function RD_IACRDFVA [CRD FCV A CONTROL]

17 Remote Function RD_IACRDFVB [CRD FCV B CONTROLJ 18 Remote Function RD_VHRD47AL [CRD FCV A ISOLATION VALVE]

19 Trigger Command mfd:dgOO5f Trig # Trigger Text 19 K4G14AB8 [DIESEL GENERATOR AUTO-MODE START]

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 11 of 58 MALFUNCTIONS Maif MUIt CUneflt Thi9t R Description Actime Dactime Trig DGOQ5F DG4 AUTO START FAILURE True True DGO26F DG3 DIFFERENTIAL FAULT False True NBOO7F RX LVLTRANSMIUER C32-NOO4A FAILS 0.00 100.0 00:02:00 1 EEO3OM 2TD INDIVIDUAL BUS FAILURE False True 2 ES02SF RCIC STM BRK SOUTH RHR 0.00 5.0 00:10:00 4 EEO09F LOSS OF OFF-SITE POWER False True 6 ESOO4F ADS VALVE F FAILS OPEN False True 11 CAO2OF SRV F TAIL PIPE RUPTURE False True 00:01:00 12 RDO17F FCV A CRD FCV FAILS CLOSED False True 16 Nl032F APRM 2

[ APRM FAILS LO True True REMOTES Remf Id Mult Id Description CUITeflt TaIOt Actime Trig CC_1ACW4518 2CTBCCW PUMP UNIT ALIGNMENT 1 1 SW_VHSW146L CONV SW TO RBCCW HXS V146 SHUT OPEN 7 SW_IAVSW193 SW-V193 MAN ISOL NSW TO RBCCW OPEN CLOSE 7 RP_IARPSA RESTART RPS MG SET A NORMAL RESET 8 RP_IAEPAMGA RPS M-G SET A EPA BKRS SET SET 00:00:05 8 RP_IARPSB RESTART RPS MG SET B NORMAL RESET 9 RP_IAEPAMGB RPS M-G SET B EPA BKRS SET SET 00:00:05 9 ED_ZIEDHO8 PNL 2AB PWR (E7=NORM/E8=ALT) NORMAL ALT 00:00:30 10 ED_ZIEDH11 PNL 2AB-RX PWR (E7=NORM/E8=ALT) NORMAL ALT 00:02:30 10 ED_ZIEDHXO PNL32AB PWR fE7=NORM/E8=ALT) NORMAL ALT 00:04:30 10 UNIT 1 CB MECHANICAL EQUIP ROOM VENT MI ZVACS918 1 NEUT STOP 13 FANSCS MI_IACBLRM1 UNIT 1 CABLE SPREAD ROOM VENT FANS AUTO OFF 14 ED_IARKAX5 X-TIE BKR E7-E8 (AX5) RACK STATUS OUT IN 00:05:00 15 ED_IARKAIO X-TIE BKR E8-E7 (AlO) RACK STATUS OUT IN 00:02:30 15 RD_VHRD47BL CRD FCV B ISOLATION VALVE CLOSE OPEN 17 RD_IACRDFVA CR0 FCVA CONTROL AUTO MANUAL 00:00:01 17 RD_IACRDFVB CRD FCV B CONTROL MANUAL AUTO 00:00:01 17 RD_VHRD47AL CRD FCV A ISOLATION VALVE OPEN CLOSE 18

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 12 of 58*

PANEL OVERRIDES Tag ID Description Position I Actual Override Actime Dactime Trig K4517A TB CCW PMP B ON OFF OFF ON 5 K4517A TBCCWPMPBON ON ON OFF 5 Q4517LG4 TB CCW PMP B OFF G ON/OFF OFF OFF 5 Q15OBLGJ SRV VLV B21-FO13F GREEN ON/OFF ON OFF 12 Q15O8RRJ SRV VLV B21-FO13F RED ON/OFF OFF OFF 12 015205A9 AMBER LED +5V ON/OFF OFF OFF 12 K5412A STATCOOLANTPMPA AUTO OFF OFF TBCCW DISCHARGE PRESS TOC-G4H11G14 39 80.2739 39 5 K1727A CONTSPRAYVLVCONTROL NORMAL ON OFF K1727A CONTSPRAYVLVCONTROL MANUAL OFF OFF K1727A CONTSPRAYVLVCONTROL RESET OFF OFF K1227A CONTSPRAYVLVCONTROL NORMAL ON OFF K1227A CONTSPRAYVLVCONTROL MANUAL OFF OFF K1227A CONTSPRAYVLVCONTROL RESET OFF OFF ANNUNCIATORS Window Description Override Tagname OVal AVaI Actime Dactime Trig TBCCW PUMP DISCH HEADER PRESS 2-4 ZUA324 ON ON OFF 5

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 13 of]

8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES EVENT 1: Manual Start of CREV Simulator Operator Actions Ensure Monitored Parameters is open and Scenario Based Testing Variables are loaded.

When contacted to secure the Ui CB Mech Equipment Room Vent Fans Initiate Trigger 13 When contacted to stop the Cable Spread Room 1 Vent Fans Initiate Trigger 14 Simulator Operator Role Play Evaluator Notes Plant Response:

Objectives: SRO Directs BOP to manually start CREV BOP Manual Start of CREV RO Monitors the plant Success Path: CREV manually started Event Termination: When directed by the Lead Evaluator, go to Event 2.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 14 of 58 EVENT 1: Manual Start of CREV Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response NOTES SRO Conduct shift turnover shift briefing.

Direct CREV to be started in the area high radiation mode lAW OP-37.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 51 for format)

RO Monitors the plant BOP Manually starts CREV in the area high radiation mode lAW OOP-37, Section 6.1.3.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 15 of]

CONTROL BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM OOP-37 OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 62 Page 16of82 6.1.3 Manual Startup of the Control Building Emergency Recirculation System

1. Confirm the following initial conditions are met:
  • All applicable prerequisites as listed in Section 5.0 are met. - -.
  • The Control Building Emergency Recirculation System has failed to start after an initiation signal or
  • A manual start in accordance with OAOP-05.O, Radioactive Spills. high Radiation, and Airborne Activity, is required

{8.1.1}

or

  • Surveillance or inspection tests are required NOTE
  • Indicatbns for the Control Building Ventilation System are located on Panel XU-3 on both units D
  • Controls for the Mechanical Equipment Room Ventilation Fans and the Control Building Wash Room Exhaust Fan are on XU-3 on Units 1 and 2 0
  • Controls for the Cable Spread Room ventilation fans are on Panel XU-3 for the respective untt 0
2. Perform the following to place the Control Building Emergency Recirculation System in the area high radiation mode (includes Secondary Containment Isolation):

NOTE

  • Placing o of the 2A(B)-ERF-CB (CB tmerg Recirc Fans) in ON will INOP the automatic start function of the non-operating fan 0
  • Controls for the Control Building Emergency Rca reulation Fans are on Panel XU-3 on Unit 2 0
a. Place gj of the 2A(B)-ERF-CB (CB Emerg Recirc Fans) in ON

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 16 of 58 CONTROL BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM OOP-37 OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 62 Page ITofB2 6.f.3 Manual Startup of the Control Building Emergency Recirculation System (continued)

CAUTION Detection of heat in the charcoal bed, detectors 2-FP-CB-4-2U and 2-FP-CB-4-21 for A or detectors 2-FP-CG-4-1 4 and 2-FP-CB-1-1 5 for B. will trip the associated Emergency Recirculation Fan D

b. Confirm 2L-D-CB (Ctl RM Norm Mu Air Dmpr) closes
c. Confirm VA-2J-O-CB (CD Lmerq Recirc Damper) opens
d. Stop 2D-E F-CD (CB Washroom Exhaust Fan) and confirm associated damper closes NOTE The Control Building Mechanical Equipment Room Vent Fans can be stopped only by simultaneously placing both Units control switches in OFF D
e. Simultaneously place both Units control switches in OFF. for 2F-ST-CB and 2E-EF-CB (CD Mechanical Equip Room Vent Fans) to stop the fans and confirm associated supply and exhaust dampers close
f. Stop 2A-SF-CB and 2A-EF-CB (Cable Spread Room 2 Vent Fans) and confirm associated supply and exhaust dampers close
9. Stop lA-SF-CD and lA-Er-CS (Cable Spread Room 1 Vent Fans) and confirm associated supply and exhaust dampers close

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 17o158 CONTROL BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM OOP-31 OPERATING PROCEDURE rCV. b Page 18of82 6.1.3 Manual Startup of the Control Building Emergency Recirculation System (continued)

NOTE The Control Building Emergency Recirculation System is now in operation for high radiation conditions D

3. Perform the following to place the Control Building Emergency Recirculation System in the fire mode:

NOTE Placing one of the 2A(B)-ERF-CB (CB [merg Recirc Fans) in ON will INOP the automatic start function of the non-operating fan D

a. Place one of the 2A(B)-ERF-CB (CB Emerg Recirc Fans) in ON CAUTION Detection of heat in the charcoal bed, detectors 2-FP-CB-4-20 and 2-FP-CB-4-21 for A or detectors 2-FP-CB-4-14 and 2-FP-CB-4-15 for B, will trip the associated Emergency Recirculation Fan C
b. Confirm 2L-D-CB (Ctl RM Norm Mu Air Dmpr) closes
c. Confirm VA-2J-D-CB (CB Emerg Recirc Damper) opens
d. Stop 2D-EF-CB (CB Washroom Exhaust Fan) and confirm associated damper closes NOTE The Control Building Emergency Recirculation System is now in operation for fire conditions C
4. WHEN the initiatng conditions have cleared, THEN place Control Building Ventilation System in operation in accordance with Section 61.4

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 18 of 58 EVENT 2: C32-LT-NOO4A FAILS HIGH Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger I to fail C32-LT-NOO4A upscale.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as TB AC to check UPS Panel VJ0, Ckt #3, acknowledge request, then report no tripped breakers on UPS Panel Vi 0. If asked, the inverters on the trip cabinets are energized.

If contacted as maintenance or I&C to investigate trip, acknowledge request Evaluator Notes Plant Response: C32-LT-NOO4A will fail high. The crew will reference Tech Spec 3.3.2.2 and determine a 7 day LCD exists to place the failed channel in the tripped condition.

The crew should select level B per OP-32.

Objectives: SRO Determine TS LCD for C32-LT-NOO4A failing high RD Transfer DFCS to control to B Success Path: IS LCD 3.3.2.2, Condition A One feedwater and main turbine high water level trip channel inoperable. Required Action A.i Place channel in trip within 7 days.

DFCS Feedwater Level Select transferred to B Event Termination: Go to Event 2A at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOt SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 19 of]

EVENT 2: C32-LT-NOO4A FAILS HIGH Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Acknowledges annunciator report SRO A-07 4-2 FW CTL SYS TROUBLE Contacts l&C to investigate.

May direct FWCS Level control to be selected to Level B.

Determines TS 3.3.2.2 Condition A A.1 Place channel in trip in 7 days.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 51 for format)

Acknowledges and reports annunciator report of RO A-07 4-2 FW CTL SYS TROUBLE Diagnose failure of the C32-NOO4A If directed by the CRS, shifts LEVEL A/B select switch to Position B.

BOP Monitors the plant

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 20 of 58 EVENT 2A: CRD FCV 2A FAILS CLOSED Simulator Operator Actions At the discretion of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 16 to fail CRD FCV 2A closed Transfer FCVs by Initiating Trigger 17 to open CRD FCV B Isol valves, place CRD FCV A Control in Manual, and place CRD FCV B Control in Auto.

Initiate Trigger 18 to close CRD FCV A Isol valves.

Simulator Operator Role Play If asked to investigate the CRD flow controller failure, as the RBAO report that the A FCV is in service but no flow indicated and no apparent cause for the failure is seen.

If asked to check the ROl 8 temperature recorder, report as the RBAO that none of the CRDs indicate an alarm present.

If asked as RBAO to transfer CRD FCV per OP-08 (steps 6.3.3.7a-i, when control room has placed CRD Flow Control to Manual zero output, then after SIM OP has initiated trigger 16 report OP-08 completed up to step 6.3.3.7g. After control room has completed step 6.3.3.7h.

report step 6.3.3.7i is complete.

When requested, isolate CRD FCV A, after trigger 17 initiated report 20P-08 step 6.3.3.13 is complete.

If asked as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The crew will receive CRD charging header pressure high alarm and drive header pressure will be lost. The crew will place the standby CRD flow control valve in service per 20P-08.

Objectives: SRO Direct action to swap CRD Flow Control Valves RO/BOP Performs actions to swap CRD Flow Control Valves.

Success Path: CRD FCV swapped and CRD parameters back to normal.

Event Termination: Go to Event 3 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. ç]

Page 21 of]

EVENT 2A: CRD FCV 2A FAILS CLOSED Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments May direct entry into OAOP-020, Control Rod Misposition/Malfunction, for inability to move SRO control rods Direct standby CRD FCV placed in service lAW OP-08.

Contact l&C to investigate 2A CRD FCV Failure BOP Plant Monitoring.

Diagnose and report failure of CRD FCV RD Enter and announce OAOP-02.0, if directed by the SRO.

Addresses Annunciator:

A-5 2-2, CRD Charging Wtt Press Hi Determines failure of CRD FCV A. and swaps to standby FCV lAW 20P-08, Section 6.3.3, Shifting CRD Flow Control Valves.

Step 6.3.3.6 will have to be noted by the CRS due to the failure of the in service FCV.

Steps 6.3.3.7a-g is performed locally by the AD.

Step 6.3.3.7i is performed locally by the AD.

Step 6.3.3.8 is N/A Step 6.3.3.13 is performed locally by the AD.

Step 6.3.3.14 is N/A

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 22 of 58 CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 20P-08 OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 103 Page 29 of 382 6.3.3 Shifting CR0 Flow Control Valves

1. Ensure the CRD System in operation per Section 6.1.1
2. Station an operator in direct communication with the Control Room at CRD Master Flow Control Station
3. Shift C72-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to GAL
4. Null C 12-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) using manual potentiometer
5. Shift C12-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to MAN
6. Maintain CRD flow rate between 30 and 60 gprn, using manual potentiometer
7. IF desired to shift from 2-C12-FOO2A (CRD Flow Control Valve) to 2-C12-FOO2B fCRD Flow Control Value),

THEN perform the followfng

a. Confirm local 2-C12-FK-D00SB (CRD Flow Control Valve Controller) in MAN
b. Ensure local 2-C 1 2-FK-D0096 (CRD Flow Control Valve Controller) manual potentiometer at minimum
c. Open 2-C12-F046B <Flow Control Valve 26 Inlet Isolation Valve) I IV d Open 2-C12-F047B (Flow Control Valve 28 Outlet Isolation Valve) _I IV
e. Null local 2-C12-FK-DOO9A (CRD Flow Control Valve Controller) using manual potentiometer
f. Shift local 2-C12-FK-DOO9A (CR0 Flow Control Valve Controller) to MAN

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page 23 of 58 CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 20P-08 OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev 103 Page 30 of 382 6.3.3 Shifting CRD Flow Control Valves (continued)

NOTE Two handed operation is allowed in the following step D

g. WHILE maintaining CRD flow rate in normal band, simultaneously, slowly open 2-Cl 2-FOO2B (CRD flow Control Valve) and close 2-C12-FOO2A (CR0 Flow Control Valve) using manual potentiometers on 2-Cl 2-FK-DOO9B and 2-C12-FK-DOO9A (CR0 Flow Control Valve Controllers)
h. WHEN 2-C12-FOO2A(CRD Flow Control Valve) is CLOSED AND 2-Cl 2-FOO2B (CRD Flow Control Valve) is controlling CRD flow rate, THEN at the RTGB null 2-C12-FK-0009B (CRD Flow Controller) using manual potentiometer on C 12-FC-R600 (CR0 Flow Control)
i. Shift local 2-C12-FK-D0098 (CRD Flow Controller) to AUTO.
8. IF desired to shift from 2-C12-F0028 (CR0 flow Control Valve) to 2-C12-FOO2A (CRD Flow Control Valve),

THEN perform the following

a. Confirm local 2-C 12-FK-DOQ9A (CR0 Flow Control Valve Controller) in MAN
b. Ensure local 2-C12-FK-DOO9A (CRD Flow Control Valve Controller) manual potentiometer is at minimum
c. Open 2-C 12-F046A (Flow Control Valve 2A Inlet Isolation Valve) I IV
d. Open 2-C12-F037A (Flow Control Valve 2A Outlet Isolation Valve)

IV

e. Null local 2-C12-FK-0009B (CRD Flow Control Valve Controller) using manual potentiometer
t. Shift local 2-C12-FK-DOO9B (CRD How Control Valve Controller) to MAN

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 24 of 58 CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 2OP-08 OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev 103 Page 31 of 382 6.3.3 Shifting CRD Flow Control Valves (continued)

NOTE Two handed operation is allowed in the following step 0

g. WHILE maintaining CRD flow rate in normal band, simultaneously, slowly open 2-C12-FOO2A (CRD Flow Control Valve) and close 2-Cl 2-F0025 (CRD Flow Control Valve) using manual potentiometers on 2-Cl 2-FK-DOO9A and 2-C12-FK-DOO9B (CRD Flow Control Valve Controllers).
h. WHEN 2-C 12-F0026 (CRD Flow Control Valve) is CLOSED AND 2-C12-FOO2A fCRD Flow Control Valve) is controlling CRD flow rate, THEN null 2-C12-FK-DOO9B (CRD Flow Controller) using manual potentiometer on C12-FC-R600 (CRD Row Control)

L Shift local 2-Cl 2-FK-DOO9A (CRD Flow Controller) to AUTO.

9. Null C12-FC-R600 fORD Flow Control) using setpoint tape
10. Shift Cl2-FC-R600(CRD Flow Control) to AUTO NOTE If reactor vessel temperature is less than 250F, then cooling water differential pressure may be less than 10 psid 0 Ii. Adjust setpoint tape on Ct 2-FC-R600 (CRD Flow Control) to maintain cooling water differential pressure between 10 and 26 psid.
12. Ensure CRD flow rate is between 30 and 60 gpm
13. j2-Cl2-F002B (CRD Flow Control Valve) was placed in seMce per Step 7, THEN perform the following
a. Close 2-C12-F046A (Flow Control Valve 2A Inlet Isolation Valve)

IV

b. Close 2-C12-F037A (Flow Control Valve 2A Outlet Isolation Valve) I IV

, 2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page 25 of 58 CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 2CR-Os OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 103 Page 32 of 382 6.3.3 Shifting CRD Flow Control Valves (continued) 14 IF 2-Cl 2-FOQ2A (CRD Flow Control Valve) was placed in service per Step 8, THEN perform the following

a. Close 2-C12-F046B (Flow Control Valve 2B Inlet Isolation Valve)

IV b Close 2-C12-FO4ZB (Flow Control Valve 2B) Outlet Isolation Valve) _!__

IV

15. Monitor operation of CRD System per Attachment 1 Daterflme Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRS/SRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page 26 of 5]

CONTROL ROD DRIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM I 20P-08 I OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 1031 Page 172 of 382 ATTACHMENT 1 Page 1 of 1

<< Normal System Operation Parameters>>

INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION PARAMETERS Panel P603

. 30 to 60 gpm Uunng normal power operations C12-FC-R600 CRD Flow Rate

  • up to 199 gpm (max flow) during various other applications, such as vessel fill, accumulator charging, etc.

260 psid (260 to 275)

(20P-07. Reactor Manual Control System Operating Cf 2-PDI-R602 Drive Press Procedure, alkrws reducing dp to a minimum of 180 psid tien moving control rods with a history of double notching.)

  • 10 to 26 psid C12-PDI-R603 Cooling Pressure
  • 0 to 26 psid if reactor vessel temperature is less than_260F Less than or equal to 1500 psig C12-PI-R601 Charging Pressure (Section 3.0 PrecautiOn and Umitation 11)

Approximately 0 gpm (flow rate < 50 gpm during rod Cl 2-Fl-R604 Drive Flow movement)

Cl2-FI-R605 Cooling Flow 30 to 60 gpm (flow rates greater than 50 gpm must be obtained from C12-FC-R600 on Panel P603)

H21-PO0?

CRD Temperature 2-C12-TR-R018 Less than 2S0F Control Panel H21-P007 Radwaste Bldg -23 ft EIev Northwest I 2-CO-PCV-4 105 Outlet 2-CO-Pl-4 106 Pressure l5to35psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 27 of 58 EVENT 3: RCIC STEAM LEAK Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 4 to initiate a RCIC steam leak.

(Increase as necessary to have room temperatures slowly rising until system is isolated)

Simulator Operator Role Play After the initial alarms for the steam leak are received, report as RB AO steam is blowing out of the -17 foot in South RHR room and you are leaving the building.

If contacted as l&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

If contacted to close 2-FP-P1V33, Unit 2 Reactor Building Sprinkler Shutoff Valve, wait three minutes and report that the valve is closed.

If contacted as HPs, acknowledge any request.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: A break in the RCIC steam line in the south RHR room will occur. The break can be isolated. If the system is delayed from being isolated, observe temperatures in the Reactor Building (specifically South RHR Room temperature), before any area exceeds MSOTL, a Reactor Manual Scram should be inserted. The RCIC system should be declared inoperable and Tech Specs entered.

Objectives: SRO - Determine RCIC should be isolated and actions required for LCO per Technical Specifications RO - Respond to an isolable RCIC steam line break.

Success Path: Evaluate Tech Specs to determine required actions as outlined in SRO actions below.

Event Termination: Go to Event 4 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 28 of 5]

EVENT 3: RCIC STEAM LEAK Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Diagnose RCIC leak and direct RCIC isolation CRITICAL TASK #3 May direct entry into OAOP-05.O May direct reactor building evacuated Contact maintenance about the RCIC steam leak Refers to Tech Spec 3.5.3 RCIC System and determines:

CONDITION A. RCIC System inoperable.

REQUIRED ACTION:

A.1 Verify by administrative means HPCI System is OPERABLE.

Immediately AND A.2. Restore RCIC System to OPERABLE status.

14 days May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 51 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 29 of 58 EVENT 3: RCIC STEAM LEAK Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Respond to alarms:

UA-03 3-5, PROCESS RX BLDG VENT RAD RO HI-HI UA-03 2-7, AREA RAD RX BLDG HIGH UA-05 6-10, RX BLDG ISOLATED Diagnose RCIC steam line leak Isolate RCIC by closing either isolation CRITICAL TASK #3 valve:

E51-F007 (Steam Supply Inboard Isol Vlv) and/or E51-F008 (Steam Supply Outboard Isol VIv)

May reference procedure 20P-16, Section 6.3.4. (see page 30)

BOP Monitors the plant.

May announce and enter AOP-05 May direct AO to close 2-FP-PIV33

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 30 of 58 REACTOR CORE ISOLATION COOLING SYSTEPV 20P-16 OPERATING PROCEDURE Rev. 120 Page 37 of 99 6.3.4 Isolating the RCIC System Steam Supply

1. Confirm afl applicable prerequisites listed in Section 5.0 are
2. IF rapid isolation of RCIC steam line is desired.

THEN perform the following:.., ......

a. Close E51-F00? (Steam Supply Inboard Isol Vlv)...............
b. Close L51-F008 (Steam Supply Outboard Isol Vlv)

CAUTION Opening the E51-C045 (Turbine Steam Supply Vlv) to do-pressurize the RCIC steam line will roll the RCIC turbine D

3. IE rapid isolation is t.4I desired, THEN perform the following to isolate and do-pressurize the RCIC steam supply line:
a. Close E51-F007 (Steam Supply Inboard lsol Vlv)
b. Open MVD-V5002 (HPCI/RCIC Cond Dm Line Back Press Onfice Bypass Valve)
c. Open [51-F045 (Turbine Steam Supply Vlv) and monitor turbine response U. Close E51-F025 (Supply Drain Pot InbU Drain Vlv)
e. Close E51-F026 (Supply Drain Pot OthU Drain Vlv) ..
f. WHEN RCIC steam line has been dc-pressurized for approximately 2 minutes.

THEN close E51.00$ (Steam Supply Outboard lsol Vlv)

g. Close E51-F045 (Turbine Steam Supply Vlv)
h. Close MVD-V5002 (HPCIIRCIC Cond Drn Line Back Press Orifice Bypass Valve)

IV

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page 31 of5]

REACTOR CORE ISOLATION COOLING SYSTEM 20P-16 OPERATtNG PROCEDURE Rev. 120 Page 36 of 99 6.3.4 Isolating the RCIC System Steam Supply (continued)

NOTE

  • Technical Specification 3.61 6.1 (MODES 1, 2. or 3) requires completion of OPT-02.3.1 B, Suppression Pool to Drwell Vacuum Breaker Position Check, within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> after any discharge of steam to the suppression chamber from any source and within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> following an operation that causes any of the vacuum breakers to open C
  • Section 6.3.4 Step 3i ensures compliance viUi Technical Specifications and may be completed as required during the performance of the procedure C I. IF in MODES 1. 2,or3.

THEN ensure OPT-023,f B. Suppression Pool to Dtywell Vacuum Breaker Position Check, is completed within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> after any discharge of steam to the suppression chamber from any source. {8.1.7}

Date/Time Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By Unit CRSSRO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 32 of 58 EVENT 415: ICC PUMP B TRIP I POWER REDUCTION Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 5 to trip the 2B ICC Pump.

When power is reduced change TCC pressure override to current value and activate over one minute then delete annunciator override, when pressure is at current value delete override.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the TB AO, wait one minute and report that 2B ICC pump is hot to the touch and the breaker is tripped (magnetic).

If contacted as Unit One CRS, report Unit One is using the 2C TCC Pump and cannot be released to Unit Iwo operation If contacted as l&C to investigate 2B TCC Pump, acknowledge request.

If contacted as Unit One to start the 1 D air compressor, report ID Air Compressor is running.

If contacted as RE for power reduction or Reactivity Plan, ask the CRS what their recommendation is, then concur with that recommendation.

If contacted as chemistry acknowledge request for sample due to a 15% power change.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: IBCCW Pump 2B will trip and TBCCW low header pressure will alarm. The crew will respond per OAOP-17.0. With 2C IBCCW Pump supplying Unit 1, a power reduction will be required. TBCCW pressure will recover and actions for partial loss of TBCCW will be performed.

Objectives: SRO Direct entry into OAOP-17.0 RO Power reduction with Recirc flow and restoration of ICC pressure Perform actions for a partial loss of ICC.

Success Path: ICC pressures restored to normal with reactor power reduced to the recirc flow limit.

Event Termination: Go to Event 6 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 33 of 5]

EVENT 4/5: TCC PUMP B TRIP I POWER REDUCTION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Acknowledge report of annunciator UA-03 2-4 TBCC W PUMP DISCH HEADER SRO PRESS LOW Direct entry into OAOP-17.O, Turbine Building Closed Cooling Water System Failure.

Direct power reduction lAW OENP-24.5 May direct a Manual Runback or provide a power level to reduce power to using recirc flow.

Directs l&C to investigate loss of 2B ICC pump.

Acknowledge report of annunciator A-03 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED Contact chemistry to sample coolant because of the power reduction (>15%)

Briefs crew on reactor scram if TCC pressure is not restored above 42 psig within 4 minutes of reaching 47M Ibm/hr.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 51 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 34 of 58 EVENT 415: ICC PUMP B TRIP I POWER REDUCTION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments RD Plant Monitoring.

Reduces reactor power as directed by CRS with Recirc Flow.

May use the Manual Runback for flow (see page 39)

Acknowledge and report annunciator A-03 4-8 OPRM TRIP ENABLED Acknowledge and Report annunciator HOP UA-03 2-4 TBCC W PUMP DISCH HEADER PRESS LOW Diagnose loss of 2B TCC Pump.

Announce and enter OAOP-17.0, Turbine Building Closed Cooling Water System Failure.

(see page 30)

Performs step 4.2.3 (page 35)

Performs Step 4.2.6 (page 36)

Report annunciator UA-03 2-4 TBCC W PUMP DISCH HEADER PRESS LOW clear.

. 2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 35 of 58 TURBINE BUILDING CLOSED COOUNG WATER OAOP-17.O SYSTEM FAILURE Rev. 033 Page6of 16 4.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

NOTE TBCCW pump power supplies are as follows C

  • TBCCW Pump 1A, MCC 1TJ
  • TBCCW Pump 18, MCC 1TM
  • TBCCvV Pump 2A, MCC 2TJ
  • TBCCW Pump 28, MCC 2Th1
  • TBCCW Pump 2C, MCC 2TH, with an automatic transfer switch to select MCC iTh as the power supply on loss of power to 2TH NOTE In accordance with OAP-01 3, Plant Equipment Control, tripped breakers (thermally or magnetically) should tQI be reset except in an emergency situation until an evaluation of the circuit condition has been performed. Breakers that have tripped thermally may be reset as deemed necessary by the Unit CRS for continued reliable operation of the plant C
b. IF TBCCW pump breakers local thermal or magnetic trips have activated, THEN perform the following:
1) Initiate a WO for evaluation of the affected circuit C (2) WHEN directed by the Unit CRS, THEN reset tripped breakers C
3. IF only one TBCCW pump is in service AND TBCCW pressure is less than 42 psig, THEN perform the following:
a. Reduce reactor power with reclrc flow in accordance with OENP-24.5, Form 2, Immediate Reactor Power Reduction Instructions C
b. ffl TBCCW pressure is greater than 42 psig within 4 minutes, THEN perform Section 4 2 Step 6, on page 7 C
c. IF TBCCW pressure is NOT greater than 42 psig within 4 minutes, THEN perform Section 4.2 Step 7, on page 9 C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 36 of 58 TURBINE BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER OAOP-17.0 SYSTEM FAILURE Rev. 033 Page 7 ot 16 42 Supplementary Actions (continued)

4. IF a TBCCW system leak is suspected.

THEN:

a Monitor TBCCW Head Tank level I]

b. Maintain TBCCW Head Tank level in accordance with 20P-44, Turbine Building Closed Cooling Water System Operating Procedure D
c. Check system piping to locate leakage D U. Isolate any leakage found D
e. Monitor temperatures on equipment cooled by TBCCW C
5. if TBCCW heat exchanger outlet temperature is greater than 1 1ODF

.QR component temperatures are nsing, THEN reduce reactor power as necessary to reduce TBCCW temperature C NOTE A partial loss of TBCCW or service water is defined as reduced cooling available with the expectation that normal cooling can be quickly re-established C

6. IF there is a partial loss of TBCCW or service water, THEN perform the following:

a Ensure all available TBCCW pumps are operating 0 NOTE High temperature indications on equipment cooled by TBCCW in conjunction with CSW header pressure approaching 90 psig are indications of a Conventional Service Water System failure. {7.1.J} C

b. IF a failure of CSW is indicated, THEN enter OAOP-i 9.0, Conventional Service Water System Failure, A perform concurrently with this procedure C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 37 of 5]

TURBINE BUILDING CLOSED COOlING WATER OAOP- 17.0 SYSTEM FAILURE Rev 033 Page 80116 4.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

c. Reduce system heat load by removing the following loads as plant conditions permit:

(1) Out-of-service equipment D (2) Sample coolers D (3) Bus-duct cooling C NOTE

  • If only the main or standby compressor is operating on the unaffected unit and the idle compressor is available, there should be sufficient compressed air capacity to support air demand C
  • SeMce Air Compressors 18 and 28 are tIQI designed to individually carry the full system demand of both units vtien the cross tie valves ate open C
d. IF air pressure can NOT be maintained, THEN enter OAOP-20.O, Pneumatic (Air/Nitrogen) System Failures AND perform concurrently with this procedure C
e. IE Unit 1 and Unit 2 Service Air Systems are cross-tied, THEN:

(1) Ensure the unaffected units air compressors have sufficient capacity to support air demand C (2) Ensure the unaffected units Service Air Compressor 0 is operating C

f. i Unit I and Unit 2 Service Air Systems are .I cross-tied AND it is possible to cross-tie, THEN:

NOTE If only the main or standby compressor is operating on the unaffected unit and the idle compressor is available, there should be sufficient compressed air capacity to support air demand C Service Air Compressors 1 B and 28 are iQI designed to individually carry the full system demand of both units ten the cross tie valves are open C (1) Obtain permission trom the unaffected units CRS to cross-tie the Service Air Systems C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 38 of 58 TURBINE BUILDING CLOSED COOLING WATER OAOP-i7.0 SYSTEM FAILURE Rev. 033 Page 9 of 16 4.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

(2) Ensure 2-sA-Pv-507; (Cross-Tie Valve) on Unit 2 Panel XU-2, is OPEN D (3) Ensure 1-SA-PV-5071 (Cross-Tie Valve) on Unit 1 Panel XU-2, is OPEN 0 (4) ffl the uninvolved units air systems are adversely affected, THEN perform the following at the direction of the Unit CRS or Reactor Operator:

. if Service Air Dryer 1 B is in standby, OR in service on Unit 1.

THEN close 2-SA-PV-5071 (Cross-Tie Valve),

using the control switch located on Unit 2 Panel XU-2 0 OR

  • IF Service Air Dryer lB is in service on Unit 2, THEN close 1-SA-PV-5071 (Cross Tie Valve).

using the control switch located on Unit 1 Panel XU-2 0 g Trip the affected units air compressors 0 NOTE A total loss or TBCCW is defined as system pressure less than 42 psig with all available pumps operating and expectations are that normal cooling can .I be quickly re-established 0

7. IF there has been a total loss or TBCCW.

THEN:

a Insert a manual scram 0

b. Enter IEOP-O1-RSP(2EOP-Oi-RSP), Reactor Scram Procedure AND perform concurrently with this procedure ...... C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 39 of 58 REACTOR RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-02 PROCEDURE Rev. 168 Page 94 of 250 6.3.16 Initiation Of A Manual Runback NOTE The Man Runback feature is enabled only when both Recirc Pumps are operating at greater than 54.8% speed D BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

1. Confirm the following Initial Conditions are met:
  • Manual Runback Enabled white light on Panel P603 is ON
  • Immediate power reduction is required, which reduces total core flow to 47 mlbThr, or
  • The Unit CRS directs initiation ot a Manual Runback NOTE A Manual Runback lowers both Recirc Pump speeds at 100 rpm/second to 53.6%

speed, which results in approximately 4ZmIblhr core flow. The Manual Runback can be reset by depressing the Man Runback pushbutton a second time I]

2. Depress the Man Runback pushbutton
3. Confirm the following.
a. Both Recirc Pump speeds are lowering
b. The Manual Runback Enabled light is flashing
c. 2-A-06, 3-2 (2-A-07, 2-4). Recirc Flow AtE) Limit, annunciator isON d Resultant Core Flow is approxtmatetv 47 rnlbfhr, unless manually RESET END R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
4. Go to 2AOP-04.0, Low Core Flow

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 40 of 58 EVENT 6: MCC 210 LOSS I STATOR COOLING STANDBY PUMP FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 2 to trip the feeder breaker to MCC 2TD.

If requested to place the I D Air Compressor in lead Activate Remote AI_2DLEAD, DELTA SA-CS-7892 (LEAD/LAG SWITCH) to I D LEAD, 2D LAG Simulator Operator Role Play When asked as the TB AO to investigate the 2F feeder breaker trip, report a trip of the feeder breaker to MCC 2TD, (ATO) on 480V Substation 2F is tripped with the white overcurrent indicating flag protruding from the breaker.

If asked as I&C to investigate, acknowledge any requests for MCC trip / Auto start failure.

If asked do not recommend re-energizing 2TD until an investigation can be completed.

If asked to investigate/acknowledge the 2B REP alarm, acknowledge the local panel alarm and report that the alarm on the local panel is HPU Pump 2 Running in Stby. If asked the standby pump is operating with no problems noted.

If dispatched to verify proper operation of the standby Stator Water Cooling Water Pump or the 2B air compressor, report no problems with the operation of the pump/compressor are noted.

If contacted as Ui, report that the 1 D air compressor is running as lag compressor. If asked to place the 1 D Air Compressor in lead, after SIM OP activates remote, report ID air compressor has been placed in lead.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The crew will respond to a trip of MCC 2TD with the standby stator cooling water pump failure to auto start. The standby stator cooling water pump can be manually started. The 2D air compressor will also be lost (loss of controls) and OAOP-20.0, Pneumatic (Air/Nitrogen) System Failures, may be entered.

Objectives: SRO - Direct the standby Stator Cooling Water pump to be started.

RO Start the standby Stator Water Cooling pump identify 2D air compressor failure.

Success Path: Standby Stator Cooling Water Pump started and actions of OAOP-20.0 Pneumatic (Air/Nitrogen) System Failures, addressed.

Event Termination: Go to Event 7 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 41 of 58 EVENT 6: MCC 2TD LOSS I STATOR COOLING STANDBY PUMP FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Acknowledges report of alarms received/cleared SRO for the BOP/RO.

Directs BOP operator to start the standby stator water cooling pump.

May ask for l&C to investigate

1) The trip of the feeder breaker to 2TD
2) The failure of the standby Stator Water Cooling pump to auto-start.

May direct entry into OAOP-20.O, Pneumatic (Air/Nitrogen) System Failures,.

May review the load list for MCC 2TD fOOl 50.11).

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 51 for format)

AIC Monitors the plant.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 42 of 58 EVENT 6: MCC 2TD LOSS I STATOR COOLING STANDBY PUMP FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Report alarms to the CRS.

UA-6, 2-5 Sub 2F 480V Feeder Bkr Trip UA-13, 6-6 REP B Control Trouble BOP UA-2, 1-8 Stat coolant Inlet Flow-Low UA-2, 1-9 Loss of Stat Coolant Trip Ckt Ener UA-2, 2-8 Stat Coolant Press-Low UA-2, 6-9 Exciter Coolant Flow-Low Start the standby Stator Water Cooling Pump.

UA-2, 4-9 Stator Cool Reserve Pump Running will annunciate on starting of the standby pump and then will clear when the 2B pump is placed in off.

Dispatch an AC to investigate the Sub 2F Feeder Breaker Trip.

May dispatch an AC to verify proper operation of the Stator Water Cooling pump that was started.

May Dispatch an AD to investigate the alarm on the 2B RFP.

May enter and announce OAOP-20.0, Pneumatic (Air/Nitrogen) System Failures, for the trip of 2D Air Compressor.

May ask Unit One to place the 1 D Air Compressor in the lead position.

May place the 2D NC in Stop.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 43 of 58 EVENT 7: LOOP I SCRAM I DG FAILURES Simulator Operator Actions At the discretion of the lead evaluator, Initiate Trigger 6 to active the LOOP.

Acknowledge and silence Fireworks alarms Acknowledge Unit 1 alarms as needed.

If directed to align RBCCW to CSW cooling, wait 4 minutes and Initiate Trigger 7.

If directed to restart RPS MG sets, wait 3 minutes and insert the following as requested: For RPS A Initiate Trigger 8 and/or for RPS B Initiate Trigger 9.

If directed to swap AB panels Initiate Trigger 10 and inform Sim Role Player when timed out.

If directed to rack in 480V cross-tie breakers Initiate Trigger 15 Simulator Operator Role Play If requested to monitor DGs, acknowledge alarms on DG local Alarm Panel (Instructor Aids/Panels) and report alarms if requested If directed to align RBCCW to CSW cooling, wait 4 minutes and inform Sim Operator to align RBCCW to CSW cooling then report valve open.

If directed to restart RPS MG sets, wait 3 minutes and inform Sim Operator to restart RPS then report actions complete.

If directed as RBAO to ensure BFIV latching mechanisms are disengaged, wait two minutes, then report latches are disengaged.

If requested to transfer 2AB, 32AB, 2AB-RX, acknowledge request, inform Sim operator and when the remotes are timed out inform the control room the action is complete.

If directed to cross-tie 480V after remote timers time out report breakers racked in.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The crew will respond to a Loss of Offsite Power. The reactor will scram on MSIV closure on the LOOP. DG 4 will fail to auto start on the LOOP signal. DG3 will trip on Dill 0/C. The BOP operator will start DG 4 to energize Bus E4.

Objectives: SRO Direct actions of AOP-36.1 RO Start DG4. Perform scram immediate operator actions.

Success Path: Scram immediate operator actions are complete and E4 energized.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 44 of 58 EVENT 7: LOOP I SCRAM I DG FAILURES Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct AOP-36.1 entry.

Direct DG4 started. CRITICAL TASK #1 Contacts Maintenance for failure of DG3 and failure of DG4 to auto start.

Enters and directs actions of RVCP:

D Direct control of reactor pressure using SRVs (establishes pressure band 800 1000 psig)

Direct water level band of 170 200 inches Enters and directs actions of PCCP:

J Monitor and control Suppression Pool temperature below 95 deg F.

Direct starting available RHR Loops in Suppression pool Cooling as necessary to maintain temp below 95 F.

D Monitor HCTL Direct operation of available drywell coolers D Verify RCC operation and alignment to the drywell

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 45 of 58 EVENT 7: LOOP I SCRAM I DG FAILURES Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Unit 2 SCRAM Immediate Actions

1. Ensure SCRAM valves OPEN by manual SCRAM orARl initiation.
2. WHEN steam flow less than 3.0 MIb/hr, THEN place reactor mode switch in SHUTDOWN.
3. IF reactor power below 2% (APRM downscale trip), THEN trip main turbine.

ATC

4. Ensure master RPV level controller setpoint at +170 inches.
5. IF Two reactor feed pumps running AND
  • RPV level above +160 inches AND
  • RPV level rising, THEN trip one.

Commui*ate scram report to CRS Place SULCV in service (See Enclosure 4 page 55)

Insert Nuclear Instrumentation Ensure Turbine Oil System Operating Ensure Reactor Recirculation Pumps at 34%

Ensure Heater Drain Pumps tripped Maintain reactor water level between 170 200 inches Place RHR Loops in Suppression pooi Cooling as necessary (see Enclosure 3 page 53)

Control reactor pressure 800 1000 psig

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 46 of 5]

EVENT 7: LOOP! SCRAM I DG FAILURES Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Diagnose failure of DG4 BOP Start DG4 CRITICAL TASK #1 Diagnose and report to the SRO DG3 tripped and Locked out.

Perform the following OAOP-36.1 actions:

Dispatch AC to monitor DGs Momentarily place DIV I NON-INTRPT RNA, SV-5262 control switch to OVERRIDE/RESET, then to OPEN, and ensure DIV I NON-INTRPT RNA, SV-5262 opens.

May start the CRD system in accordance with OP-08, Section 8.17, or it may be started lAW SEP-09.

Ensure the associated NSW and CSW pumps are operating.

Direct an AO to swap the AB panels to their alternate source.

Ensure 125V and 24V DC battery chargers return to service for each energized 480V E Bus.

Perform the following to transfer RBCCW HXs from the NSW header to the CSW header:

LJ Confirm CSW system available.

Ensure at least one of the following is closed:

D RBCCW HX SERVICE WATER INLET VALVE,SW-V1 03 RBCCW HX SERVICE WATER INLET VALVE, SW-V106 E1 Direct an AC to open CONVENTIONAL HEADER TO RBCCW HEAT EXCHANGERS SUPPLY VALVE,SW V146.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 47 of 58 EVENT 7: LOOP I SCRAM I OG FAILURES lime Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Continue OAOP-36.1 actions:

Ensure Control Building Ventilation started on the affected unit:

Perform the following to restore drywell cooling:

If three RBCCW pumps are running, then STOP one RBCCW pump, and place its control switch in AUTO.

If only one RBCCW pump is running, then START a second pump, if available.

lJ If no RBCCW pump is running, then place all RBCCW pump control switches in OFF, and perform one of the following:

IF any local drywell temperature is currently greater than the starting temperature limit OR has exceed the starting temperature limit since the initiation of the event, then perform 20P-21, Section 8.6.

IF all local drywell temperatures have remained less than the starting temperature limit since the initiation of the event, then perform 20P-21, Section 5.2.

ENSURE all available drywell coolers on the affected unit are operating.

IF HPCI is running with suction from the CST AND CST level indication is NOT available in the Control Room or Radwaste, then monitor CST level locally and report level every hour.

Start RPS MG Sets A(B) in accordance with OP 03, Section 5.2 May direct for 480V busses to be cross-tied.

(E8 to E7).

Closes breakers after they are racked in by the AD.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 48 of 58 EVENT 7: LOOP I SCRAM I DG FAILURES Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments BOP Continue OAOP-36.1 actions:

Perform the following to start the Reactor Building HVAC:

D If PROCESS OG VENT PIPE RAD HI-HI (UA-03, 5-4) is in alarm, and is NOT the result of a valid high radiation signal, then place CAC PURGE VENT ISOL OVRD, CAC-CS-5519, in OVERRIDE Reset the following Reactor Building Ventilation Radiation Monitors on Panel H12-P606:

1 PROCESS REACTOR BLDG VENTILATION RADIATION MONITOR A, D12-RM-K609A PROCESS REACTOR BLDG VENTILATION RADIATION MONITOR B, D12-RM-K609B.

Depress the following Isolation Reset Groups push buttons:

D ISOLATION RESET GROUPS 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, A71-S32 ISOLATION RESET GROUPS 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, A71-S33.

Ensure Instrument Air header pressure is greater than 95 psig.

Ensure BFIV latching mechanisms are disengaged. (Local).

D Open RB VENT INBD ISOL VALVES, A BFI V-RB and C-BFIV-RB.

D Open RB VENT OTBD ISOL VALVES, B BFI V-RB and D-BFIV-RB.

Start three sets of Reactor Building Ventilation Fans in accordance with OP-37.1, Section 8.8 to maintain Reactor Building static pressure negative.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 49 of 58 EVENT 8: SRV FAILURE ITAILPIPE BREAK I ED PSP I TERMINATION Simulator Operator Actions Initiate Trigger 11, to fail the SRV (before reactor pressure lowers below 565 psig).

When contacted to pull SRV F fuses Initiate Trigger 12. (this also fails the downcomer)

When directed by the Lead Evaluator, place the simulator in FREEZE DO NOT RESET THE SIMULATOR PRIOR TO RECEIPT OF CONCURRENCE TO DO SO FROM THE LEAD EXAMINER Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted to pull fuses for SRV F lAW AOP-30.0, wait 2 minutes have SIM OP Initiate Trigger 12 and report that the Fuses for SRV F have been pulled.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: An SRV will fail open and then the tailpipe will break causing a violation of PSP requiring the plant to be emergency depressurized.

Objectives: SRO - Directs actions for Emergency Depressurization.

RO Perform Emergency depressurization.

Success Path: Emergency depressurization performed.

Scenario Termination: When emergency depressurization has been performed and RPV pressure is less than 100 psig, the scenario may be terminated.

Remind students not to erase any charts and not to discuss the scenario until told to do so by the evaluatorlinstructor.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 50 of 58 EVENT 8: SRV FAILURE ITAILPIPE BREAK I ED PSP I TERMINATION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Directs announcement of OAOP-30.0.

Direct level maintained 170 200 inches.

Directs Emergency Depressurization when CRITICAL TASK #2 PSP is violated. (see Enclosure 2 on page 52)

ATC Maintains level as directed by the CRS.

Maintains reactor pressure as determined by the CRS.

Informs CRS of SRV F failure to close.

Announces and enters OAOP-30.0.

Attempts to cycle control switch for stuck open SRV.

Directs WCCSRO to pull fuses for SRV F Performs Emergency Depressurization when CRITICAL TASK #2 directed by the CRS.

Controls RPV Injection as reactor pressure lowers.

Defeat Group 10 isolation.

D Open 7 ADS Valves.

Continues OAOP-36.1 actions.

BOP (see actions in event 7)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 51 of]

ENCLOSURE 1 Page 1 of I CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS AD-OP-ALL-bOO Rev. 6 Page 90 of 90 AUACHMENT 8 Page 1 of 1

<< CrQw BrIQf TamplatQ>>

5.gln BrIt C] Announce Crew Briet C] All crew members ackno1edge announcement (A R,qulr.d)

C] Update the crew as needed:

C Describe what happened and major actions taken C Procedures injxogress C Notitcations.

Recap C Maintenance C Engineering C] Others (Dispatcher, Station Management, etc.)

C Future Direction and priorities C Discuss any contingency plans (A RequIred)

C Solicit questions/concerns from each crew member:

CROs Input C CR5 C] STA C Are there any alarms unexpected for the plant conditions?

C What is the status of Critical Parameters?

(A Required)

EAL C Provide EAL and potential escalation criteria Flnlh BrIef C Restore normal alarm announcement? (Yes/No)

C Announce WEnd of Brief

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 52 of 58 ENCLOSURE 2 Page 1 of I

<<Pressure Suppression Pressure>>

+2

+1 0

I I * -

-J

-- LSAFE:_

-2 w

w -3

-J I (I)

-4 UNSAFE::

0 -5

-6

-8 0 10 20 30 40 TORUS PRESSURE (PSIG)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 53 of 58 ENCLOSURE 3 Page 1 of 2

<<Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop A (20P-f 7)>>

NOTE This attachment is not to be used for normal system operations C Start RHR SW A LOOP (CON!) Start RHR SW A LOOP (NUC)

Open SW-Viol C Open SW-V105 C Close SW-V143 C Open SW-V102 C Start CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED C Close SW-V143 C IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, Start PUMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED C THEN place RHR SW BOOSTER IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, PUMPS A & C LOCA OVERRIDE THEN place RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE C A & C LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE C Start RHR SW PMP C Start RHR SW PMP C Adjust El i-PDV-F068A C Adjust El i-PDV-F068A C Establish CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR C Establish CLG WTR TO VITAL HDR C Start ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP Start ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP and adjust FLOW AS NEEDED C and adjust FLOW AS NEEDED C Start RHR LOOP A IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, THEN C Verify COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP IF El l-FOI5A IS OPEN, THEN close El l-FO77A C Start LOOP A RHR PMP C Open Ell-E028A C Throttle El 1-F024A C Throttle Ell-F048A C Start ADDITIONAL LOOP A RHR PI.iP and adjust FLOW AS NEEDED C 2 2)1061 2 S/i 062

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 54 of 58 ENCLOSURE 3 Page 2 of 2

<<Emergency Suppression Pool Cooling Using Loop B (20P-17)>>

NOTE This attachment is not to be used for normal system operations a Start RHR SW B LOOP fNUC) Start RHR SW B LOOP tCONV)

Open SW-V105 a Open SW-Viol a Close SW-V143 a Open SW-V102 a Start CSW PUMPS AS NEEDED a Close SW-V143 a IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, Start PUMPS ON NSW HDR AS NEEDED a THEN place RHR SW BOOSTER IF LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, PUMPS B & D LOCA OVERRIDE THEN place RHR SW BOOSTER PUMPS SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE 0 B & D LOCA OVERRIDE SWITCH TO MANUAL OVERRIDE a StartRHRSWPMP a Start RHR SW PMP a Adjust E11-PDV-F068B a Adjust El i-PDV-F068B a Establish CLG WTR TO VFtAL HDR a Establish CLG WIR TO VITAL HDR a Start ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP Start ADDITIONAL RHR SW PUMP and adjust FLOW AS NEEDED 0 and adjust FLOW AS NEEDED a Start RHR LOOP B ffl LOCA SIGNAL IS PRESENT, THEN a Verify COOLING LOGIC IS MADE UP jfEll-FO15B IS OPEN, THEN close Eli-FO 176 a Start LOOP B RHR PMP a Open El l-F028B a Throttle El 1-F024B a Throttle El 1-F048B a Start ADDITIONAL LOOP A RHR PMP and adjust FLOW AS NEEDED a 2 211063 2 S/1064

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 55 of 58 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 1 of 2 Feedwater Level Control Following a Reactor Scram fEOP)

NOTE: This attachment is not to be used for routine system operation ENSURE the following:

  • FW-V6ANDFW-VSOR FW-V118 AND FW-V1 19 closed [3
  • FW-FV-17t closed [3
  • FW-V120 closed C
  • FW control MODE SELECT in 1 ELEM C
  • SULCV in M (MANUAL) dosed C
  • 621-F032A ANDIOR 621-F0328 open C
2. PLACE the MSTR RFPT SP/RX LVL CTL in M (MANUAL). THEN: C
  • ADJUSTto16I C
3. IF any RFP is running, THEN:
a. PLACE REP A(S) Recirc Vlv, conol switch to open C
b. PLACE RFPT A(S) SP CTL in M (MANUAL) C
4. IF no REP is running, THEN a PLACE REP A(S) RECIRC VLV, control switch to open C
b. ENSURE the following:
  • FW-V3V4) [REP A(S) Disch Vlv] open C
  • RFPT A(S) SP CTL in M (MANUAL) at lower limit [3
  • RFPT Af B) ManIDFCS control switch in MAN [3
  • Reactor water level is less than 2O6 inches AND RFPT A&B HIGH LEVEL TRIP reset C
c. DEPRESS RFPT A(S) RESET C
2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 56 of 58 ENCLOSURE 4 Page 2 of 2 Feedwater Level Control Following a Reactor Scram (EOP)

U. ENSURE RTPT A(B) LP AND HP STOP VLVS open .. D a ROLL RFPT A(6) to 1000 rpm by depressing RFP A(B)

START D 1, RAISE RFPT A(B) to at least 2550 rpm using the LOWERIRAISL control switch D g DEPRESS RFPT A(B) DFCS CTRL RESET D 5 ENSURE MAN!DFCS control switch in DFCS D

6. RAISE RFPT A(B) SP CTL speed until discharge pressure is greater than or equal to 100 psig above reactor pressure D
7. ADJUST SULCV to establish desired jection D
8. IF desired, THEN PLACE SULCV in A (AUTO) D
9. IF needed. THEN THROTTLE FW-V120 0
10. IF needed. THEN GO TO 2OP-32. Condensate And Feedwater System Operang Procedure, for level control 0 3 2/1204 2 Sf1205

2016 NRC SCENARIO 4 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 57 of 58 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment NUREG 1021 Category Scenario Content Rev. 2 Supp. I Req.

Total Malfunctions 5-8 8 Malfunctions after EOP 1-2 2 Entry Abnormal Events 2-4 4 Major Transients 1-2 2 EOPs Used 1-2 2 EOP Contingency 0-2 1 Run Time 60-90 mm 90 Crew Critical Tasks 2-3 3 Tech Specs 2 2 Instrument I Component 2 OATC Failures before Major 2 BOP Instrument / Component 2 2 Failures after Major Normal Operations 1 1 Reactivity manipulation I I

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Page 58 of 5]

ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover Brunswick Unit 2 Plant Status Station Duty Workweek E. Neal B. Craig Manager: Manager:

Mode: I Rx Power: 100% Mode: I Plant Risk:

Green Current EQOS Risk Assessment is:

SFP Time to 49.7 hrs Days Online: 80 days Turnover: Feedwater Temperature Reduction will be implemented this weekend Protected 2A FPC Pump/Hx, 2D RCC Pump, and 2A Demin Transfer Pump for Equipment: Fuel Pool Decay Heat Removal and inventory makeup.

2A/B NSW Pumps due to JA NSW pump maintenance IA NSW Pump is under clearance for planned maintenance.

2C TCC Pump is in service on Unit One.

Comments: APRM 2 failed downscale and bypassed.

The BOP is to start CREV in the area high radiation mode for inspection testing lAW OOP-37, Section 6.1 .3. (The inspection is scheduled to take three hours)

DUKE ENERGY.

BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION OPERATIONS TRAINING INITIAL LICENSED OPERATOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE 2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 PLACE RFP IN AUTO, DIFF TO MOVE ROD, SPE TRIP, IRM FAILURE, DG3IE3IE7 CP LOSS, LOWERING TORUS LEVEL, RHR/CS FAILURES, ED (TORUS LVL)

REVISION 0 Developer. od oc Date: eZIO7I2O!6 Technical Review: Va %%c Date: %/f/2O!6 Validators: Dcae Date: O9IOIl6 Facility Representative: Oe Date: 10103116

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LO) SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 2 ofjJ REVISION

SUMMARY

0 Scenario developed for 2016 NRC Exam.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page3of6l TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE 4 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

5 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS 6 4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA 6 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES 7 6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS 8 7.0 INTERVENTIONS 10 8.0 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES 12 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment 50 ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover 60

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 4 of 61 1.0 SCENARIO OUTLINE Event J Maif. No. Type* Event Description

]

1 N-BOP Place 2A RFPT level control in automatic 2 R-ATC Raise reactor power using control rods C-ArC Difficult to move control rod 3 RDO32M C-CRS (AOP)

C-BOP 4 K4510C Steam Packing Exhauster Trip C-CRS C-ATC IRM Failure 5 NIOI8F C-CRS (IS) 6 ED_IADCGJ6 C-BOP DG3 I E3 I E7 Control Power loss C-CRS (AOP)(IS)

Lowering Torus Level I M

7 CAOO2F RHR F028A mech trip I RHR F024B thermal trip I CS FO2OA C

Handwheel broke (PCCP) 8 RPOO8F Scram / Emergency Depressurization M

(RSP)(ATWS)(EDP)

  • (N)ormal (R)eactivity, (C)omponent or Instrument, (M)ajor

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE L 2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 Rev. 0 Page 5 of 61 2.0 SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

SUMMARY

Event Description Step 6.3.46 of OGP-02, Approach to Criticality and Pressurizations of the Reactor will 1

be completed starting at Step 6.3.46.

The crew will raise power by pulling control rods in preparation for placing the Mode 2 switch to RUN. Rod pulls will commence at Step 161 (42-39 @ 12) of the A2X sequence.

Control rods will continue to be withdrawn raising power. When control rod 42-23 is selected for withdrawal, it will be stuck at position 12. AOP-02 may be entered and 20P-07, Section 8.2 actions are required to withdraw a difficult intermediate control rod.

SPE 2A will trip causing a loss of gland sealing header pressure. SPE 2B will be placed in service While withdrawing control rods, IRM C will fail upscale causing a rod block and half scram. SRO will address IRM A and C inoperability lAW TS 3.3.1.1. Once 5 addressed, I&C will report IRM A is ready to be returned to service following proper channel check. The crew will take the actions of the APP and bypass IRM C and reset the half scram.

DC Panel 2A will trip resulting in loss of control power to DG3, Bus E3 and Bus E7.

The crew will respond per OAOP-39.0 and transfer the control power to alternate.

6 DG3, Bus E3 and Bus E7 are inoperable until transferred to alternate supply. Once control power is transferred, a 7 day action is required to restore to the normal source. The BOP operator will return DG3 to AUTO lAW AOP-39.0.

Torus level will begin to lower due to an unisolable leak on RHR suction. If attempted to raise torus water level, on RHR A loop the E11-F028A (Torus Discharge Isol Vlv) 7 will trip when opened, on RHR B loop the El 1-F024B (Torus Cooling Isol VIv) will thermal trip when opened, and on Core Spray the E21-FOO2A (Core Spray Pump A Suction Valve From The Condensate Storage Tank) handwheel will be broke.

Before level reaches -5.5 feet in the torus a reactor scram is required. When torus 8 water level teaches -5.5 feet emergency depressutization is required. The crew can anticipate emergency depressurization.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 6 of 61 3.0 CREW CRITICAL TASKS Critical Task #1 Insert a reactor manual scram before torus water level drops below -5.5 feet.

Critical Task #2 Place seven SRV switches in open before torus water level drops below -8 feet.

4.0 TERMINATION CRITERIA When all rods are inserted and the reactor has been depressurized to less than 100 psig the scenario may be terminated.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 7 of 61 5.0 IMPLEMENTING REFERENCES NOTE: Refer to the most current revision of each Implementing Reference.

Number Title UA-02, 4-5 GLAND SEAL VACUUM LOSS 2OP-26.1, Section 8.1 SHIFTING STEAM PACKING EXHAUSTERS A-05, 2-4 IRM UPSCALE A-05, 3-4 IRM A UPSCALE/INOP FA05 1-7 REACTOR AUTO SCRAM SYS A A-05, 4-7 NEUT MON SYS TRIP A-05, 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK UA-17, 2-3 DG-3/E3 ESS LOSS OF NORM POWER UA-19, 6-3 DG-1 CTL PWR SUPPLY LOST UA-21, 6-2 DG-3 LO START AIR PRESS UA-21, 6-3 DG-3 CTL POWER SUPPLY LOST f 0AOP-39 LOSS OF DC POWER A-01, 3-7 SUPPRESSION CHAMBER LVL HI/LO A-05, 5-5 PRI CMT HI/LO PRESS OEOP-01-SEP-18 FILLING THE TORUS OEOP-0 1-SEP-I 5 ANTICIPATE EMERGENCY DEPRESSURIZATION

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 8 oi]

6.0 SETUP INSTRUCTIONS

1. PERFORM TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 5, Checklist for Simulator Exam Security.
2. RESET the Simulator to IC-06.
3. ENSURE the RWM is set up as required for the selected IC.
4. ENSURE appropriate keys have blanks in switches.
5. RESET alarms on SJAE, MSL, and RWM NUMACs.
6. ENSURE no rods are bypassed in the RWM.
7. PLACE all SPDS displays to the Critical Plant Variable display (#100).
8. ENSURE hard cards and flow charts are cleaned up
9. TAKE the SIMULATOR OUT OF FREEZE,
10. CLOSE the CS B Loop valves II. LOAD Scenario File.
12. ALIGN the plant as follows:

Mani Pu Iation Insert control rods up to Step 160 of GP-10, Sequence A2X is completed.

Raise pressure set to 900 psig Verify level is stable Verify drive water pressure is at 260 psid.

Set Vi 77 to approximately % Mlbms flow

13. IF desired, take a SNAPSHOT and save into an available IC for later use.
14. PLACE a clearance on the following equipment.

Component Position IRM A (Blue Tag) Bypassed Core Spray Loop B Red Tag

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 9 of 61

15. INSTALL Protected Equipment signage and UPDATE RTGB placard as follows:
a. ADHR I FPCI Demin Transfer Pump
b. All remaining LP ECCS systems
16. ENSURE each Implementing References listed in Section 7 is intact and free of marks.
17. ENSURE all materials in the table below are in place and marked-up to the step identified.

Required Materials OGP-02 up to Step 6.3.46 (excluding step 42) (mark step 47 complete)

OGP-10 up to step 161

18. ADVANCE the recorders to prevent examinees from seeing relevant scenario details.
19. PROVIDE Shift Briefing sheet for the CRS.
20. VERIFY all actions contained in TAP-409, Miscellaneous Simulator Training Guidelines, Attachment 4, Simulator Training Instructor Checklist, are complete.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 10 of 61 7.0 INTERVENTIONS TRIGGERS Trig Type ID 4 Dl Override K4510C [STM PACKING EXHAUSTER A CLOSE DI]

4 DI Override K4510C [STM PACKING EXHAUSTER A CLOSE DI]

4 DI Override K4510C [SIM PACKING EXHAUSTER A CLOSE DI]

5 Malfunction NIO18F [IRM C FAILS HI]

6 Remote Function ED_IADCGJ6 [LOAD BKR GJ6 SBD 2A TO 125V P 2A (DG)]

7 Remote Function ED_IADCAPD3 [DG-3 DC BKR CTL PWR ON/OFFJ 7 Remote Function EG0003 [DG-3 LOCKOUT RESET]

7 Remote Function ED_IADCADG3 [DG-3 DC BKR CIL PWR fNML=2A ALThU1)]

8 Remote Function ED_IADCABE3 [SWGR E3 DC BKR CTL PWR (NML=2A ALTU1)]

10 Malfunction CA0O2F [TORUS WATER LEAK]

11 Trigger Command DOD:Q1217LGN 12 Trigger Command DOD:Q17O7LGN Trig # Trigger Text 11 K1217ENN [TORUS ISO VLV E11-F028AJ 12 K1707]NN [FULL FLOW VLV E11-F024B]

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 11 of 61 MALFUNCTIONS MaIf Mult Current Target Rmp ID ID Description Actime Dactime Trig Value Value time CONTROL ROD WITHDRAWAL RDO32M 42-23 True True SLUGGISH NIO18F IRM C FAILS HI False True CAO02F TORUS WATER LEAK False True 10 RDO12M 42-23 STUCK CONTROL ROD True True REMOTES Remf Id Muft Id Description CUflt Thrget Actime Trig J

BKR CTL DC FUSES CORE SPRAY PUMP 2B OUT OUT CS_ZVCS31BT E21-FO3B MIN FLOW OFF OFF CS_ZVCS1SBT E21-FO15B FULL FLOW TEST OFF OFF CS_ZVCSO5BT E21-FOOSBINBDINJVLV OFF OFF CS_ZVCSO4BM E21-FOO4B OTBD INJ VLV OFF OFF CS_ZVCSO1BT E21-FOO1B TORUS SUCTION OFF OFF CS_VHCS1OB E21-FO1OB OPEN/CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE EDIADCGJ6 LOAD BKR GJ6 SBD 2A TO 125V P 2A (DG) CLOSE OPEN 6 ED_IADCADG3 DG-3 DC BKR CTL PWR (NML=2A ALT=U1) NORMAL ALT 7 ED_IADCABE3 SWGR E3 DC BKR CTL PWR (NML=2A ALT=U1) NORMAL ALT 8 EG_0003 DG-3 DG-3 LOCKOUT RESET NORMAL RESET 00:00:02 7 RH_ZVRH24BT E11-F024B FULL FLOW TEST OFF OFF RH_ZVRH28AM E11-F028A TORUS ISOLATION OFF OFF ED_IADCAPD3 DG-3 DC BKR CTL PWR ON/OFF ON ON 00:00:01 7 PANEL OVERRIDES Tag ID Description I Override Actime Dactime Trig K4510C STM PACKING EXHAUSTER A CLOSE DI NORMAL ON OFF 4 K4510C STM PACKING EXHAUSTER A CLOSE Dl START OFF OFF 4 K4510C STM PACKING EXHAUSTER A CLOSE DI STOP OFF ON 4 Q1217LGN TORUS ISO VLV E11-F028A GREEN ON/OFF OFF ON Q17O7LGN FULL FLOW E11-F024B GREEN ON/OFF OFF ON

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 12 of 61 OPERATOR RESPONSE AND INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES EVENT 1: PLACING 2A RFPT CONTROLLER IN AUTOMATIC Simulator Operator Actions Ensure Monitored Parameters is open and Scenario Eased Testing Variables are loaded.

Simulator Operator Role Play Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Place RFPT Master Controller in Automatic lAW OGP-02, Step 6.3.46 Objectives: SRO Direct BOP to perform Step 6.3.46 of OGP-02 BOP Place RFPT Level Controller is placed in Automatic ATC Monitors plant Success Path: RFPT Master Level Controller is in Automatic and Reactor water level is controlled in band.

Event Termination: Go to Event 2 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 13 of 61 EVENT 1: PLACING 2A RFPT CONTROLLER IN AUTOMATIC Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct BOP to perform Step 6.3.46 of OGP-02 RO Monitors the plant BOP Place RFPT Master Controller in Automatic lAW OGP-02, Step 6.3.46.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 14 ofj]

APPROACH TO CRCALFY AND PRESSURIZATION OGP-02 OF THE REACTOR Rev. 110 Page 30 of 54 6.3 Heating And Pressurization Of The Reactor (continued) a 621-t019 (Main Steam Line Drdin OtbU lsd Vlv) iv

f. 621-F016(Main Steam Line Drain lnbd Isol VIv)
46. WHEN reactor feed pump discharge pressure is greater than 900 psig.

THEN place C32-SIC-R600 (Mstr RFPT Sp!Rx Lvi CU) in A(automatic)asfoltows

a. Ensure C32-SIC-R600 (Mstr RFPT SpfRx Lvi Ctl), in M(manual) b Ensure teedwator Control Mode Select in 1 [LEM
c. Depress SEL pushbutton on C32-SIC-R6O1A(B) [RFPT AB)

S C nd is set to U. Depress SEL pushbutton on C32-SIC-R6O1A(B) [RFPT A(S)

Sp Ctl] until PMP A(S) DEM is displayed ..

e. Depress SEL pushbutton on C32-SIC-R600 (Mstr RFPT SpfRx Lvi Ctl). until MASTR DEM is displayed
f. Usinq the raise and lower pushbuttons on C32-SIC-R600 fMstr RCPT SpIRx Lvi Ctl), set MASTR DEM to equal the PMP AfB) DLM value displayed on C32-SIC-R6OIAf B)

[RtPT A(S) Sp CII]

g. Depress NM pushbutton on C32-SIC-R6O1A(B) tRFPT A(S)

Sp CtlJ and confirm the following:

  • Indicator on control station changes to A (automatic..
  • PMP DEM signal remains unchanged
h. Depress SEL pushbutton on the out-of-service C32-SIC-R6O1A(B) [RtPT A(S) Sp Ctll uni LVL ERROR is indicated and confirm LVL ERROR is approximately 0 inches Depress NM pushbutton on C32-SIC-R600 (Mstr RtPT SpiRx Lvi CtI) and confirm the indicator on the control station changes to A (automatic)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Pagel5of6l APPROACH TO CRCALITY AND PRESSURIZATION OGP-02 OF THE REACTOR Rev. 110 Page 31 of54 6.3 Heating And Pressurization Of The Reactor (continued)

j. Confirm signals for PMP A(B) DLM on C32-SIC-R6OA(B)

[RFPT A(B) Sp CtI] and VALVL DEM on CW-LIC-3269 (SULCV CU) remain unchanged

k. Depress NM pushbutton on FW-LlC-326) (SULCV Ctl) and confirm the indicitor on the control station changes to M(manual)

CAUTION Momentarily depressing the raise or lower pushbuttons on FWLlC-3269 (SULCV CU) will cause valve demand to change in increments of 0.1%. Continually depressing the raise or lower pushbuttons will cause valve demand to change at an exponentl rate 0 I. Using raise pushbutton on FW-LIC-3269 (SULCV Ctl).

slowly open the SULCV until VALVE OEM is 100%

m. Confirm reactor water level is being maintained between 182 and 192 inches

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 16 of 61 EVENTS 213: RAISE REACTOR POWER I DIFF TO MOVE ROD Simulator Operator Actions Simulator Operator Role Play If asked as the RE, continuous rod withdrawal is allowed.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Control rods will continue to be withdrawn until control rod 42-23 which is difficult to move, requires OP-07 actions to move.

Objectives: SRO - Directs and monitor reactor power ascension with control rods Direct actions for a difficult to move control rod.

RO Withdraw control rods to raise reactor power Perform 20P-07 actions for difficult to move control rod Success Path: Control rod 42-23 withdrawn to position 48 by use of increase drive water DP.

Event Termination: Go to Event 4 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 17 of 61 EVENTS 213: RAISE REACTOR POWER I DIFF TO MOVE ROD Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Respon5e Comments Directs RO to continue to raise reactor power by SRO withdrawing control rods.

(Continuous withdrawal allowed).

Directs RO to perform 20P-07.

May direct AOP-02 (Control Rod malfunction)

Provides notifying RE and Using 20P-07 to move rod.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 56 for format)

BOP Monitor reactor plant parameters during evolution.

Continues rod withdrawal per GP-10 (see page ATC

18) lAW guidance of 20P-07 (see page 20).

Report A-6 2-7 APRM DO WNSCALE when annunciator clears.

Recognizes control rod 42-23 will not move.

Notifies SRO control rod 42-23 will not move.

Identifies 20P-07, Reactor Manual Control System Operating Procedure, Section 6.3.2 (Control Rod Difficult to Withdraw, Control Rod NOT at Position 00) is required. (page 23)

Continues rod withdrawal per GP-10 lAW guidance of 20P-07.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 18 of 61 AUACHE1ENT 3A Page 2 of 26 Rod Sequence A2X Withdraw Check Off Sheet (Expanded Group A2)

NOTES:

Concurrent verification of rod selection is required PRIOR to rod movement.

2. The initials in O. T column verity and document the following control rod coupling integrity checks have been performed WHEN a control rod is withdrawn to the FULL OUT position, a continuous withdraw signal has been maintained for at least 3 to 5 seconds, OR a separate notch out signal has been applied, AND

- ROD OVER TRAVEL (A-05, 4-2) annunciator does NOT alarm

- ROD DRIFT (A-05 3-2) annunciator does NOT alarm

- The Full Out light indication for the selected control rod is not lost

- The four-rod display indicates 4$ for the selected control rod

3. Initials in the Rod P. I. column confirm that the rod position indications tot those positions covered by that item of the check off sheet are operable. The RWM Inferred Rod Position capability may be used as an alternate method to determine Rod Position.
4. During manipulation of control rods a second Licensed Operator shall monitor control rod selection and movement. This individual shall ensure correct placement of control rods, and document these verifications by initialing the Rod Sequence Check Off Sheet. IF inoperable Rod Position indication necessitates inserting the rod in question one notch further than its insertiwithdraw limit and bypassing the rod on the RWM, THEN the second Licensed Operators initials also documents verification of this action.
5. Any deviation from the original rod move sequence should be reviewed by the Reactor Engineer, authorized by the Unit CRS, and documented on the proper rod sequence check off sheet. For changes in direction or control rod double notches, the affected page(s) of the sequence pull sheet must be copied. rod move documented, then the documentation must be included with the original rod sequence attachment.

j OGP-10 Rev. 43 Page 104 or 314

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Pagel9of6l ATtACHMENT 3A Page 100126 Rod Sequence A2X Withdraw Check Off Sheet (Expanded Group A2)

Correct Roc Rod Seected And Posion Mt Over Trav& Rod P L rias I1n Cctnments Number Verited FtomfTo Position Ncte 21 INcte I tNote ]

Noe11 STEP 9 BPWS4) 137 50-31 08 to 12 WA 138 42-07 I 08 to 12 WA 139 10-07 I 08to12 N1A 140 02-31 I 08 to 12 WA 141 10-39 I 08to12 WA 142 18-47 1 08to12 WA 143 34-47 I 08 to 12 WA 144 42-39 / 08 to 12 N/A 145 42-23 1 08 to 12 N/A 146 34-15 1 03 to 12 N/A 147 26-07 1 08to12 N/A 148 18-15 1 08to12 NIA 149 10-23 I 03 to 12 WA 150 18-31 I 08 to 12 N/A 151 26-39 I 08 to 12 N/A 152 34-31 I 08 to 12 WA 153 26-23 I 08 to 12 N/A STEP 10 (BPWS 4 154 50-31 I 12to48 155 42-07 I 12to48 156 10-07 I 12to48 157 02-31 1 12to48 158 10-39 1 12to48 159 18-47 I 12 to 46 160 34-47 1 72to48 161 42-39 I 12to46 162 42-23 12to48 163 34-15 I 12to48 164 26-07 I 12 to 48 165 18-15 I 12to48 166 10-23 I 12to48 167 18-31 1 12to48 168 26-39 I 12to48 169 34-31 I 12to48 170 26-23 1 12to48 Notes for further dtais see Page 2 cf this attachment)

I Cc*jrrert Vehficatioi, of rod setectt is required PROR to rod rrovemertt 2 lnas the Over T column sgivfy cpleton of corirol rod ccuprg iegrty crecAs for ully wihdrawn control roCs 3 lritias tithe Rcd P t coisnn cotifrrn that the rod positon ndcations or those positions coyereO by that ren cthe check o sheet are ooerable 6 Column used by a seccno Licensed Operator to document monitonng of ccntrol roc select on and movement to ensure ccrecl placement of control rods OGP-10 Rev.43 Pageli2of34I

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page2Oof6l REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-O1 PROCEDURE Rev. 10%

Paqe 153 of 162 ATACHMLNT 15 Page 1 of 3

<<(Reference Use) Section 6.1.1 Continuous Control Rod Withdrawal>>

NOTE The purpose of this attachment is to provide the Reactor Operator with guidance for control rod movement and use OENP-24.5. Reactivity Control Planning, and General Operating Procedure pull sheets as the place keeping toot for execution of steps ..... D BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

1. Select control rod by depressing i Control Rod Select pushbutton.
2. Confirm the following:
  • The backiighted Control Rod Select pushbutton is brightly ILLUMINATED.
  • The white indicating liqht on the full ce display is ON.
  • Rod Withdrawal Permissive indication is ON
3. Continuously withdraw control rod to position designated on General Operating Procedure orOENP-24.5. Reactivity Control Planning, pull sheets by holding Emergency Rod In Notch Overnde switch to OVERRIDE, while simultaneously holding Rod Movement switch to NOTCH OUT.{8. 12)
4. Monitor control rod position and nuclear instrumentation while withdrawing the control rod.
5. IF control rod fails to withdraw, THEN go to Section 6 3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.7, or Secbon 6.3.8 to free the control rod and return to Attachment 15 Step 6.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 21 of6l REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-01 PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Page 154 of 162 ATTACHMENT 15 Page 2 of 3

<<(Reference Use) Section 6.1.7 Continuous Control Rod Withdrawal>>

6. IF the control rod is beinq withdrawn to an intermediate position THEN perform the following:
a. Before control rod reaches the position designated on General Operating Procedure or 0[NP-24.5. Reactivity Control Planning, pull sheets, release Rod Movement and Emergency Rod In Notch Override control switches.{8.t.2}
b. Ensure control rod settles into desired position.
c. Confirm rod settle light is OFF.
7. IF the control rod is being fully withdrawn to position 48 THEN perform the following:

NOTE A continuous withdraw signal of approximately 3 to 5 seconds is sufficient time to ensure the control rod remains coupled. Longer continuous withdraw signals may be utilized if a control rod flush is desired D

a. WHEN control rod reaches position 48, THEN perform either of the following:
  • Maintain a continuous withdraw signal for the desired time.
  • Apply a separate notch withdraw signal.
b. Confirm control rod does MQI retract beyond position 48 fTeciinical Specrfication SR 3.1.3.4).
c. Release Rod Movement and Emergency Rod In Notch Override switches, if used.
d. Ensure control rod settles at position 48.
e. Confirm rod settle light is OFF.
f. Confirm control rod reed switch position indicators agree with FULL OUT indication on full core display.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 22 of 61 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-0!

PROCEDURE Rev. 105 Paqo 155 of 162 AUACHMENT 15 Paqe3of3

<<(Reference Use) - Section 6.11 Continuous Control Rod Withdrawal>>

6. Repeat Attachment 15 Step 1 through Attachment 15 Step 7.f. of this Attachment, for the remainder of the control rods requirinq movement, using General Operating Procedure or OENP-245, Reactivity Control Planning, pull shcets.{&1 .2}

END RM. LEVEL R21R3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION

9. WHEN control rod movement is NO longer required THEN go to Section 6 1.1 Step 7.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 23 of 61 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-07 PROCEDURE Rev. 10 Page 38 of 162 6.3.2 Control Rod Difficult To Withdraw And Control Rod NOT Al Position 00 Control Rod

1. Record Control Rod Number above
2. Confirm the folIoving initial conditions are met:
  • All applicable prerequisites in Section 5.0 are met ..
  • Control rod will NOT withdraw in accordance with Section 6.1.1 ..
  • Unit CRS has consulted Technical Specifitions 3.1.3.

Control Operability, and 3.3.2.1 Control Rod Block Instrumentation for the required actions pnor to the performance of Section 6.3.2, Control Rod Difficult To Withdraw And Control Rod NOT At Position 00 CRS

3. Ensure failure of the control rod to withdraw is NOT the result of a rod block from the RWM or ROM ..
4. Notify the Reactor Engineer Reactor Engineer CAUTION If reactor pressure is less than or equal to 800 psig higher than normal CRD drive water pressure is used to withdraw a control rod, then the latching function of the CRD may be lost 0 BEGIN R.M. LEVEL R2IR3 REACTIVITY EVOLUTION
5. Attempt to withdraw the control rod using 300 psid drive header differential pressure as follows:

a Raise CRD drive dilferenbal pressure to 300 psid

b. Attempt to withdraw control rod

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 24 of 61 REACTOR MANUAL CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE I 20P-0i Rev. 105 I Page39of 162 6.3.2 Control Rod Difficult To Withdraw And Control Rod NOT At Position 00 (continued)

c. if control rod moves.

THEN immediately restore drive pressure to 260 to 275 psid and attempt to withdraw rod in accordance with Section 6.1.1 IF control rod will NOT intinue to withdraw at normal drive pressure.

THEN return drive differential pressure to 300 psid and withdraw rod in accordance with Section 61.1 U. IF control rod withdraws, THEN go to Section 6.3.2 Step 16

e. Repeat Section 63.2 Step 5.b and Section 6.3.2 Step S.c. as necessary . ..
6. Attempt to withdraw control rod using 350 psid dnvo header differential pressure as follows:
a. Raise CRD dnve differential pressure to 350 psid
b. Attempt to withdraw control rod
c. IF control rod moves.

THEN immediately restore drive pressure to 260 to 215 psid and attempt to withdraw rod in accordance with Section 6.1.1 .

. IF control rod will NOT a)ntinuc to withdraw at normal dnve pressure.

THEN return drive differential pressure to 350 psid and withdraw the rod in accordance with Section 61.1 U. IF control rod withdraws.

THEN go to Section 6.3.2 Step 16 16 Lower control rod drive differential pressure to betveen 260 and 215 psid

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 25 of 61 EVENT 4: STEAM PACKING EXHAUSTER (SPE) TRIP Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 4 to trip the A SPE.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as I&C to investigate, acknowledge the request.

If asked to investigate MCC 2TA for the SPE, report that compartment CA6, OG-SPEM-A (Steam Seal SPE Motor 2A) is tripped.

If asked as AC to Open 2-MVD-V52 float trap outlet valve for 25 SPE report that the valve is Open.

If asked as AC to Close 2-MVD-V51 float trap outlet valve for 2A SPE report that the valve is Closed.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The SPE trips and the exhauster valves close. APP UA-2 4-5 Gland Seal Vacuum Loss annunciates. The SOP will start the B SPE and place in service to maintain vacuum.

Objectives: SRO - Direct B SPE started.

RC Diagnose A SPE failure and Starts B SPE.

Success Path: SPE B is started and vacuum returned to normal.

Event Termination: Go to Event 5 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 26 of 61 EVENT 4: STEAM PACKING EXHAUSTER (SPE) TRIP Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments CRS Direct l&C to investigate May direct entry into OAOP-37.0, Loss of Condenser Vacuum.

Direct the B SPE to be started May conduct a brief (see Enclosure I on page 56 for format)

ATC Monitors the plant.

Acknowledges, refers to & reports annunciator UA-2 4-5 GLAND SEAL VACUUM LOSS May announce and enter OAOP-37.0, Loss of Condenser Vacuum.

SOP Performs actions of APP (page 27)

Starts standby SPE lAW 20P-26.l Section 6.3.1 (See page 28)

Closes OG-MOV-D1 (Steam Seal SPE 2A MO Disch Vlv)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 27 of 61 AA-2 4-I 2 1 LU S3L 2- 2293 ATC A*::IC:rE

2. 3resr. arg exhaus:er
2. ar:n e:thaus:er su:: s:hir;e ale hle cl:se, s: lad seal :aruurl :L:: e
3. It+/-e leaks gland C: a.ster :rnnser.
4. Steam .9ea. reeci 1ave rr the Steam a:kin 1n1ta:ng 7a1:es are n:: :cn:r:1.:ng steam sea. header rress:e ::re::y.

Insuff.r;en: :ndensa:e f:.w thrru;h the steam pa:krm; a ate:.

E. rr:it mf:tr:n.

259 land sea. va:m :r. C33E belrw .hes :f water.

2. a.n :ndenser ta:um ann;.
3. In:reased :ffgaa f2::.
4. Steam seal header pressure hngh.

ATICUS Star: anciby aus:er and a:at s dns:Sar;e :al:e ::

a:um between l and 21 n:hea er 2C2 2.
1. If ;land seal re;ua::: na n:: ::nn; r:;erly. refa 1 3-Se STEAM SZA2 12ULM2 ES3-.CW.
3. :r : 2:.: seals : :e -e s:r :k:r e:er.
4. If steam SCSI header treasure :s ab::e 7 pan;. rherk the cam Seal Ieed Ai?e SSSF7 :e::.nr ::rre:tly as f:l:ws:
a. Thr::tle cl:sed, Nn Steam :: Seals *.1: nS. :: :es::re steam seal header ressre between 1.3 and 4.1 pan;.
b. If thr::tlnn; the 3l was sn:ressf1 rea::rnn; steam 5*51 header pressure. then bas the Steam Seal reed Vil.e er 2D1.1 S:tn:n 9.3.

If :hr: lnn; the i29I was n:: su::cssful then :e:pcn lf51 and byass the Steam Seal Un:adnn; ulve by

hr:t:linq :.pen Steam Seal 3ypass 2n1:ad 2l:, E.

I. If m*:ns:ure na sspe:ted :n Steam a:knn; Exhauster nns:rment l:res dram er 221.l Set:::n 9.2.

I dn:hes : f water 2APP-UA-02 Rev. 45 Page 56 0194

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 28 of 61 GLAND SEALING STEAM SYSTEM OPERATING 20P-261 PROCEDURE Rev. 46 Page 14 0132 6.3 Infrequent Operation 6.3.1 Shifting Steam Packing Exhausters Confirm the folIoving initaI conditions are met:

a. Gland Sealing Steam System is in operation per Section 6.1
b. Condensate System Is in service and is aligned to supply adequate flow to the SPE per 20P-30 section for Swapping Off-Gas Trains During Normal Conditions
2. iF. Steam Packing Exhauster SPE 2A is operating, THEN perform the following
a. Open 2-MVD-V52 (Float Trap Outlet Valve) tot SEP 26
b. Start Steam Packing Exhauster SPE 26
c. Ensure OG-MOV-E2 (Steam Seal SPE 28 MO Inlet Vlv) is OPEN
d. Throttle closed OG-MOV-D1 (Steam Seal SPE 2A MO Disch VIv) and throttle open OG-MOV-D2 (Steam Seal SPE 26 MO DiSCh Vlv) while maintaining OG-PI-EPT-9 (Steam Packing Exhauster Vacuum) located on Panel XU-2. between 10 and 20 inches water vacuum
e. Ensure OG-MOV-Di (Steam Seal SPE 2A MO Disch Vlv) is CLOSED
1. Stop Steam Packing Exhauster SPE 2A
g. Close 2-MVD-V51 (Float Trap Outlet Valve) for SPE 2A h Ensure OG-MOV-E 1 (Steam Seal SPE 2A MO Inlet VIv) is CLOSED

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 29 of 61 EVENT 5: IRM C FAILURE Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 5, to fail IRM C upscale.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted as the RE for IRM C inoperability, acknowledge request.

When IRM C inoperability has been addressed and by Lead Examiners direction, contact the control room as WCC SRO and report IRM A can be declared Operable following a satisfactory channel check. Once declared operable the off normal tag can be removed and the WCC will follow up with the paperwork.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: The crew will continue raising power by pulling control rods in preparation for placing the Mode switch to RUN. IRM C will fail upscale causing a rod block and half scram.

Objectives: SRO Determine Technical Specification application.

RO Perform actions for IRM C failure Success Path: Declare IRM A operable by channel check and bypass IRM C.

Event Termination: Go to Event 5 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 30 of 61 EVENT 5: IRM C FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Directs APP reference.

Contacts l&C for IRM C failure.

May contact Shift Manager also.

References TS 3.3.1.1 and determines with IRMs A & C inoperable:

Condition A is applicable for Function la Required Action A.1 Place channel in trip is required within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> or A.2 Place associated trip system in trip is required in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

May enter TRM 3.3 (Control Rod Block Instrumentation) Function 3 Condition A, Tracking LCO May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 56 for format)

Evaluates IRM A operability following satisfactory channel check.

20P-09, Attachment 4, 2.3.4 (Operability Guidance).

NOTE: WCC provides cue that IRM A can be declared operable after channel check is SAT.

Channel Check definition in the RO DSR. Channel Checks are a sufficient WO PMT for SRMs and lRMs at power unless a component failure is suspected in which case an IN curve and TDR trace is desirable Directs IRM A channel check be performed.

BOP Plant Monitoring:

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 L Page3lof6l EVENT 5: IRM C FAILURE Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments ATC Determines IRM C failed upscale.

Responds and reports applicable alarms for IRM C failing upscale. A-05 1-7 REACTOR AUTO SCRAM SYS A 4-7 NEUT MON SYS TRIP 2-4 IRM UPSCALE 2-2 ROD OUT BLOCK 3-4 IRM A UPSCALEIINOP A-5 IRMA UPSCALE/INOP actions:

May Reposition range switch for IRM C to bring indicated power to between 15 and 50 on the 0-125 scale.

May verify IRM C Drawer Selector switch (Control Panel H12-P606) is in OPERATE.

May notify CRS of Tech Spec applicability May inform CRS IRM C cannot be bypassed and half scram cannot be reset due to IRM A being bypassed.

Performs channel check of IRM A for operability.

RO DSR Item # 9 (IRM channel check) 201-03.2, Definition 5.1.

Removes IRM A from Bypass Bypasses IRM C per APP guidance.

Resets half scram per APP guidance.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 32 of 61 art a.t 1 I

I2 A 3AiE INC A1 AiCTS I. P:d :thai&1 52:: *tss r::r :i sw::h is .r.

A:::r hif5:a :b-tass.i r:is s;.: .s N.

I. nnls A, , E,  :; h&-. :r qua 117 A- n.1 s A, , K, 4r..s ;ras:

. ftaw.sr s*I+:: sw::

A! cir i14 1u;;.

i ;h v:1i;? :we sp1y
3. A, C, K, dezt:r f.ure.
4. mr:p rai;:n; :f I A, , K, rrg s.:::s a::t S

A, C, K, G :at; ;*se: hn &1 I1 he 3123 s:ile.

KACA AE2 5t1 A A-CS 7

3. AC2 CU: ELcc: A3S 2J
.
z;: :cC: 313 ta:; A3 4) si.

S. P.1C U;S2AI.E A3 24 a.&.

E. *iri A, C, K, 2: C. N2 r:d it1.; 1.:z . :r.

Th r:d whrw&1 r:ss.:s :r.d::&:.r; 1:cth: i11 bs :ff.

A2t1 DUE 1.. >::2:r s1s A, C, I, ard eri: affe:ci re2:r :wer :*::u:rd .r. r:r than ch,sr: se-.:e ::n:::1 ::ds s re:sss1:y

e ;w.: ::ress ar v*:.fy ha:  ::::e:: ::d wiraw1 s*e:s .s
3. A: :;t swi:h f:: I A, , K, ::  :: b:; dc*d IS a.d SC *: 15 s:al*.
a 1- A, C. K, ard 2:aw: EI::: sw:4s

-2;) ...

2APP-A-05 Rev. 68 Page 43 of 96

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 33 of 61 2

.; .4 I 2 A2TIIS (C:d If tI alarm .1l :m mnel aff.:f, *rf:r h4 f:ll:w:rtg:

a. fr Te:hr,:al e:,fi:a-_z.: ar I fr: A :.anrel
ab.i:y urame.:s.
b.  ::.fy :h*

as :h aff::e :ha*l th* bcas!  ;.t:

d ha.f *a:r-: S:ram aer w+/-.:: C2

.1. f I2 *a:e:::: fi.lur+ :: :u.: fm::.:n sp::, *s..re

ha: a W A zr:a:*d.

Ala :E1:2I:

AX A, 2, E, zr Xz: :ia aq.a2. zr ll/l2 us:ale zri A A, C, E, rr a. ZA raw.: I.r:cr ri:: .n

b. lAX dw: mrthrl
gh .zIza* r up1y l*s CSSIB1E ELAN EFFE2T3
1. Aea:::r 2::am .f AE r 5m
2. f e TAX .s b:aisd :r I:Fara1, a TAX 2:mpensa::ry Xasr* may :u.z.

IL93E4

2. FSI £
3. :a. 5pe:f.:i:iz 3.3.1.1, TAX 2.2 4 A A- 1-7, P.EA2TCA AUIC SIAA2-: 3Y5 A A A25 22, AC2 CUT E22::

AI A-CE 2-4, TAX 5AIE A 4-, NE.t XCU fA1 2APP-A-05 Rev. 68 Page 44 of 96

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 34 of 61 EVENT 6: DG3 I E3 I E7 LOSS OF CONTROL POWER Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 6 to trip 125 VDC Panel 2A.

When requested to align alternate control power:

Initiate Trigger 7, to align alternate control power to the DG3 and to reset DG3 local DG engine control panel lockout.

Initiate Trigger 8, to align alternate control power to E3/E7.

Simulator Operator Role Play Acknowledge/reset Unit One alarms, as necessary If contacted as TBAO, report Switchboard 2A load breaker GJ6, Feed to Panel 2A, is tripped.

If contacted as l&C, report problem is a due to GJ6 breaker failure, not a fault on the system.

If contacted as I&C to verify alternate power to ESS cabinet, report ESS cabinet has transferred to alternate power.

If system engineer contacted concerning the low limit light remaining on after control power is transferred, provide that the low limit light will remain on after a loss of control power until excitation is established.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: DC Panel 2A will trip resulting in loss of control power to DG 3, Bus E3 and Bus E7.

The crew will respond per OAOP-39.0 and transfer the control power to alternate.

DG3, Bus E3 and Bus E7 are inoperable until transferred to alternate supply. Once control power is transferred, a 7 day action is required to restore to the normal source. The BOP operator will return DG 3 to AUTO lAW AOP-39.0.

Objectives: SRO - Directs AOP-39 and APP actions Evaluate TS 3.8.1 and 3.8.7.

RO - Perform AOP-39 actions.

Success Path: Restore DG3 control power and then return DG3 to Auto.

Event Termination: Go to Event 7 at the direction of the Lead Evaluator.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 35 of 61 EVENT 6: DG3 I E3 I E7 LOSS OF CONTROL POWER Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct actions of APPs:

UA-21 6-2, DG-3 LO STARTAIR PRESS UA-21 6-3, DG-3 CTL POWER SUPPLY LOST RO UA-19 6-3, DG-1 CTL PWR SUPPLY LOST UA-17, 2-3, DG-3/E3 ESS LOSS OF NORM POWER Direct actions of OAOP-39.0, Loss Of DC Power Contact l&C to verify ESS cabinets have transferred to alternate power.

Direct transfer of control power to alternate source Direct returning DG3 to Auto Determine Tech Specs 3.8.1 AC Sources Operating, Condition D applies. (until alt power established)

D.1 Perform SR 3.8.1.1 within 2 hrs and once per 12 hrs AND D.2 Evaluate availability of supplemental diesel generator within 2 hrs and once per 12 hrs AND D.3 Declare required features supported by the inoperable DG, inoperable when the redundant required features are inoperable 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

AND D.4.1 Determine OPERABLE DGs not inoperable due to common cause failure 24 hrs OR D.4.2 Perform SR 3.8.1.2 for OPERABLE DGs 24 hrs AND D.5 Restore DG to OPERABLE status 14 days 3.8.7 Distribution Systems Operating, Condition C applies.

C.1 Declare required features supported by the inoperable DC electrical power distribution system inoperable Immediately.

AND C.2 Initiate action to transfer DC electrical power distribution subsystem to its alternate DC source Immediately AND C.3 Declare required features supported by the inoperable DC electrical power distribution subsystem OPERABLE Upon completion of transfer of the required features DC electrical power distribution subsystem to its OPERABLE DC source.

AND C.4 Restore DC electrical power distribution subsystem to OPERABLE status 7 Days.

May conduct a brief (see Enclosure 1 on page 56 for format)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 36 of 61 EVENT 6: DG3 I E3 I E7 LOSS OF CONTROL POWER Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments ATC Monitors the plant.

Report annunciators and review APPs:

UA-21 6-2, DG-3 LO START AIR PRESS BOP UA-21 6-3, DG-3 CTL POWER SUPPLY LOST UA-196-3, DG-1 CTLPWRSUPPLYLOST UA-17, 2-3, DG-3/E3 ESS LOSS OF NORM POWER Announce and enter OAOP-39.0, Loss of DC Power. (see page 37)

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 37 of 61 LOSS OF DC POWER OAOP-39.0 Rev. 042 Page 7 of 34 4.2 Supplementary Actions Loss of Battery Chargers

a. Monitor 125V and 23V DC battery voltages C
b. IF power has been removed from the battery chargers for greater than 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, THEN remove selected loads from the battery based on 001-50, 1251250 and 24148 VDC Electrical Load List and Unit CRS direction C C. Before f25V DC battery voltage reaches the low voltage limit 01105 volts, remove loads as directed by the Unit CRS as necessary to maintain battery voltage greater than 105 volts C
d. Before 24V battery voltage reaches the low voltage limit of 21 volts, remove loads as directed by the Unit CRS as necessary to maintain battery voltage greater than 21 volts C
e. IF battery charger AC power has been lost due to Station Blackout.

THEN enter 1 EOP-0 1 -SBcN2EOP-Oi -SBO), Station Blackout C

2. Loss of Any DC Panel:

a Determine which panel has been lost using Attachment 3, Annunciators Associated with Losses of Various DC Panels, it necessary C

b. Dispatch an operator to investigate the cause of the loss of DC power C c Contact Duty l&C to determine actual electrical system ground conditions prior to transferring any panel to alternate source or reenergizing from the normal source C
d. IF l&C determines a panel is faulted, THEN DO NOT reenergize the panel until the fault is isolated C
e. Refer to 001-50. 125/250 and 24148 VDC Electrical Load List, for specific load information C t IF switchyard control power OR 4KV bus control power is lost, THEN request the Load Dispatcher to minimize grid operations C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 38 of 61 LOSS OF DC PCMER OAOP-39.0 Rev. 042 Page 80134 4.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

g. Using the following table, determine the appropriate section based on the DC panel lost D (1) Go to the appropriate section for additional actions.

Unit Div. DC Panel Lost Normal Power Procedure Section Supply to Panel 3A, 5k 1 1A iA-i Section 4.2 Step 3 on page 8 I

1A, 7A IA-2 Section 42 Step 4 on page 10 lB. 78, 3A8 18-i Section 4.2 Step 5 on page 14 II 38, ii B, 9A 18-2 Section 42 Step 6 on page 20 4A, GA, 12A, 17 2A-i Section 4.2 Step 3 on page 8 I

2A, 8A 2A-2 Section 4.2 Step 4 on page 10 2

28, 88, 4AB, 13, MWT 28-1 Section 42 Step 5 on page 14 48, 128, bA 26-2 Section 4.2 Step 6 on page 20

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 39 of 61 LOSS OF DC POWER OAOP-39.0 Rev. 042 Page 11 0134 6.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

(3) WHEN directed, THEN perform the tolloMng at Sub C (a) Open Sub E5 i-E5-FM9-72-NORM (Normal Control Power Circuit Breaker), inside Compt.

FM9 C (b) Close Sub E5 1-E5-FM9-72-ALT (Alternate Control Power Circuit Breaker), inside Compt. FM9 C

b. IF loss of DC Distribution Panel 2A has occurred, THEN dispatch an operator to the Diesel Generator Building C (1) WHEN directed, THEN perform the following for DG3: C (a) Open DG3 Normal Feed 8, normal diesel generator control power breaker, in the rear upper right inside of the Excitation Control Panel C fb) Close DG3 Alternate Feed 8A, alternate diesel generator control power breaker, in the rear upper right inside of the Excitation Control Panel C (C) Confirm the Governor Control At Setpoint light is LIT within 10 seconds after control power has been restored C (U) IE the Governor Control At Setpoint light does NOT light THEN initiate a WOtWR C fe) Depress Lockout Reset pushbutton, on the local diesel generator engine control panel C (1) Confirm diesel generator Avail light on Panel XU-2isON C (g) Depress DG3 Auto Switch push button on RTGB Panel XU2 C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page4Oof6l LOSS OF DC POVER OAOP-39.0 Rev. 042 Page 12 of 34 4.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

(2) WHEN directed, THEN perform the following at Bus E3 0 a) Open Bus E3 125 Volt E3 Bus Normal Control Power breaker inside cornpt Al4 .......................... 0 fb) Close Bus E3 125 Volt E3 Bus Aitemate Control Power breaker inside Compt A14 0 (3) WHEN directed, THEN perform the following at Sub E7: 0 (a) Open Sub E7 2-E7-FNJ..72-NORM (Sr t25V DC Normal Control Power Circud Breaker),

inside Compt. FN1 0 fb) Close Sub E7 2-E7-FN 1-72-ALT (Sr 125V DC Alternate Control Power Circuit Breaker),

inside Compt. EN1 C

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 41 ofj]

LOSS OF DC POWER OAOP-39.0 Rev, 042 Page 13 of 34 4.2 Supplementary Actions (continued)

d. IF toss of DC Distribution Panel 2A has occurred, THEN confirm ESS Panel H60 is OPERABLE by performing the following 13 (1) Alternate source from Battery Bus 1 A-i, Panel 3k is OPERABLE 13 NOTE Loadside is the right side of the terminal strip 13 Drawing F-091 18-1 is the interconnection wiring diagram for ESS Panel 1160 13 (2) Request l&C to determine power is available indicated by measurement of 125 VDC system voLtage between the following points in ESS Panel H60:
  • Loadside of FU-2 to loadside of FU-4 13
  • Loadside of FU-6 to loadside of FU-8 I]
  • Loadside ot EU-b to loadside ot EU-12 13
  • Loadside of EU-14 to loadside of FU-16 13
  • Loadside of FU-18 to loadside of FU-20 13

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 42 ofj]

EVENT 7: LOWERING TORUS WATER LEVEL I ATTEMPT TO FILL TORUS Simulator Operator Actions At the direction of the Lead Evaluator, Initiate Trigger 10 to start Torus Water Leak NOTE: It will take 24 minutes to reach -5.5 feet in the torus.

Simulator Operator Role Play If contacted to look for leaks in the RB -17 elevation, after 5 minutes report none found.

When directed to open E21-FOO2A (Core Spray Pump A Suction Valve From The Condensate Storage Tank), wait 3 minutes and report that the handwheel is broken, the valve cannot be opened.

When directed to align RHR Loop A, wait 3 minutes and report SEP-18 Section 2.2.3 Steps 5a-c are complete.

If directed to investigate F028A breaker, report overcurrent trip, will not reset if asked.

When directed to align RHR Loop B, wait 3 minutes and report SEP-18 Section 2.2.3 Steps 6a-c are complete.

If directed to investigate F024B breaker, report magnetic trip, will not reset if asked.

Evaluator Notes Plant Response: Torus level will begin to lower due to an unisolable leak on RHR suction. If attempted to raise torus water level, on RHR A loop the E11-F028A (Torus Discharge Isol Vlv) will trip when opened, on RHR B loop the El 1-F024B (Torus Cooling Isol Vlv) will will trip when opened, and on Core Spray the E21-FOO2A (Core Spray Pump A Suction Valve From The Condensate Storage Tank) handwheel will be broke.

Objectives: SRO -Direct actions for a lowering torus water level lAW PCCP RO Respond to a lowering torus water level lAW PCCP.

Success Path: Attempts to add water to torus through RHR and Core Spray systems.

Event Termination: When torus fill through RHR I CS has been attempted or a reactor scram inserted.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 43 of]

EVENT 7: LOWERING TORUS WATER LEVEL I ATTEMPT TO FILL TORUS Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments SRO Direct actions of PCCP.

Direct torus fill lAW OEOP-01 -SEP-I 8 May conduct a brief on when Reactor Scram is required (see Enclosure 1 on page 56 for format)

Report annunciator ATC A-01 3-7, Suppression Chamber Lvl Hi/Lo Diagnose lowering torus water level.

When directed by the CRS, perform OEOP SEP-18, Filling the Torus. (page 45)

If RHR Loop A is selected, report unable to fill due to El 1-F028A (Torus Discharge Isol Vlv) breaker magnetic trip.

If RHR Loop B is selected, report unable to fill due to EJI-F024B (Torus Cooling Isol Vlv) breaker magnetic trip.

If CS Loop A is selected, report unable to fill due to E21-FOO2A (Core Spray Pump A Suction Valve From The Condensate Storage Tank) handwheel broken.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 44 of 61 EVENT 7: LOWERING TORUS WATER LEVEL I ATTEMPT TO FILL TORUS BOP Monitors the plant Report A-05 5-5, Pri Cmt Hi/Lo Press Dispatch AO to look for the leak.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0

. Page45ofj]

FILLING THE TORUS QEOP-0 1-SEP-18 Rev. 000 Page4of 12 1.0 ENTRY CONDITION

  • As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs)
  • As directed by Severe Accident Management GudeIines fSAMGs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Core Spray Torus Fill 2.1.1 Manpower Required
  • 1 Reactor Operator
  • 2 Auxiliary Operators 2.1.2 Special Equipment None 2.1. Core Spray Torus Fill Actions
1. Select Core Spray loop to be used: D RO A B
2. Confirm Core Spray loop to be used:
  • NOT in operation D RO
  • Suction aligned to tows D RO
3. Monitor and control CST level greater than 11 feet D AO
4. Monitor tows level D RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page46of6l FILLING THE TORUS OEOP-0 1-SEP-18 Rev, 000 Page 5of 12 2.1.3 Core Spray Torus Fill Actions (continued)

NOTE Normal tows level is -27 to -31 inches C

5. IF Core Spray Loop A selected.

THEN:

a. Unlock and sloviy throttle open E2 1-FOO2A (Core Spray Pump A Suction Valve From The Condensate Storage Tank) C AO
b. WHEN at desired tows level, THEN C RO
  • Close E21-FOO2A (Core Spray Pump A Suction Valve From The Condensate Storage Tank) C AO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 47 of6l FILLING THE TORUS OEOP-0i.SEP-18I Rev. O0]

Page 601121 2.2 RHR Torus FIl 2.2.1 Manpower Required

. 1 Reactor Operator

. 2 Auxiliary Operators 2.2.2 Special Equipment None 2.2.3 RHR Torus Fill Actions

1. Select RHR loop to be used D RO A B
2. Confirm RHR loop to be used NOT in operation Cl RO
3. Monitor and control MUD tank level greater man 14 feet Cl AO 4, Monitor tows level Cl RO NOTE Normal tows level is -27 to -31 inches Cl
5. jf RHR Loop A selected, THEN:

NOTE Valves located on HPCI mezzanine Cl

a. Close El 1-V195 (RHR Keepful Station Outlet Isolation Valve) Cl AC
b. Close El l-V194 fRHR Keeptill Station Inlet Isolation Valve) Cl AC
c. Open Eli -F082A (RHR Loop A Keepfill Station Bypass Valve) Cl AC

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 48 of 61 FILLING THE TORUS OEOP-01-SEP-18 Rev. 000 Page Zot 12 2.2.3 RHR Torus FiN Actions (continued)

d. Place El i-CS-S 18A f23 Core Height LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD.., ......... ... .............. Cl RD e, Momentarily place El l-CS-S17A (Contathment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL C RD
f. Open El l-F028A (Tows Discharge Isol Vlv) Cl RO
g. Slowly throttle open El l-F024A (Torus Cooling Isol Vlv) Cl RO
h. WHEN at desired tows level, THEN close El l-F024A (Torus Cooling lsol Vlv) C RD
i. Close El i-F028A (Tows Discharge Isol VIv) Cl RD
j. Close El l-F082A (RHR Loop A Keepfill Station Bypass Valve) Cl AD
6. IE RHR Loop B selected, THEN:

NOTE Valves located on Reactor Building 50 west Cl

a. Close El l-F098 fRHR Keepfill Station Outlet Isolation Valve) Cl AD
b. Close El l-F099 (RHR Keepfill Station Inlet Isolation Valve) Cl AD
c. Open El l-F088 fRHR Loop B Keeptill Station Bypass Valve) Cl AD
d. Place El 1-CS-Si 8B (2/3 Core Keigtfl LPCI Initiation Override Switch) to MANUAL OVERRD C RD

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 49 of 61

) FILLING THE TORUS OEOP-Oi-SEP- 18 I Rev. 000 L Pagesofl2 2.2.3 RHR Torus Fill Actions (continued)

e. Momentarily place El 1-CS-S 178 (Containment Spray Valve Control Switch) to MANUAL D RO
f. Open El l-E028B (Tows Discharge Isol Vtv) D RO
g. Slowly throttle open El i-F0248 (Tows Cooling 1501 Vlv) D RO h WHEN at desired tows level, THEN close El 1-F0248 (Tows Cooling Isol Vlv) D RO
i. Close El l-F0288 (Tows Discharge lsol Vlv) D RO
j. Close E1l-FO88fRHR Loop B Keepfill Station Bypass Valve) 0 AO
7. Exit this section and go to Section 2.4 0 RO

LOl SIMULATOR EVAL 2016 NRC SCENARI UATION GUIDE O5 Rev. 0 Page 50 of 61 EVENT 8: SCRAM 1 EM ERGENCY DEPRESSU RIZATION Simulator Operator Actions When directed by the Le ad Evaluator, place th e simulator in FREEZE DO NOT RESET THE SIMULATOR PRIOR DO SO FROM THE LE TO RECEIPT OF CO AD EXAMINER NCURRENCE TO Simulator Operator Ro le Play Evalua tor Notes Plant Response:

Before level reaches

-5.5 feet in the torus water level reaches -5. a reactor scram is req 5 feet emergency de uired. When torus anticipate emergenc pressutization is requir y depressurization. ed. The crew can Objectives:

SRO - Direct ED or Anticipa te ED based on torus RO Perform ED or water level.

Anticipate ED.

Success Path: Reactor deptessurized Scenario Terminatio n: When all rods are inserted and RPV pr scenario may be term essure is less than inated. 100 psig, the Remind students no t to erase any char scenario until told to ts and not to discuss do so by the evalua the torlinstructor.

I

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 51 of6l EVENT 8: SCRAM I EMERGENCY DEPRESSURIZATION Time Pos EXPECTED Operator Response Comments Direct a reactor scram before torus level CRS reaches -5.5 feet. CRITICAL TASK #1 Direct OEOP-O1-SEP-15, Anticipate Emergency Depress urization. CRITICAL TASK #2 OR Direct Emergency Depressurization When directed to scram performs scram immediate actions (see page 52) CRITICAL TASK #1 ATC Performs Scram Hard Card (see page 53)

Reports all rods in.

Maintains reactor pressure as determined by the BOP CRS.

Maintains level as directed by the CRS.

May align condensate and feedwater lAW hard card. (See Enclosure 2 page 57)

If directed performs OEOP-O1-SEP-1 5, Anticipate Emergency Depressurization. (see CRITICAL TASK #2 page 56)

If directed opens 7 ADS valves.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page52of6l Unit 2 SCRAM Immediate Actions 1 Ensure SCRAM valves OPEN by manual SCRAM or ARI initiation.

2. WHEN steam flow less than 3.0 MlbThr, THEN place reactor mode switch in SHUTDOWN.
3. jf reactor power below 2% fAPRM downscale trip),

THEN trip main turbine

4. Ensure master RPV level controller setpoint at + 170 inches.
5. IF:
  • Two reactor feed çunips running AND
  • RPV level above +160 inches AND
  • RPV level rising, THEN trip one.

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 53 of 61 SCRAM Card Enter applicable leg El Scram ATWS All Control Rods FULL-IN El lndicatns of Hydraulic/Electrical A1WS El RPV Water Level El Ensure ARI initiated El inches Reactor Power El RPV Pressure El psig Communicate A1WS report Communicate scram report t0CRS El t0CRS El IE enabled, Place SULCV in service...,. El THEN initiate a recirc pump manual runback C Insert Nuclear Instrumentation El IF reactor power above 2% Q Ensure Turbine Oil System CANNOT be determined, Operating El THEN trip both recirc pumps El Ensure Reactor Recirculation Report reactor power to CRS El Pump speed at 34°/ El Exit scram card and perform Ensure Heater Drain Pumps EOP-Oi-LEP-02 C tripped El Exit scram card El 8 11905 21906 51907

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 54 of 61 ANTICIPATE EMERGENCY DEPRESSURIZATION OEOP-O 1-SEP-15 Rev. 0 Page 4 of 5 1.0 ENTRY CONDITION As directed by Emergency Operating Procedures fEOPs) 2.0 INSTRUCTIONS 2.1 Reactor Vessel Depressurization 2.11 Manpower Required 1 Reactor Operator 2.1.2 Special Equipment None 2.1.3 Operator Actions 1 Ensure:

  • Flow path available from RPV to condenser C RO
  • EHC System in operation C RO
  • Circulating water in operation C RO
  • Vacuum System in operation C RO
  • Turbine Shaft Sealing System in operation C RO
2. IF AT ANY TIME I.Jain Steam Line Break indicated by:
  • A-06 3-6, Stm Tunnel Hi Temp Sys A C RO
  • A-06 4-6, Stm Tunnel Hi Temp Sys B C RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 55 of 61 ANTICIPATE EMERGENCY DEPRESSURIZATION OEOP-0i -SEP-i 5 Rev. 0 Page 5 of 5 2.1.3 Operator Actions (continued)

  • A-06 6-7, MSIV PitCrBffB Tunnel Hi Temp C]

RO

  • A-06 5-6, Mn Stm Line Hi flow Sys A C]

RO

  • A-06 6-6, Mn Stm Line Hi Flow Sys B C]

RO THEN terminate RPV depressurization C]

RO

3. IF AT ANY TIME fuel failure indicated by:

RO

  • UA-03 5-2, Process Off-Gas Rad Hi C]

RO

  • UA-03 6-4, Process OG Vent Pipe Rad Hi C]

RO THEN terminate RPV depressurization C]

RO 4 IF AT ANY TIME RPV pressure reduction will result in loss of injection required for adequate core cooling, THEN terminate RPV depressunzation C]

RO

5. IF MSIVs CLOSED, THEN equalize pressure and open MSIVs fOP-25) C]

RO

6. Unit 2 only: Maintain main steam line flow less than 3x10 lbmThr while performing Step 7 C]

RO

7. Rapidly depressurize RPV with Main Turbine Bypass valves irrespective of cooldown rate C]

RO

8. Exit this procedure and continue n procedure(s) in effect C]

RO

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 56 of 61 ENCLOSURE 1 Page 1 of 1 CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS AD-OP-ALL-i 000 Rev. 6 Page 90 of 90 AUACHMENT 8 Page 1 of I

<< Crow Brief Template>>

El Announce SCrew Briet Begin El All crew members aclnowiedge announcement (As Required)

El Update the crew as needed:

El Describe what happened and major actions taken El Procedures in-progress El Notifications:

Recap El Maintenance El Engineering El Others (Dispatcher, Station Management, etc.)

El Future Direction and priorities El Discuss any contingency plans (As Required)

El Solicit questions/concerns from each crew member:

DROs Input El CRS El StA El Are there any alarms unexpected to4 the plant conditions?

El What is the status of Critical Parameters?

(As Required)

EAL El Provide EAL and potential escalation criteria El Restore normal alarm announcement? (Yes/No)

Finish Brie?

El Announce End of Bnef

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 57 of 61 ENCLOSURE 2 Page 1 of 2 Feedwater Level Control Following a Reactor Scram NOTE This attachment is NOT to be used tot routnie system opetation ENSURE the following:

  • FW-V6 AND FW-V8 OR FW-V118 AND FW-V1i9 closed
  • FW-FV- 177 closed
  • EW-Vi 20 closed
  • EW control MODE SELECT in 1 ELEM
  • SULCV in M (MANUAL) closed
  • B21-F032A ANDIOR 821-F032B open
2. PLACE the MSTR RFPT SP/RX LVL Cm in M (MANUAL). THEN:
  • ADJUSTt0 187
3. IF any REP is running, THEN:
a. PLACE REP A(S) RECIRC VLV, control switch to open
b. PLACE RFPT At B) SP CTL in M (MANUAL) U
4. IF no REP is running, THEN:
a. PLACE REP A(S) RECIRC VLV, control switch to open
b. ENSURE the following:
  • REP A(S) DISCH VLV, FW-V3(V4) open
  • RFPT A(S) SP cm in M (MANUAL) at lower limit
  • RFPT A(B) MAN?DFCS control switch in MAN E
  • Reactor water level is less than +206 inches AND REPT E A&B HIGH LEVEL TRIP reset C. DEPRESS RFPT A(S) RESET

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 58 of 61 ENCLOSURE 2 Page 2 of 2 Feedwater Level Control Following a Reactor Scram d ENSURE REPT A(B) LP AND HP STOP VLVS open

e. ROLL REPT Af B) to 1000 rpm by depressing REP Af B) E START
f. RAISE RFPT A(S) to approximately 2550 rpm using the LOWERJRAISE control switch
g. DEPRESS REPT A(S) DFCS CTRL RESET E
5. ENSURE MAN1DFCS control switch in DECS
6. RAISE REPT A(S) SP CTL speed until discharge pressure is greater than or equal to 100 psig above reactor pressure
7. ADJ U ST SULCV to establish desired injection
8. IF desired, THEN PLACE SULCV in A (AUTO)
9. IF needed, THEN THROTTLE FW-V120
10. IF needed, THEN GO TO 2OP-32 Section 8.17 for level control

2016 NRC SCENARIO 5 LOI SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Rev. 0 Page 59 of 61 ATTACHMENT I - Scenario Quantitative Attribute Assessment NUREG 1021 Category Scenario Content Rev. 2 Supp. I Req.

Total Malfunctions 5-8 7 Malfunctions after EOP 1-2 2 Entry Abnormal Events 2-4 2 Major Transients 1-2 2 EOPs Used 1-2 2 EOP Contingency 0-2 1 Run Time 60-90 mm 90 Crew Critical Tasks 2-3 2 Tech Specs 2 2 Instrument / Component 2 OATC Failures before Major 2 BOP Instrument / Component 2 2 Failures after Major Normal Operations 1 1 Reactivity manipulation 1 1

NEUTRON MONITORING SYSTEM OPERA11NG 2OP-Oi PROCEDURE Rev. 34 Page 43 of 43 ATTACHMENT 5 Page 1 of 1

<<Neutron Monitoring Spiking Troubleshooting Form>>

1. Initiators name Unit Two SRO
2. Check all wstruments that are spikng and the associated Unit:

LJUnitl SRMA jIRMA JIRME JUnit2 ESRMB flIRMB IRMF ESRMC EIRMC fl IRM G SRMD [jIRMD IRM H

3. Time and .ato of event Today previous shitt
4. What is the duration of the spdng (duration of individual spike)? Md adcttional information below to chaiderize spiking event.

[] Seconds Minutes E Hours 1 Ensure a recjWud obsrvatr to supçurtoptfiiLhty ni prupnety documijntod.

5. Has a WO or AR been initiated?

If yes, kst nurrtherfs):_ 00345765 j Yes No

6. Hasabgenbbecnmade? ENo
7. Is there any welding occurring in the piant? Yes No
8. ke there any personnel under-vessel? n Yes No
9. Ne there any plant evolutions in progress? ç Yes E No
10. Is there any electrical switching ourring? fl Yes ] No
11. Ne anycontrol rods being moved or selected? j Yes ENo
12. Has there been a recent change in the mode switch? Yes j] No
13. Is there any major oqument being started? Ye fl No
14. Hastherebeenanyobservedrelaychatter? flYes jNo
15. Is there any refuel bridge movement? Yes No 16, Are the rod interleds being affected? Yes fl No
17. Completed copy of this attachment sent to engineer ry Yes E No Note below any additional information that may aid troubleshooting (such as 2 instruments spiking but NOT in the same manner):

Multiple upscale and downscate alarms during startup over a 15 minute period All other IRMs responded normally

LOl SIMULATOR EVALUATION GUIDE Page 61 of6l ATTACHMENT 2 Shift Turnover Brunswick Unit 2 Plant Status Station Duty Workweek Manager: E. Neal B. Craig Manager:

Mode: 2 Rx Power: 2% Gross*/Net MWe*: N/A Plant Risk:

G teen Current EOOS Risk Assessment is:

SFP Time to 200 Deg F: 45.7 hrs Days Online: 0 days lAW the reactivity plan the OATC is to raise power to 6-10%.

  • A2X sequence at step 161.

Turnover.

Permission for continuous withdrawal has been granted for the rods going from 12-48.

Protected ADHR I FPC Loop A / Demin Transfer Pump Equipment:

All remaining ECCS LP systems IRM A was bypassed due to spiking and the paperwork is being evaluated by the WCC SRO for its return to service.

Comments: Core Spray Loop B under clearance, expected return in 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

The BOP operator is to complete Step 6.3.46 of OGP-02, Approach to Criticality and Pressurization of the Reactor.

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM A - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO/USRO LESSON TITLE: Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 REVISION NO: 0 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Grant Newton Shawn Zander 9/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 1 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip RELATED TASKS:

202201B401 Recover from a Reactor Recirculation Pump Runback Per OP-02 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

202002 A2.01 3.4/3.4 Ability to predict the impacts of recirculation pump trip and based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those abnormal conditions or operations.

REFERENCES:

2OP-02, Section 6.3.3, Recovery From Reactor Recirculation Pump Runback 2OP-02, Section 6.1.3, Raising Speed Using Individual Recirculation Pump Control 2AOP-04.0, Low Core Flow TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

1 - Reactivity Control (Recirculation Flow Control System)

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 2 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip SETUP INSTRUCTIONS SIMULATOR SETUP Initial Conditions

1. Recommended Initial Conditions IC-10
2. Required Plant Conditions Recirculation Pump A at approximately 70% flow, Recirculation Pump B at Limiter #1.

OPRM Trip Enabled annunciator in ALARM.

Malfunctions:

Insert the following malfunctions:

Current Target Malf ID Mult ID Description Rmptime Actime Deactime Trig Value Value VFD B RUNBACK RC024F VFD B False True

  1. 1ACTUATES EE026F Loss of 4160V Bus B False True 1 Set Trigger 1, Q2722RSM, VFD B Raise Medium pushbutton to TRUE.

Special Instructions Initiate VFD B runback and allow plant conditions to stabilize. Once runback is complete, delete malfunction RC024F. If necessary, insert control rods to get below the MELLL Line on the Power-Flow map. Verify VFD B RUNBACK #1 ACTUATES is clear. Reset Speed Hold, if amber light is illuminated.

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 3 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Reactor Recirculation Pump operation was previously in accordance with 2OP-02, Section 6.1.2.
2. Recirculation Pump 2B has run back to limiter number 1, and the cause has been corrected.
3. A reactivity management briefing is complete, and your reactivity management team is available in the Control Room
4. Another operator is monitoring Nuclear Instrumentation.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to reset the Recirculation Pump runback signal and raise flow of Reactor Recirculation Pump 2B to match flow of Recirculation Pump 2A.

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 4 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 0 - May perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee may cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Am I using appropriate gloves? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

Step 1 - Obtain current revision of 2OP-02 Sections 6.3.3 may also get Section 6.1.3.

Provide current revision of 2OP-02 Section 6.3.3, and if asked Section 6.1.3.

SAT/UNSAT TIME START:

Step 2 - Verify the conditions that caused the runback have cleared, or Recirc Pump speed has been lowered below the runback setpoint.

Verifies Recirc Pump speed below the runback setpoint, and condition is clear as part of Task Conditions.

SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - ENSURE RECIRC PUMP B SPEED DEMAND signal is approximately the same as the following:

  • RECIRC PUMP B CALCULATED SPEED
  • RECIRC PUMP B ACTUAL SPEED Ensures Calculated Speed and Actual Speed approximately the same.

SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - RESET the Recirc Pump runback for Reactor Recirculation Pump B as follows:

a. DEPRESS Recirc VFD B RUNBACK RESET push button.

Runback Rest push button is depressed.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 5 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip

b. CONFIRM yellow AUTOMATIC RUNBACK light extinguished.

Yellow Automatic Runback light is confirmed extinguished SAT/UNSAT

c. CONFIRM annunciator RECIRC FLOW B LIMIT (A-07 2-4) is clear.

Annunciator confirmed clear.

SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: If asked which VFD RAISE pushbutton to use, or if the VFD RAISE SLOW pushbutton is depressed, direct Examinee as the CRS to raise speed of the Recirculation Pump using the VFD RAISE MEDIUM pushbutton.

Step 5 - ADJUST flow as directed by the Unit CRS.

VFD RAISE MEDIUM push button is depressed in accordance with 2OP-02, Section 6.1.3, pages 38-40.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT NOTE: 4160 V Bus B will trip when the VFD RAISE MEDIUM push button is depressed.

Step 6 - Determines that no Recirc Pumps are running.

Diagnosis failure of Bus B which causes both Recirc Pumps to lose power.

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: The examinee may enter and announce entry into 2AOP-04.0, Low Core Flow.

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 6 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip Step 7 - Inserts a manual reactor scram IAW 2AOP-04.0, Immediate Operator Action, depresses both RPS Channel Manual Pushbuttons.

Performs the following scram immediate actions:

1. Ensure SCRAM valves OPEN by manual SCRAM or ARI initiation.
2. WHEN steam flow less than 3.0 Mlb/hr, THEN place reactor mode switch in SHUTDOWN.
3. IF reactor power below 2% (APRM downscale trip),

THEN trip main turbine.

4. Ensure master RPV level controller setpoint at +170 inches.
5. IF two reactor feed pumps running and RPV level is greater than 160 inches and rising, THEN trip one reactor feed pump.
    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 8 - Informs CRS that all rods are in, RPV water level and RPV pressure.

Acknowledge scram report as the CRS.

SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: Once a manual reactor scram is inserted and scram immediate actions are complete, the JPM can be terminated.

TIME COMPLETED:

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 7 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Not Critical Given as initial conditions 3 Not Critical Observation of indications 4a Critical Action required to reset the runback 4b Not Critical Observation of indications 4c Not Critical Observation of indications 5 Critical Action required to meet Initiating Cue 6 Not Critical Observation of indications 7 Not Critical Observation of indications 8 Critical Immediate Operator action from 2AOP-04.0 9 Not Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM written for 2016 Initial NRC exam.

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 8 of 10 Rev. 0

Reset Recirc Pump Runback - Both Recirc Pumps Trip Validation Time: 20 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes X No EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-002-A09 Page 9 of 10 Rev. 0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Reactor Recirculation Pump operation was previously in accordance with 2OP-02, Section 6.1.2.
2. Recirculation Pump 2B has run back to limiter number 1, and the cause has been corrected.
3. A reactivity management briefing is complete, and your reactivity management team is available in the Control Room
4. Another operator is monitoring Nuclear Instrumentation.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to reset the Recirculation Pump runback signal and raise flow of Reactor Recirculation Pump 2B to match flow of Recirculation Pump 2A.

Page 10 of 10

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM B - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO/USRO LESSON TITLE: MECHANICAL TRIP VALVE OIL TRIP TEST LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 REVISION NO: 0 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Kyle Cooper Shawn Zander 9/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 1 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test RELATED TASKS:

245202B101 Perform Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test Per OP-26 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

245000 A3.01 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: Turbine Trip

REFERENCES:

2OP-26, Section 6.3.8, Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

4 - Heat Removal (main Turbine Generator and Auxiliary Systems)

LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 2 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test SETUP INSTRUCTIONS SIMULATOR SETUP Initial Conditions

1. Recommended Initial Conditions IC-11
2. Required Plant Conditions Turbine is at 1800 rpm.

Malfunctions:

None Special Instructions None.

LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 3 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. All applicable prerequisites listed in Section 5 of 2OP-26 are met.
2. Last performance of 2OP-26 Section 6.3.15 was successful.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to perform 2OP-26, Section 6.3.8, Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test.

LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 4 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 0 - May perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee may cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Am I using appropriate gloves? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

Step 1 - Obtain current revision of 2OP-26 Sections 6.3.8.

Provide current revision of 2OP-26 Section 6.3.8.

SAT/UNSAT TIME START:

Step 2 - Depress the Locked out pushbutton.

Depresses the Locked Out pushbutton on the XU-1 panel.

SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Depress and hold the Oil Trip Pushbutton until Tripped light comes On, then release the Oil Trip pushbutton.

Oil Trip pushbutton is depressed and held until the Tripped light is illuminated.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 5 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test Step 5 - Depress and hold the Push to Reset pushbutton and confirm the Resetting light comes on.

Push to Reset pushbutton is depressed and the Resetting light illuminates.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 6 - When ~5 seconds have elapsed confirm the Reset light comes On and UA-23, 4-3 Turbine Overspeed Trip Reset, annunciator is received.

Confirms the Reset light illuminates and Turbine Overspeed Trip Reset annunciator is acknowledged and reported to Unit CRS.

SAT/UNSAT Step 7 - When the Reset light comes On then release the Push to Reset pushbutton.

The Push to Reset pushbutton is released and annunciator UA-23, 4-3, Turbine Overspeed Trip Reset annunciator is reset and reported as cleared to the Unit CRS.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 8 - When at least10 seconds have elapsed then depress the Normal pushbutton.

The Normal pushbutton is depressed and the Normal light is confirmed On and the Locked Out Light extinguishes. Annunciator UA-23, 3-3, Overspeed Trip Locked annunciator is reset and reported as cleared to the Unit CRS.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 9 - Informs CRS Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip is complete.

Acknowledge report as the CRS.

SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: All actions in 2OP-26, Section 6.3.8 have been completed.

TIME COMPLETED:

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 6 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Critical Action required to complete the procedure without tripping the main turbine.

3 Not Critical Observation of indications as a result of the previous step 4 Critical Action required to complete the procedure 5 Critical Action required to complete the procedure 6 Not Critical Observation of indications as a result of the previous step 7 Critical If released prior to the Reset light illuminating the trip will trip.

8 Critical Required to restore the system to normal alignment and remove the overspeed trip locked out.

9 Not Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM written for 2016 Initial NRC exam.

LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 7 of 9 Rev. 0

Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test Validation Time: 10 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-026.2-01 Page 8 of 9 Rev. 0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. All applicable prerequisites listed in Section 5 of 2OP-26 are met.
2. Last performance of 2OP-26 Section 6.3.15 was successful.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to perform 2OP-26, Section 6.3.8, Mechanical Trip Valve Oil Trip Test.

Page 9 of 9

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM C - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO/USRO LESSON TITLE: OPERATE THE HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN MONITOR USING THE HARD CARD LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 REVISION NO: 5 Daniel Hulgin 11/03/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 11/03/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Rob Mehs 11/03/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Olvier 11/03/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 11/03/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 1 of 9 Rev.5

RELATED TASKS:

223201B101, Startup the H2/O2 Analyzer (CAC-AT-4409/4410) IAW OP-24 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

223001 A4.04 3.5/3.6 223001 A4.05 3.6/3.6 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor containment hydrogen/oxygen concentrations.

REFERENCES:

2OP-24 Attachment 8, CAC-AT-4410 Startup In The EOPS - 2OP-24 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

5 - Containment Integrity SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Recommended Initial Conditions IC-11 Rx Pwr 100%

BOC Required Plant Conditions:

RPV level <166 (PCIS Group 6 Isolation Initiated)

Special Instructions:

None.

LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 2 of 9 Rev.5

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. 0EOP-02-PCCP has been entered due to Primary Containment conditions.
2. Hydrogen/Oxygen monitor CAC-AT-4410 is isolated and was not previously in service.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to place the Primary Containment Hydrogen/Oxygen monitor CAC-AT-4410 in service using the hard card and inform him when step 6b has been completed.

LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 3 of 9 Rev.5

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

TIME START: ___________

Step 1 - Obtain Hard Card, CAC-AT-4410 Startup In The EOPS - 2OP-24.

2OP-24, attachment 8 obtained SAT/UNSAT Step 2 - Ensure recorder function of CAC-AR-4410 (Cont Atm H2 & O2 Percent Rec) is ON.

CAC-AR-4410 (Cont Atm H2 & O2 Percent Rec) recorder function verified ON.

SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - IF an isolation signal is present, THEN place CAC-CS-3452 (CAM Div II Isol Ovrd) to ON.

CAC-CS-3452 (CAM Div II Isol Ovrd) placed in ON.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Ensure the following valves are OPEN: CAC-SV-1218A at X206A-A, CAC-SV-1227A at X73-A, CAC-SV-1227B at X73-B, CAC-SV-1227E at X73-E, CAC-SV-1231B at X244-B, and CAC-SV-4541 RIP valves opened by depressing associated pushbutton twice and verifying the red light is ON; CAC-SV-4540 opened by taking its control switch to CLOSE and back to OPEN Valve SAT UNSAT CAC-SV-1218A at X206A-A CAC-SV-1227A at X73-A CAC-SV-1227B at X73-B CAC-SV-1227E at X73-E CAC-SV-1231B at X244-B CAC-SV-4541
    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 4 of 9 Rev.5

Step 5 - IF available, THEN place Sample Select switch to Point 4.

Control switch CAC-CS-4410 is placed to position 4.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 6 - At Sample Control Module CAC AT 4410, depress Start Sample push button and ensure the following: Sample inlet valve OPENS, Red Start Sample light comes ON, Red MS Drn Active light comes ON, and WHEN 20 to 40 seconds have elapsed, THEN red MS Drn Active light goes OFF and green MS Drain Standby light comes ON START SAMPLE push button depressed.
    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 7 - After sample pushbutton depressed ensure the following: Sample inlet valve OPENS, Red Start Sample light comes ON, Red MS Drn Active light comes ON, and WHEN 20 to 40 seconds have elapsed, THEN red MS Drn Active light goes OFF and green MS Drain Standby light comes ON The following sequence is observed:

Sequence SAT UNSAT Sample inlet valve OPENS Red Start Sample light comes ON Red MS Drn Active light comes ON WHEN 20 to 40 seconds have elapsed, THEN red MS Drn Active light goes OFF and green MS Drain Standby light comes ON SAT/UNSAT Step 8 - IF the CAC-AT-4410 was NOT previously in service, THEN perform the following at Panel XU-79: Ensure system power Standby/Off switch in STANDBY and confirm the amber Standby light comes ON Standby/Off switch verified in Standby SAT/UNSAT Step 9 - IF the CAC-AT-4410 was NOT previously in service, THEN perform the following at Panel XU-79: Ensure system power On/Off switch in ON Power On/Off switch placed in ON

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 5 of 9 Rev.5

NOTE: The last two steps of the hard card (6c, and d) are after a 30 minute elapsed time.

Step 10 - Informs the CRS that Primary Containment Hydrogen/Oxygen monitor CAC-AT-4410 has been started using the hard card, and step 6b is complete CRS informed 2OP-24 Attachment 8 is complete through step 6b.

SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: CAC-AT-4410 has been started properly per the hard card up to step 6b.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Not Critical Verification step 3 Critical Necessary to unisolate theCAC-AT-4410.

4 Critical Necessary for flowpath 5 Critical Necessary for flowpath 6 Critical Necessary for operation 7 Not Critical Verification step 8 Not Critical Verification step 9 Critical Necessary for operation 10 Not Critical Communication LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 6 of 9 Rev.5

REVISION

SUMMARY

5 New Format Changed steps to reflect starting CAC-AT-4410 4 OLD JPM no record of revision from 2011. Based on CAC-AT-4409 (Provide sufficient detail for reviewers and evaluators to understand the scope of any technical and/or administrative changes).

LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 7 of 9 Rev.5

Validation Time: 10 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-024-A01 Page 8 of 9 Rev.5

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. 0EOP-02-PCCP has been entered due to Primary Containment conditions.
2. Hydrogen/Oxygen monitor CAC-AT-4410 is isolated and was not previously in service.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to place the Primary Containment Hydrogen/Oxygen monitor CAC-AT-4410 in service using the hard card and inform him when step 6b has been completed.

Page 9 of 9

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM D - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO LESSON TITLE: REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 REVISION NO: 0 Dan Hulgin 11/03/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 11/03/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Rob Mehs 11/03/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 11/03/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 11/03/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 1 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE RELATED TASKS:

204002B101 Place The RWCU System In Service With The Reactor Not In Cold Shutdown Per OP-14 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

204000 A4.08 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: Reactor Water Level 3.4/

3.4 REFERENCES

2OP-14, Reactor Water Cleanup System Operating Procedure TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

2 - Inventory Control LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 2 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE SIMULATOR SETUP Initial Conditions:

IC-11 Triggers:

Assign ZA424 ON to Trigger 1 (A-04 2-4, CLEANUP DISCH PRESS HI/LO)

Malfunctions:

None Overrides:

None Remotes:

None Special Instructions Insert a scram (perform immediate and hard card scram actions)

Allow RPV level to rise to ~ 200 inches. Ensure alarm A-07 2-2 is sealed in.

LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 3 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit Two is in MODE 3 following a reactor scram.
2. RPV Water level band is 166 to 206 inches.
3. Radwaste Control Room has been notified, and sufficient capacity exists for reject.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to:

  • Establish RWCU reject to Radwaste in accordance with the RWCU Hard Card (RWCU Instructional Aid RWCU Operation for EOPs).
  • Lower RPV level to a target of 187 inches.

LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 4 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

NOTE: Once hard card has been obtained, provide candidate with paper copy of the RWCU Instructional Aid - RWCU Operation for EOPs Step 1 - Obtain RWCU Instructional Aid RWCU Operation for EOPs.

Obtains current revision of RWCU Instructional Aid RWCU Operation for EOPs (Hard Card).

SAT/UNSAT TIME START:

Step 2 - Open one of the following valves as directed by the Unit CRS to align RWCU reject flow: IF condenser hotwells are NOT available, OR Unit CRS directs reject to Radwaste, THEN open G31-F035.

The control switch for G31-F035, Reject To Radwaste Vlv, is placed to OPEN and spring return to NEUT. The red light come is observed ON and the green light observed OFF.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - IF rejecting to Radwaste, THEN notify the Radwaste Control Room Identifies Radwaste Control has been notified or Radwaste Control Room is notified of aligning RWCU reject to Radwaste.

SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Slowly throttle open G31-F033 to establish less than or equal to 105 gpm reject flow rate.

The knob for the G31-F033, RWCU Reject Flow Control Vlv, is slowly rotated in the clockwise direction to establish flow at > 0 gpm but 105 gpm on G31-FI-R602, Reject Flow.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT NOTE: ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS HERE: A-04 (2-4) will be received. G31-F033 will fail to close.

SIM OP: When reject flow has been established to Radwaste, insert Trigger 1.

LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 5 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE Step 5 - Acknowledge and report A-04 (2-4), CLEANUP DISCH PRESS HI/LO.

A-04 (2-4) is acknowledged and CLEANUP DISCH PRESS HI/LO is reported to the CRS.

SAT/UNSAT Step 6 - Respond per APP A-04 2-4 and recognize an auto action failed to occur (G31-F033 failed to close).

APP A-04 2-4 is obtained and RWCU Reject Flow Control Vlv, G31-F033 is verified to have not auto-closed.

SAT/UNSAT Step 7 - Close the G31-F033.

The knob for the G31-F033, RWCU Reject Flow Control Vlv, is rotated in the counter-clockwise direction until it is at 0.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 8 - Notify the CRS that the G31-F033 failed to auto-close, but was manually closed.

The CRS is notified that the G31-F033 failed to auto-close, but was manually closed .

SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: When reject flow has been secured and the CRS has been notified, inform the trainee that another operator will perform he rest of the APP actions.

TERMINATING CUE: When the G31-F033 has been closed, this JPM is complete TIME COMPLETED:

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 6 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Critical Action required to establish reject to Radwaste.

3 Not Critical Communication 4 Critical Action required to establish reject to Radwaste.

5 Not Critical Communication 6 Not Critical Observation of indications.

7 Critical Necessary action per APP.

8 Not Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM written for 2016 Initial NRC exam.

LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 7 of 9 Rev. 0

REDUCE RPV WATER LEVEL USING RWCU TO RADWASTE Validation Time: 10 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes X No EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-014-A03 Page 8 of 9 Rev. 0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit Two is in MODE 3 following a reactor scram.
2. RPV Water level band is 166 to 206 inches.
3. Radwaste Control Room has been notified, and sufficient capacity exists for reject.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to:

  • Establish RWCU reject to Radwaste in accordance with the RWCU Hard Card (RWCU Instructional Aid RWCU Operation for EOPs).
  • Lower RPV level to a target of 187 inches.

Page 9 of 9

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM E - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO LESSON TITLE: VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 REVISION NO: 8 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Grant Newton 9/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 1 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

RELATED TASKS:

261008B101 Perform Normal Primary Containment Venting K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

261000 A4.01 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the Control Room Off site Release Rate

REFERENCES:

2OP-10,Section 6.3.2-Venting Containment Via SBGT TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

9 Radioactivity Release SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS None LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 2 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Recommended Initial Conditions IC-11, 100% Power, BOC Required Plant Conditions

1. Drywell Pressure above 0.5 psig SLOWLY rising or stable, AND below 1.8 psig.

Triggers Trigger 1 Q6225LGT CAC-V23 Green Lamp = False.

Malfunctions None Overrides Event Panel Tag Title Value Activate Deactivate (ramp rate) Time Time (sec)

(sec)

E1 XU-3 G5B02G15 Main Stack Radiation 2.48 / 2 min 0 SEC N/A Remotes None Special Instructions

1. Secure Drywell Coolers 2C and 2D Fans 1 and 2
2. Allow drywell pressure to rise to 0.6 psig as indicated on CAC-PI-2685-1 on XU-51.
3. Restart Drywell Coolers 2D Fan 2 and allow Drywell pressure to stabilize.
4. Override Drywell Cooler 2C Fans 1 and 2 and Drywell Cooler 2D Fan 1 control switches OFF LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 3 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None.

EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. A marked up copy of 2OP-10, Section 6.3.2 WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Drywell pressure is above normal due to a partial loss of Drywell Cooling.
2. Standby Gas Treatment System is in the Standby Alignment.
3. The plant stack radiation monitor is in service and CAC-CS-5519, CAC Purge Vent Isolation Override is in OFF.
4. ERFIS is unavailable.

INITIATING CUE:

The Unit CRS directs you to vent the Drywell via Standby Gas Treatment, and inform him (her) when drywell pressure has been reduced below 0.5 psig.

LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 4 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 1 - Obtain copy of 2OP-10 Standby Gas Treatment System Operating Procedure, Section 6.3.2.

Copy of 2OP-10 Standby Gas Treatment System Operating Procedure, Section 6.3.2 is obtained.

SAT/UNSAT TIME START: ___________

Step 2 - Record 2-D12-RR-R600B (Stack Rad Monitor) digital point display.

Records the 2-D12-RR-R600B (Stack Rad Monitor) digital point display in the space provided on step 6.3.2.2a (value of ~1.12 E1 or 11.2).

SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - Multiply the value obtained in Step 2.a by 1.5 to obtain the value for a 50% rise in stack radiation monitor reading.

Records the value obtained in step 6.3.2.2a (~1.12 E1 or 11.2) in the space provided on step 6.3.2.2b. Multiplies the value by 1.5, and records the product

(~1.68 E1 or 16.8) in the space provided in step 6.3.2.2b.

SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: If asked, sign the procedure as the IV for the calculation. Do not change the value if calculated incorrectly.

Step 4 - Close 2-VA-2D-BFV-RB (Reactor Building SBGT Train 2A Inlet Valve).

Reactor Building SBGT Train 2A Inlet Valve 2-VA-2D-BFV-RB switch is rotated counterclockwise to the close position and held (throttle valve) for 10 seconds after the red light is extinguished and the green light is illuminated at which time it can be released to the neutral position. 2-VA-2D-BFV-RB is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT Step 5 - Close 2-VA-2H-BFV-RB (Reactor Building SBGT Train 2B Inlet Valve).

Reactor Building SBGT Train 2B Inlet Valve 2-VA-2H-BFV-RB switch is rotated counterclockwise to the close position and held (throttle valve) for 10 seconds after the red light is extinguished and the green light is illuminated at which time it can be released to the neutral position. 2-VA-2H-BFV-RB is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 5 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

Step 6 - Open 2-VA-2F-BFV-RB (SBGT DW Suct Damper).

SBGT DW Suction Damper 2-VA-2F-BFV-RB control switch is rotated clockwise to the open position and then released. Observes red light illuminates and the green light goes out. 2-VA-2F-BFV-RB is open* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: If asked as CRS, direct performer to vent the drywell only.

Step 7 - Open 2-CAC-V9 (DW Purge Exh Vlv).

DW Purge Exh Vlv 2-CAC-V9 switch is rotated clockwise from the close position to the open position and then released to the neutral position. Observes the red light illuminates and the green light goes out. 2-CAC-V9 is open* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT SIM OP: When CAC-V23 is opened, verify Trigger 1 initiates to ramp Main Stack Rad Monitor value.

Step 8 - Open 2-CAC-V23 (DW Purge Exh Vlv).

DW Purge Exh Vlv 2-CAC-V23 switch is rotated clockwise from the close position to the open position and then released to the neutral position. Observes the red light illuminates and the green light goes out. 2-CAC-V23 is open* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: If requested as CRS, inform performer that it is desired to vent from the drywell head (additional vent capacity is desired).

Step 9 - IF additional vent capacity is desired, THEN open 2-CAC-V49 ( DW Head Purge Exh Vlv).

2-CAC-V49 switch is rotated clockwise from the close position to the open position and then released to the neutral position. Observes the red light illuminates and the green light goes out. 2-CAC-V49 is open.

SAT/UNSAT Step 10 - IF additional vent capacity is desired, THEN open 2-CAC-V50 ( DW Head Purge Exh Vlv).

2-CAC-V50 switch is rotated clockwise from the close position to the open position and then released to the neutral position. Observes the red light illuminates and the green light goes out. 2-CAC-V50 is open.

SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 6 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

Step 11 - On Panel XU-3, monitor 2-D12-RR-R600B (Stack Rad Monitor) for a rise in activity during the performance of this procedure.

Monitors 2-D12-RR-R600B for a rise in activity, and determines Stack Rad Monitor reading has risen by 50%.

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: It is critical for at least one valve to be closed in each vent path that is open, i.e., CAC-V23 or CAC-V9, AND, CAC-V49 or CAC-V50, or that the primary containment suction valve VA-2F-BFV-RB is closed to isolate the release path.

SIM OP: When the vent path has been isolated, delete the meter override on the Main Stack Rad Monitor.

PROMPT: If the examinee informs the Unit CRS that the Main Stack has risen by >50%, direct examinee as Unit CRS to perform required actions for the increase.

NOTE: Either Step 12 OR Step 13 is CRITICAL.

PROMPT: Another operator is available to perform Independent Verifications.

    • ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS AT STEP 12**

Step 12 - IF stack radiation rises to greater than the value determined in Section 6.3.2 Step 2.b, THEN perform the following to secure venting the drywell: Close 2-CAC-V23 (DW Purge Exh Vlv).

2-CAC-V23 control switch is rotated counterclockwise to the close position.

Observes the red light goes out and the green light illuminates. 2-CAC-V23 is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT Step 13 - IF stack radiation rises to greater than the value determined in Section 6.3.2 Step 2.b, THEN perform the following to secure venting the drywell Close 2-CAC-V9 (Drywell Purge Exh Vlv).

2-CAC-V9 control switch is rotated counterclockwise to the close position.

Observes the red light goes out and the green light illuminates. 2-CAC-V9 is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT NOTE: Either Step 14 OR Step 15 is CRITICAL if the 2-CAC-49 and V50 were opened.

LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 7 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

Step 14 - IF stack radiation rises to greater than the value determined in Section 6.3.2 Step 2.b, THEN perform the following to secure venting the drywell Ensure 2-CAC-V49 (DW Head Purge Exh Vlv) is CLOSED.

2-CAC-V49 control switch is rotated counterclockwise to the close position.

Observes the red light goes out and the green light illuminates. 2-CAC-V49 is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT Step 15 - IF stack radiation rises to greater than the value determined in Section 6.3.2 Step 2.b, THEN perform the following to secure venting the drywell Ensure 2-CAC-V50 (DW Head Purge Exh Vlv) is CLOSED.

2-CAC-V50 control switch is rotated counterclockwise to the close position.

Observes the red light goes out and the green light illuminates. 2-CAC-V50 is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: If asked, inform examinee as Unit CRS that E&RC has been notified to sample primary containment, and to reference E&RC 2020 Setpoint Determinations for Gaseous Radiation Monitors (Noble Gas Instantaneous Release Rate Determination).

NOTE: Step 16 is not critical if either step 12 or 13 AND either 14 or 15 was completed SAT.

Release path may be isolated by closing 1 valve in each vent path OR by closing the common isolation in Step 16.

Step 16 - CLOSE SBGT DW SUCT DAMPER, 2-VA-2F-BFV-RB.

SBGT DW Suction Damper 2-VA-2F-BFV-RB control switch is rotated counter-clockwise to the closed position and then released. Observes green light illuminates and the red light goes out. 2-VA-2F-BFV-RB is closed* (*critical).

    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT NOTE: The following valves would auto open on SBGT Initiation therefore Steps 17 and 18 are NOT critical.

Step 17 - Open 2-VA-2H-BFV-RB (SBGT Train 2B Reactor Building Suction Valve).

Verifies 2-VA-2H-BFV-RB indicates full open. Observes green light out and the red light lit. 2-VA-2H-BFV-RB is full open.

SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 8 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

Step 18 - Open 2-VA-2D-BFV-RB (SBGT Train 2A Reactor Building Suction Valve).

Verifies 2-VA-2D-BFV-RB indicates full open. Observes green light out and the red light lit. 2-VA-2D-BFV-RB is full open.

SAT/UNSAT PROMT: If asked, inform examinee as Unit CRS that another operator is standing by to perform 0PT-02.3.1b, Suppression Pool to Drywell Vacuum Breaker Position Check.

Step 19 - Inform Unit CRS that venting is secured due to increase of 50% in Main Stack Rad Monitor reading.

Unit CRS is informed venting is secured due to increase of 50% in Main Stack Rad Monitor reading.

SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When Primary containment Venting has been secured and the Unit CRS is notified, this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 9 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Not Critical Readings 3 Not Critical Readings 4 Critical Necessary for venting alignment 5 Critical Necessary for venting alignment 6 Critical Necessary for venting alignment 7 Critical Necessary for venting alignment 8 Critical Necessary for venting alignment 9 Not Critical Additional venting alignment 10 Not Critical Additional venting alignment 11 Not Critical Monitoring 12 Critical Communication 13 Critical Necessary for termination of release 14 Critical Necessary for termination of release 15 Critical Necessary for termination of release 16 Critical Necessary for termination of release 17 Not Critical Auto-action for securing vent 18 Not Critical Auto-action for securing vent 19 Not Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

8 Enhanced Standards for JPM steps Added Critical Step delineation Fixed numbering 7 Updated to the new JPM template.

(Provide sufficient detail for reviewers and evaluators to understand the scope of any technical and/or administrative changes).

LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 10 of 12 Rev.8

VENT THE DRYWELL PER OP-10 W/ STACK RAD MONITOR INCREASE >50%

Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes X No EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-010-A02 Page 11 of 12 Rev.8

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Drywell pressure is above normal due to a partial loss of Drywell Cooling.
2. Standby Gas Treatment System is in the Standby Alignment.
3. The plant stack radiation monitor is in service and CAC-CS-5519, CAC Purge Vent Isolation Override is in OFF.
4. ERFIS is unavailable.

INITIATING CUE:

The Unit CRS directs you to vent the Drywell via Standby Gas Treatment, and inform him (her) when drywell pressure has been reduced below 0.5 psig.

Page 12 of 12

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM F - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO LESSON TITLE: Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 REVISION NO: 0 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Dwayne Wolf Grant Newton 9/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 1 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB RELATED TASKS:

275002B101 Startup The Circulating Water System Per OP-29 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

400000 A4.01 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: CCW indications and control.

REFERENCES:

2OP-29, Section 6.3.27, Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

8 - Plant Service Systems (Component Cooling Water System)

LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 2 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB SETUP INSTRUCTIONS SIMULATOR SETUP Initial Conditions

1. Recommended Initial Conditions IC-11
2. Required Plant Conditions None.

Malfunctions:

None.

Special Instructions None LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 3 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. An Auxiliary operator is stationed at Caswell Beach.
2. All Section 5.0 prerequisites of 2OP-29, Circulating Water System are met.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to place Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B in service, and secure the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A IAW 2OP-29 Section 6.3.27,Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB. Inform the CRS when complete.

LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 4 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 0 - May perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee may cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Am I using appropriate gloves? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

Step 1 - Obtain current revision of 2OP-29 Section 6.3.27.

Provide current revision of 2OP-29 Section 6.3.27.

SAT/UNSAT TIME START:

PROMPT: When contacted as the Auxiliary Operator at Caswell Beach, acknowledge the communication, and report that you are standing by for the pump shift.

Step 2 - Establish communication with Auxiliary Operator at Caswell Beach.

Contacts the AO at Caswell Beach.

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: When the Point Select push button is depressed it initiates a 10 second window for starting or stopping Lube Water pumps. Place keeping of the pump start steps and pump stop steps may be deferred until after the Lube Water pump is running or stopped.

Step 3 - Start the non-operating Bearing Lube Water pump as follows:

a. Depress Point Select push button for the selected Bearing Lube Water pump.

Depresses Point Select push button for the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B on Panel XU-2 and the checkback lamp comes ON.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 5 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB Step 4 - Start the non-operating Bearing Lube Water pump as follows:

b. WHEN checkback lamp in the selected point push button comes ON, THEN place the Bearing Lube Water pump control switch to START.

Places the control switch for the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B to START, within 10 seconds of the checkback lamp for the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B point push button coming ON and the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B starts.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT PROMPT: When contacted as the Auxiliary Operator at Caswell Beach, acknowledge the communication , and report a good start on the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B.

Step 5 - Start the non-operating Bearing Lube Water pump as follows:

c. Confirm with the Auxiliary Operator that the pump starts without unusual noise or cavitation.

Confirms with the Auxiliary Operator that the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B has started without unusual noise or cavitation.

SAT/UNSAT Step 6 - Stop the previously operating Bearing Lube Water pump as follows:

a. Depress Point Select push button for the selected Bearing Lube Water pump.

Depresses Point Select push button for the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A on Panel XU-2 and the checkback lamp comes ON.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT Step 7 - Stop the previously operating Bearing Lube Water pump as follows:
b. WHEN checkback lamp in the selected point push button comes ON, THEN place the Bearing Lube Water pump control switch to STOP.

Places the control switch for the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A to STOP, within 10 seconds of the checkback lamp for the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A point push button coming ON and the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A stops.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 6 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB PROMPT: When contacted as the Auxiliary Operator at Caswell Beach, acknowledge the communication , and report that the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A has stopped, and that lube water flow is adequate for all CWOD pumps.

Step 8 - Stop the non-operating Bearing Lube Water pump as follows:

c. Confirm with the Auxiliary Operator that the pump stops.

Confirms with the Auxiliary Operator that the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A has stopped.

SAT/UNSAT Step 9 - Informs CRS that the Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps have been shifted with the 2B pump now running and the 2A pump secured.

Informs CRS that the pump shift is complete.

SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: Once Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B is running ,pump 2A is secured, and the CRS has been notified , the JPM can be terminated.

TIME COMPLETED:

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 7 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Not Critical Communication 3 Critical Action required to start pump 4 Critical Action required to start pump 5 Not Critical Communication 6 Critical Action required to stop pump 7 Critical Action required to stop pump 8 Not Critical Communication 9 Not Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM written for 2016 Initial NRC exam.

LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 8 of 10 Rev. 0

Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB Validation Time: 10 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-029-01 Page 9 of 10 Rev. 0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. An Auxiliary operator is stationed at Caswell Beach.
2. All Section 5.0 prerequisites of 2OP-29, Circulating Water System are met.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to place Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2B in service, and secure the Caswell Beach Bearing Lube Water pump 2A IAW 2OP-29 Section 6.3.27,Shifting Caswell Beach Lube Water Pumps From The RTGB. Inform the CRS when complete.

Page 10 of 10

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM G - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO LESSON TITLE: SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 REVISION NO: 3 Dan Hulgin 08/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 09/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Dwayne Wolf 09/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 1 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM RELATED TASKS:

214202B101 Determine The RWM Substitute Rod Position For A Failed Reed Switch Position Indicator Per OP-07 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

201006 A4.06 3.2/3.2 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: Selected rod position indication

REFERENCES:

2OP-07, Section 6.3.11 Determination Of The RWM Substitute Position 0OI-53, Rod Worth Minimizer (NUMAC-RWM)

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

7 Instrumentation SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS None LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 2 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM SETUP INSTRUCTIONS Recommended Initial Conditions IC-11, 100% Power, BOC Required Plant Conditions Fail the Reed switch for Control Rod 22-03 position 48.

Triggers None Malfunctions System Tag Title Value RD RD179M Reed Switch Failure Rod 22-03 48 Overrides None Remotes None Special Instructions None LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 3 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None.

EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. The applicable copy of 2OP-07, Section 6.3.11 WILL be provided to the performer.
2. If requested, a copy of 0OI-53, WILL be provided to the performer.
3. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
4. This JPM will be performed in the simulator on Unit Two.

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Control Rod 22-03 has just been positioned at position 48.
2. A valid rod position has NOT been determined.
3. Prerequisites listed in Section 5.0 of 2OP-07 are met.
4. The on duty Reactor Engineer has been notified.
5. The Unit CRS has reviewed Technical Specifications for applicability and has given permission to perform this procedure.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed to enter a substitute value for Control Rod 22 03 into the RWM, and inform the CRS when complete.

LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 4 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 1 - Obtain a copy of 2OP-07, Reactor Manual Control System Operating Procedure, Section 6.3.11.

Copy of 2OP-07, Reactor Manual Control System Operating Procedure, Section 6.3.11 is obtained.

SAT/UNSAT TIME START: ___________

PROMPT: Role play as a Concurrent Verification, if requested. DO NOT correct the performer.

PROMPT: Role play as CRS, to initial Steps 6.3.11.2, 4 & 5 when asked.

Step 2 - Using Concurrent Verification, Insert or withdraw control rod one additional notch to an operable control rod reed switch position indicator.

  • Turns on Rod Select Power by placing the control switch to ON.
  • Inserts Control Rod 22-03 to position 46 using the Rod Movement control switch in the IN position for one notch.

Records Control Rod 22-03 at position 46 for step 6.3.11.6.c in the space labeled Operable Control Rod Reed Switch Position.

SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 5 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM Step 4 - Restore control rod to the position of the failed control rod reed switch position indicator.

  • May use continuous withdraw and perform an over travel check -OR- May single notch out to 48 and then attempt to notch out past position 48.
    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT Step 5 - Ensure inferred position offered by the RWM deviates by one notch and in the correct direction from the position determined in Section 6.3.11 Step 6.c.

Verifies RWM infers substitute value of 48.

SAT/UNSAT Step 6 - Record the inferred rod position below.

Records 48 for step 6.3.11.6.g in the space labeled Inferred Position.

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: 0OI-53 may be used for guidance in performance of step 7.

Step 7 - IF a valid inferred position from the RWM OR valid rod position determined by appropriate methods (as identified in Section 6.1.1) has been obtained, THEN perform the following: Substitute the valid rod position into RWM.

  • At the RWM Operator's Console on the RTGB, depresses the ETC softkey to obtain the SUBSTITUTE OPTIONS softkey.
  • Depresses the SUBSTITUTE OPTIONS softkey to change to the SUBSTITUTE OPTION screen.
  • Verifies RWM offers an inferred position of 48 as the substitute position or depresses the increment/decrement softkey to adjust the substitute position to 48.
  • Depresses the ENTER SUBSTITUTE softkey.
  • Depresses the EXIT softkey to return to the main menu screen
  • 48 substituted as the position for Control Rod 22-03* (critical*).
    • CRITICAL STEP**SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 6 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM PROMPT: Inform trainee as the Unit CRS that Reactor Engineer will enter the substitute value in the PPC. Also another operator will execute a CORE MON, and make the Log entries.

Step 8 - Notify Unit CRS that a substitute value of 48 has been entered for Control Rod 22-03 per OP-7.0.

Unit CRS notified.

SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When Control rod 22-03 has been given a substitute position of 48 in the RWM, and the CRS has been notified, this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 7 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Critical Rod selected is necessary to substitute rod position in step 7. Rod at position 46 is necessary for RWM to infer correct position.

3 Not Critical Recording value 4 Critical Rod at position 48 is necessary for RWM to infer correct position.

5 Not Critical Verification 6 Not Critical Recording value 7 Critical Necessary to substitute value.

8 Not Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

3 New Format.

Critical Steps added based on necessity for RWM inferred position.

Standards enhanced Critical Step delineation table added.

Changed SCO to CRS.

Corrected procedure section.

Added additional Notes and Prompts Validation time changed to 15 minutes based on validators time.

2 Convert to Word, changed title from LOR to LOT LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 8 of 14 Rev.3

SUBSTITUTING A CONTROL ROD POSITION INTO THE RWM Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-007-B02 Page 9 of 14 Rev.3

C ATTACHMENT 5 Continuous Page 1 of 4 Use Control Rod Movement The purpose of this attachment is to document the rod pattern prior to power change.

Enter the rod position information or attach Display 810 Edit.

Unit: 2 51 48 48 48 48 48 47 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 43 48 48 48 48 48 36 48 48 48 48 48 39 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 35 48 48 48 48 08 48 00 48 08 48 48 48 48 31 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 27 48 48 36 48 00 48 48 48 00 48 36 48 48 23 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 19 48 48 48 48 08 48 00 48 08 48 48 48 48 15 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 11 48 48 48 48 48 36 48 48 48 48 48 07 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 03 48 48 48 48 48 02 06 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46 50 Prepared by: Bryan Wester Date Today Reactor Engineer Verified by: John Miller Date Today Reactor Engineer or SRO Approved by: Jake Beamer Date Today Unit CRS 0ENP-24.5 Rev. 9 Page 17 of 23

ATTACHMENT 5 C Continuous Page 2 of 4 Use Control Rod Movement Individual Rod Movement Instructions Sheet 1 of 1 SRO Initials: JB Control Rod Correct Rod Control Rod Licensed Overtravel Full Out Second Comments Selected/Verified (CV) Position Operator Check Position Licensed To Check Operator NOTE 3 NOTE 1 NOTE 2 22-03 / / / 46 22-03 / / / 48

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

- / / /

0ENP-24.5 Rev. 9 Page 18 of 23

ATTACHMENT 5 C Continuous Page 3 of 4 Use Control Rod Movement NOTE 1: WHEN a control rod is withdrawn to the Full Out position, either MAINTAIN the continuous withdrawal signal for at least 3 to 5 seconds OR APPLY a separate notch withdrawal signal, AND PERFORM the following rod coupling integrity check:

- CONFIRM ROD OVER TRAVEL (A-05 4-2) annunciator does NOT alarm. (SR 3.1.3.4)

- CONFIRM rod full out light is not lost.

- CONFIRM rod position indication on the four-rod display indicates position 48.

- CONFIRM ROD DRIFT (A-05 3-2) annunciator does NOT alarm.

NOTE 2: VERIFY the rod reed switch position indicator corresponds to the control rod position indicated by the Full Out reed switch.

NOTE 3: Concurrent Verification (CV) of rod selection required prior to rod movement.

Additional (CV) signoffs for subsequent rod selection following a deselect.

0ENP-24.5 Rev. 9 Page 19 of 23

ATTACHMENT 5 Page 4 of 4 Control Rod Movement Other Instructions: Performing movement of Control Rod 22-03 to determine RWM substitute position.

Date/Time Completed Performed By (Print) Initials Reviewed By: Unit CRS

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Control Rod 22-03 has just been positioned at position 48.
2. A valid rod position has NOT been determined.
3. Prerequisites listed in Section 5.0 of 2OP-07 are met.
4. The on duty Reactor Engineer has been notified.
5. The Unit CRS has reviewed Technical Specifications for applicability and has given permission to perform this procedure.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed to enter a substitute value for Control Rod 22-03 into the RWM, and inform the CRS when complete.

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE SIM JPM H - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO LESSON TITLE: Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves LESSON NUMBER: LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 REVISION NO: 0 Lou Sosler 9/11/2015 PREPARER / DATE John Biggs 9/15/2015 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Brian Moschet 9/11/2015 Derek Pickett 9/10/2015 VALIDATOR / DATE Jerry Pierce 9/24/2015 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Jim Barry 9/25/2015 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 1 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves RELATED TASKS:

239201B201, Test Main Steam Isolation Valves per 0PT-40.2.7 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

239001 A4.01 4.2/4.0 Ability to manually operate and/or monitor the MSIVs in the Control Room

REFERENCES:

0PT-40.2.7, Testing of Main Steam Line Isolation Valves After Maintenance 0PT-40.2.8, Main Steam Isolation Valve Closure Test TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

Stop Watch with calibration data SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123):

3 - Pressure Control SIMULATOR SETUP Initial Conditions: Reactor power <50 RTP%

Place Feedwater Control Mode Select switch in 1-ELEM per 2OP-32.

LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 2 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM may be performed on Unit 2.
4. Critical Step Basis
1. Prevents Task Completion
2. May Result in Equipment Damage
3. Affects Public Health and Safety
4. Could Result in Personal Injury
5. Provide copy of 0PT-40.2.7, Acceptance Criteria, Prerequisites, Section 6.2, and Attachment 2, Post Maintenance Testing B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Vlv)

Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit Two startup is in progress following a forced outage to repair MSIV 2B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve.
2. Conditions are such that steam flow can be stopped in the main steam line of the MSIVs being tested.
3. It is not required to stop steam flow in MSL A to perform the slow closure test of B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve.
4. No other tests or maintenance activities are in progress that could provide a half scram signal to the RPS logic.
5. Another operator has placed Feedwater Control Mode Select switch in 1-ELEM per 2OP-32, Condensate and Feedwater System Operating Procedure.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to perform 0PT-40.2.7, Testing of Main Steam Isolation Valve after Maintenance, for MSIV 2B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve ONLY and inform the CRS if the stroke time meets the acceptance criteria.

LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 3 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 1 - Perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee should cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

SAT/UNSAT TIME START: ___________

NOTE: The examinee should be provided a copy of 0PT-40.2.7, Testing of Main Steam Isolation Valve after Maintenance, and given time to review and pre-mark appropriate sections.

PROMPT If asked, a Reactivity Management Team is in place for this test.

Step 2 - Confirm Reactor power is less than 55% RTP Confirmed power less than 55% RTP.

SAT/UNSAT Step 2a - Confirm conditions are such that steam flow can be stopped in the main steam line of the MSIV being tested Confirms steam flow can be stopped in the A Main Steam Line.

SAT/UNSAT PROMPT If asked, No other tests or maintenance activities are in progress that could provide a half scram signal to the RPS logic.

Step 3 - Confirm all MSIVs are open.

Confirmed all MSIVs are open.

SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Confirm Reactor Recirculation system is NOT in single loop operation (SLO)

Confirmed Reactor Recirculation system not in single loop.

SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 4 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves NOTE: Have stop watch ready to give to Examinee.

Step 5 - Obtain a stopwatch and record calibration information.

Stop watch obtained and calibration information recorded.

SAT/UNSAT PROMPT If asked, As the CRS grant permission to perform the test.

Step 5a - Ensures all prerequisites are met.

Verifies all steps in Section 5.0 are met.

SAT/UNSAT Step 5b - Ensures Feedwater Control Mode Select switch, in 1-ELEM per 2OP-32, Condensate and Feedwater System Operating Procedure.

Verifies Feedwater Control Mode Select control switch is in 1 ELEM.

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: IF AT ANY TIME while performing this test in MODE 1, annunciator A-05, 4-6, Main Steam Isol Vlv Not Full Open, is received, THEN suspend this test and determine its cause.

Step 6 - Ensure the following annunciators are clear:

  • A-05, 1-7, Reactor Auto Scram Sys A

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: When this test is performed in MODE 1, reactor pressure, power level, and steam flow are monitored while closing the MSIVs. Any deviation from expected plant response is cause for suspension of this test and notification of the Unit CRS prior to proceeding.

PROMPT It is NOT required to stop steam flow in Main Steam Line A.

NOTE: Performer should NA step 6.2.2.

PROMPT It IS required to perform slow closure (spring closure) test of B21-F022A.

LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 5 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves Step 7 - Depress and hold B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Test) pushbutton until the valve goes CLOSED, approximately 45-60 seconds.

B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Test) pushbutton depressed and held until the valve is CLOSED, green light on, red light off.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 8 - Release B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Test) pushbutton and confirm the valve goes OPEN Pushbutton for B21-F022A released and valve open confirmed.
    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT PROMPT If asked, stroke time testing is required.

NOTE: Operation with both MSIVs closed in a main steam line is minimized to reduce the severity of differential pressure transients when reopening the Outboard MSIV.

Step 9 - Perform stroke time test as follows:

a. Ensure B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Vlv) OPEN.

B21-F022A verified open.

SAT/UNSAT

b. Close B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Vlv) utilizing the pistol grip switch.

B21-F022A pistol grip switch taken to close.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT
c. Record stroke time:

Stroke time recorded.

SAT/UNSAT

d. Enter the measured stroke time from Section 6.2 Step 4.c and calculate the corrected stroke time (Stroke Time from Section 6.2, Step 4.c X 1.1 = Corrected Stroke Time)

Corrected stroke time calculated (acceptance criteria per Att. 2 is 3 to 5 sec)

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 6 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves

e. Record corrected stroke time on Attachment 1 or Attachment 2 Corrected Stroke Time recorded on Attachment 2 SAT/UNSAT NOTE: Step 6.2.5 is NA, as the B21-F028A was not closed previously.

PROMPT If asked, it is required by plant conditions to open B21-F022A.

Step 10 - IF required by plant conditions, THEN open B21-F022A (Inboard MSIV A Vlv).

B21-F022A pistol grip switch taken to open.

SAT/UNSAT NOTE: Step 6.2.7 is N/A NOTE: Annunciator A-7, 4-2, FW Sys Ctrl Trbl, may alarm.

Step 11 - Informs CRS that the stroke time for the Inboard MSIV A is SAT Determines from Attachment 2 that the stroke time for A MSIV is within the Acceptance Criteria.

SAT/UNSAT PROMPT Inform Examinee that another operator will complete the Restoration section of the PT.

TERMINATING CUE: When the 2B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve, has been re-opened after testing and the CRS is notified that the stroke time meets the Acceptance Criteria of the PT this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 7 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2-6 Not Critical Verification of initial conditions and pre-requisites.

7-8 Critical Required actions to complete the test.

9a Not Critical Verification step.

9b Critical Action required to complete the test.

9c Not Critical Recording time not critical to test completion.

9d Critical Calculation of Corrected Stroke Time required to complete task.

9e Not Critical Recording required information.

10 Not Critical Re-opening valve not required to obtain results.

REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM.

LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 8 of 10 Rev 0

Test the Main Steam Isolation Valves Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator X Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-SIM-JP-025-A04 Page 9 of 10 Rev 0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit Two startup is in progress following a forced outage to repair MSIV 2B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve.
2. Conditions are such that steam flow can be stopped in the main steam line of the MSIVs being tested.
3. It is not required to stop steam flow in MSL A to perform the slow closure test of B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve.
4. No other tests or maintenance activities are in progress that could provide a half scram signal to the RPS logic.
5. Another operator has placed Feedwater Control Mode Select switch in 1-ELEM per 2OP-32, Condensate and Feedwater System Operating Procedure.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Unit CRS to perform 0PT-40.2.7, Testing of Main Steam Isolation Valve after Maintenance, for MSIV 2B21-F022A, Inboard MSIV A Valve ONLY and inform the CRS if the stroke time meets the acceptance criteria.

Page 10 of 10

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IP JPM I - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO LESSON TITLE: ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS LESSON NUMBER: AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 REVISION NO: 6 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/07/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Hunter Morris 9/07/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 1 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS RELATED TASKS:

200072B504 Perform Alternate Coolant Injection With Heater Drain Pumps Per LEP-01.

K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

295031 AA1.08 3.8/3.9 Ability to operate alternate injection system systems as they apply to Reactor Water Level Low.

REFERENCES:

0EOP-01-LEP-01, ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

CR104P key for Unit Trip Load Shed Selector switch.

SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

2 Inventory Control AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 2 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Notify SM/CRS of JPM performance prior to commencing In-plant JPM.
2. Determine actual radiological conditions and potentially contaminated areas to achieve ALARA.
3. Ensure all electrical safety requirements are observed.
4. Review Work Practices section prior to conduct of the JPM.
5. DO NOT OPERATE any plant equipment during performance of this JPM.

EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee. 0EOP-01-LEP-01, will be provided to the examinee when asked for.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed on Unit 1or Unit 2.
4. Consider starting this JPM in the Control Room due to the need to obtain a CR104P key for Unit Trip Load Shed Selector Switch as well as for obtaining permission to enter the 4 KV Switchgear area in the Turbine Building
5. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. A low Reactor Water level condition exists on Unit .
2. The CRS is executing the Reactor Vessel Control Procedure (EOP-01-RVCP)
3. RVCP directs use of Alternate Coolant Injection per EOP-01-LEP-01.
4. RPV Pressure is 450 psig.
5. The main condenser is under vacuum.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed to perform the Auxiliary Operator actions for Alternate Coolant Injection, Heater Drain Pump Injection per EOP-01-LEP-01, Section 2.2, and inform the Control Room when all required Auxiliary Operator actions are complete.

AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 3 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 1 - Perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee should cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

SAT / UNSAT TIME START ___________

PROMPT: Inform examinee that LEP-01, Section 2.2.3 Steps 1 through 3 have been completed.

Step 2 - Maintain level in the heater drain tank: Place feedwater heater level controllers to MAN and decrease the air signal to 0% to open the associated feedwater heater level control valves: HD-LC-75 (Feedwater Heater 4A Level Controller).

Places HD-LC-75 Auto/Manual Selector to MAN .

Adjust Controller output to 0% using Manual Control Unit Thumbwheel.

HD-LC-75 in MAN with air signal at 0%* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 3 - Maintain level in the heater drain tank: Place feedwater heater level controllers to MAN and decrease the air signal to 0% to open the associated feedwater heater level control valves: HD-LC-83 (Feedwater Heater 5A Level Controller).

Places HD-LC-83 Auto/Manual Selector to MAN .

Adjust Controller output to 0% using Manual Control Unit Thumbwheel.

HD-LC-83 in MAN with air signal at 0%* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 4 - Maintain level in the heater drain tank: Place feedwater heater level controllers to MAN and decrease the air signal to 0% to open the associated feedwater heater level control valves: HD-LC-79 (Feedwater Heater 4B Level Controller).

Places HD-LC-79 Auto/Manual Selector to MAN .

Adjust Controller output to 0% using Manual Control Unit Thumbwheel.

HD-LC-79 in MAN with air signal at 0%* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 4 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS Step 5 - Maintain level in the heater drain tank: Place feedwater heater level controllers to MAN and decrease the air signal to 0% to open the associated feedwater heater level control valves: HD-LC-87 (Feedwater Heater 5B Level Controller).

Places HD-LC-87 Auto/Manual Selector to MAN .

Adjust Controller output to 0% using Manual Control Unit Thumbwheel.

HD-LC-87 in MAN with air signal at 0%* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 6 - Ensure HD-LC-91 (Heater Drain Deaerator Level Controller) in AUTO.

Verifies HD-LC-91 in AUTO (Auto/Manual Selector in AUTO).

HD-LC-91 in AUTO.

SAT / UNSAT Step 7 - Unit 2 Only: Ensure HD-LC-97 (Heater Drain Deaerator Level Controller) in AUTO.

Verifies HD-LC-97 in AUTO (Controller Mode (Manual or Auto) -A displayed on the controller).

HD-LC-97 in AUTO SAT / UNSAT PROMPT: When informed that AO actions for step 4 are complete, inform examinee that LEP-01, Section 2.2.3 Step 5 through 6 have been completed.

Inform Examinee that Heater Drain Pump 1(2)A is to be started for alternate coolant injection.

NOTE: A CR104P key for Unit Trip Load Shed Selector Switch is located in the RO Desk locked drawer. A key can also be found in the Control room or WCC key lockers.

Heater Drain Pump 1(2)A Unit Trip Load Selector Switch is on BOP Bus 1(2)D.

Permission is required to enter the 4 KV Switchgear area in the Turbine Building.

STEP 8a is to be performed if this JPM is performed on Unit 1.

STEP 8b is to be performed if this JPM is performed on Unit 2.

Step 8a - Place Unit Trip Load Shed Selector Switch for heater drain pump to be started in DISABLED: At Bus 1D, Row H1, Compt AD8 (Htr Drain Pump 1A).

Heater Drain Pump 1A Unit Trip Load Selector Switch is placed in DISABLED.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 5 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS Step 8b - Place Unit Trip Load Shed Selector Switch for heater drain pump to be started in DISABLED: At Bus 2D, Row I1, Compt AD8 (Htr Drain Pump 2A).

Heater Drain Pump 2A Unit Trip Load Selector Switch is placed in DISABLED.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 10 - Inform Control Room AO Actions for Alternate Coolant Injection using Heater Drain Pump Injection are complete.

Control Room informed AO actions per LEP-01, Section 2.2 are complete.

SAT / UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When AO Actions for Alternate Coolant Injection using Heater Drain Pump Injection are complete, this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 6 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection 3 Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection 4 Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection 5 Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection 6 Non Critical Verification 7 Non Critical Verification 8a Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection (UNIT 1) 8b Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection (UNIT 2) 9 Critical Necessary for HDP alternate coolant injection 10 Critical Communication REVISION

SUMMARY

6 New JPM template Critical Step Delineation table added Renumbered steps Corrected procedure section Enhanced standards 5 Added basis for critical steps Minor format changes to cover/signature page Change SCO title to CRS AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 7 of 9 Rev.6

ALTERNATE COOLANT INJECTION LEP HEATER DRAIN PUMPS Validation Time: 10 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate X Actual Unit: 1/ 2 Setting: In-Plant X Simulator Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

AOT-OJT-JP-300-J13 Page 8 of 9 Rev.6

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. A low Reactor Water level condition exists on Unit .
2. The CRS is executing the Reactor Vessel Control Procedure (EOP-01-RVCP)
3. RVCP directs use of Alternate Coolant Injection per EOP-01-LEP-01.
4. RPV Pressure is 450 psig.
5. The main condenser is under vacuum.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed to perform the Auxiliary Operator actions for Alternate Coolant Injection, Heater Drain Pump Injection per EOP-01-LEP-01, Section 2.2, and inform the Control Room when all required Auxiliary Operator actions are complete.

Page 9 of 9

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IP JPM J - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO/USRO LESSON TITLE: REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION LESSON NUMBER: LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 REVISION NO: 0 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/07/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Grant Newton Hunter Morris 9/07/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 1 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION RELATED TASKS:

239006B501 - Perform Remote Shutdown Panel SRV Operation per 0EOP-01-LEP-05.

K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

295016 AA1.08 4.0/4.0 Ability to operate and/or monitor Reactor Pressure as it applies to Control Room Abandonment.

REFERENCES:

0EOP-01-LEP-05, REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

7 Instrumentation LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 2 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Notify SM/CRS of JPM performance prior to commencing In-plant JPM.
2. Determine actual radiological conditions and potentially contaminated areas to achieve ALARA.
3. Ensure all electrical safety requirements are observed.
4. Review Work Practices section prior to conduct of the JPM.
5. DO NOT OPERATE any plant equipment during performance of this JPM.

EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee. 0EOP-01-LEP-05, will be provided to the examinee when asked for.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed on Unit 1or Unit 2.
4. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit _____ is executing 0EOP-01-EDP.
2. Reactor Pressure is 500 psig
3. SRV operation from the Control Room is not successful.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Control Room Supervisor to rapidly depressurize the RPV by opening SRVs B, E, and G from the Unit _____ Remote Shutdown Panel (RSDP) IAW 0EOP-01-LEP-05.

LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 3 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 1 - Perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee should cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

SAT / UNSAT TIME START ___________

NOTE: Special Equipment is located in the following areas:

RO Desk Locked Drawer:

1 LEP toolbox key (LSV-1)

ASSD Toolbox in Control Room:

1 sound-powered phone with extension cord for RO Reactor Building 20' LEP Toolbox 4 T112 keys 1 sound-powered phone with extension cord for RO Step 2 - Notify CRS: RTGB level indicators B21-LI-R604B and C32-PR-R609 (N026B) will be lost.

Notifies the CRS that level indicators B21-LI-R604B and C32-PR-R609 (N026B) will be lost .

SAT / UNSAT Step 3 - Notify CRS: Control of SRV B, E and G from RTGB will be lost.

Notifies the CRS that Control of SRV B, E and G from RTGB will be lost.

SAT / UNSAT Step 4 - Establish communication between RSDP and Control Room.

Establishes communication with the Control Room.

SAT / UNSAT Step 5 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Ensure B21-F013E (Manual Relief E Vlv Close/Open) control switch in CLOSE.

Verifies B21-F013E Close/Open control switch is in CLOSE .

SAT / UNSAT LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 4 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION Step 6 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Place B21-F013E (Manual Relief E Vlv Normal/Local) control switch in LOCAL.

Inserts Key and places B21-F013E Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL. B21-F013E Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 7 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Ensure B21-F013G (Manual Relief E Vlv Close/Open) control switch in CLOSE.

Verifies B21-F013G Close/Open control switch is in CLOSE .

SAT / UNSAT Step 8 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Place B21-F013G (Manual Relief E Vlv Normal/Local) control switch in LOCAL.

Inserts Key and places B21-F013G Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL. B21-F013G Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 9 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Ensure B21-F013B (Manual Relief B Vlv Close/Open) control switch in CLOSE.

Verifies B21-F013B Close/Open control switch is in CLOSE .

SAT / UNSAT Step 10 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Place B21-F013B (Manual Relief E Vlv Normal/Local) control switch in LOCAL.

Inserts Key and places Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL. B21-F013B Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL* (critical*).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 11 - At the Remote Shutdown Panel: Place B21-CS-3345 (Reactor Water Level Normal/Local Switch) in LOCAL to transfer level transmitter B21-LT-N026B output to B21-LI-R604BX.

Inserts Key and places B21-CS-3345 Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL.

B21-F013B Normal/Local control switch in LOCAL.

SAT / UNSAT LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 5 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION PROMPT: If asked, CAC-LI-3342 (Supp Pool Level) is -2 ft.

PROMPT: If asked, B21-LI-R604BX (Reactor Water Level) is 150 inches and reading is valid IAW Caution 1.

Step 12 - Confirm torus water level is greater than -8 feet.

Verifies torus water level greater than -8 feet on CAC-LI-3342 (Supp Pool Level)

SAT / UNSAT Step 13 - Monitor RPV level.

Monitors RPV level on B21-LI-R604BX (Reactor Water Level).

SAT / UNSAT NOTE: SRV B, E, and G can be opened in any sequence. Each SRV being opened is a critical step.

PROMPT: Once SRVs are opened and if asked the status of pressure on C32-PI-3332 (Reactor Pressure). State pressure is lowering on C32-PI-3332 (Reactor Pressure) and is currently 350 psig.

Step 14 - Monitor and control RPV pressure using SRVs B, E and G as directed by Control Room.

Places OPEN/CLOSE control switches to OPEN for:

SRV SAT UNSAT B

E G

Verifies Reactor Pressure is lowering on C32-PI-3332 (Reactor Pressure)

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 15 - Notify the Control Room SRVs B, E, and G are open and reactor pressure is lowering.

Notifies the control room that SRVs B, E, and G are open, and RPV pressure is 350 psig and lowering.:

SAT / UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When SRVs B, E, and G have been opened, and the control room has been notified this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 6 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Non Critical Communication related 3 Non Critical Communication related 4 Non Critical Communication related 5 Non Critical Verification 6 Critical Necessary to open SRV 7 Non Critical Verification 8 Critical Necessary to open SRV 9 Non Critical Verification 10 Critical Necessary to open SRV 11 Non Critical Line up for parameter monitoring 12 Non Critical Parameter monitoring 13 Non Critical Parameter monitoring 14 Critical Necessary to depressurize RPV 15 Non Critical Communication related REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 7 of 9 Rev.0

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL SRV OPERATION Validation Time: 10 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate X Actual Unit: 1/ 2 Setting: In-Plant X Simulator Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-OJT-JP-300-J25 Page 8 of 9 Rev.0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit _____ is executing 0EOP-01-EDP.
2. Reactor Pressure is 500 psig
3. SRV operation from the Control Room is not successful.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Control Room Supervisor to rapidly depressurize the RPV by opening SRVs B, E, and G from the Unit _____ Remote Shutdown Panel (RSDP) IAW 0EOP-01-LEP-05.

Page 9 of 9

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE IP JPM K - 2016 NRC INITIAL EXAM - RO/ISRO/USRO LESSON TITLE: Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure LESSON NUMBER: AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 REVISION NO: 6 Dan Hulgin 8/18/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 9/07/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Hunter Morris 9/07/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 1 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure RELATED TASKS:

262605B104 - Rack in a 480 Volt Electrically Operated Breaker (K-3000) per 1(2)OP-50.

K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

295003 AA1.01 3.7 / 3.8 Ability to Operate and/or Monitor AC Electrical Distribution System as it applies to a partial or complete loss of A.C. power.

REFERENCES:

0EOP-01-SBO-07, 480V E-bus Crosstie TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

Racking tool for 480V Breakers Manual charging handle for 480V Breaker SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

6 (Electrical Distribution)

AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 2 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Notify SM/CRS of JPM performance prior to commencing In-plant JPM.
2. Determine actual radiological conditions and potentially contaminated areas to achieve ALARA.
3. Ensure all electrical safety requirements are observed.
4. Review Work Practices section prior to conduct of the JPM.
5. DO NOT OPERATE any plant equipment during performance of this JPM.

EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee. 0EOP-01-SBO-07, Attachment 1, will be provided to the examinee when asked for.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed on Unit 1.
4. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. A complete Loss of Offsite Power has occurred on both Units.
2. 0EOP-01-SBO-07 is being executed, and Step 2.1.3.11 is ready to be performed.
3. A Flex DG is NOT supplying E6.
4. 480v Crosstie breaker on E5 has been racked in.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Reactor Operator to complete the Auxiliary Operator actions associated with cross-tying 480V Substation E5 to E6 IAW 0EOP-01-SBO-07, Step 2.1.3.11, and inform the Control Room when the E5 to E6 cross-tie breakers are ready to be closed.

AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 3 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step 1 - Perform take a minute at job site prior to beginning task.

Examinee should cover the following questions, as deemed necessary.

What are the hazards in the area? What PPE is required? Tools/PPE inspected prior to use? Energy sources secured/isolated? Is Clearance/Tag Out sufficient? What's the worst that can happen? Any ALARA concerns? Will I affect plant status? HU Tools needed?

SAT / UNSAT TIME START ___________

NOTE: A 480 V racking tool is contained in the DG Building 23 LEP Toolbox.

PROMPT: Inform Examinee that use of electrical safety equipment may be simulated, but that the examinee should state the location of this equipment. Inform Examinee that electrical equipment compartments are NOT to be breached.

NOTE: If requested, pictures will be provided of the internals of the 480 V breaker.

Step 2 - At E6, Row F1, rack in Compt AX1 (Tie Breaker To E5): Confirm locally breaker OPEN.

(Tie breaker to E5) Compt AX1 on Bus E6 verified open as indicated by the green open flag.

SAT / UNSAT PROMPT: If asked, inform the examinee that the locking hasp position is as seen.

Step 3 - At E6, Row F1, rack in Compt AX1 (Tie Breaker To E5): IF necessary, THEN depress locking hasp to allow opening of racking shutter.

Locking hasp DEPRESSED or verified to already be depressed on E6 Compt.

AX1.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT / UNSAT Step 4 - At E6, Row F1, rack in Compt AX1 (Tie Breaker To E5):Rotate racking crank clockwise until breaker stops.

Breaker Compt AX1 on Bus E6 stops in the CONNECT position (racked in and shutter window closes when the racking tool is removed).

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 4 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure PROMPT: As requested, inform the examinee that the closing springs failed to charge as indicated by lack of charging noise when toggle switch turned on and/or lack of spring charged indicator at front of breaker.

    • ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS AT STEP 5**

Step 5 - At E6, Row F1, rack in Compt AX1 (Tie Breaker To E5): Place Charging Power toggle switch to ON, determine springs failed to charge, and Attachment 1, Manually Charging 480v Breaker Charging Springs is required.

Charging power switch for E6 Compt AX1 placed to the ON position, springs determined not charged, and Attachment 1 determined to be used.

SAT / UNSAT NOTE: A manual charging handle for the 480 VAC cross-tie breaker springs is located in the DG Building 23 LEP Toolbox.

Step 6 - Place charging power toggle switch to OFF. (attachment 1)

Charging power toggle switch is OFF (down position).

SAT / UNSAT PROMPT: Provide a picture to the trainee to identify the location of the manual charging lever. The manual charging lever is located at the bottom middle of the 480 VAC breaker. The equipment enclosure should NOT be breached.

Step 7 - Describe the action to open breaker door, and insert manual charging handle behind the breaker compartment door, using 480v breaker pictures.

Manual charging handle is inserted in the breaker.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT Step 8 - (Simulate) Pump manual charging handle until closing springs are charged (clicks into position) and confirm charge is satisfactory by Springs Charged indicator.

Closing springs are fully charged, as indicated by the yellow springs charged indication.

    • CRITICAL STEP ** SAT / UNSAT AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 5 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure Step 9 - (Simulate) Remove manual charging handle and close compartment door.

Manual charging handle removed, compartment door closed.

SAT / UNSAT Step 10 - Place charging power toggle switch to ON.

Charging power toggle switch is ON (up position).

SAT / UNSAT NOTE: Step 2.1.3.12 is N/A, a Flex DG is not supplying E6.

Step 11 - Inform control room that E5-E6 tie breakers are ready to be closed.

Control room contacted and told E5-E6 tie breakers are ready to be closed.

SAT / UNSAT PROMPT: When contacted as control room that E5-E6 tie breakers are ready to be closed, inform examinee to stand clear so the breakers can be closed.

TERMINATING CUE: Substation E6 crosstie breaker is racked in, closing springs charged and is ready to be closed then this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 6 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Administrative 2 Non Critical Verify only. No action required.

3 Critical Required to complete task.

4 Critical Required to complete task.

5 Non Critical Since charging springs are not charged, turning power on accomplishes nothing.

6 Non Critical Places system in original configuration, but does completes action.

7 Critical Action required to complete task.

8 Critical Action required to complete task.

9 Non Critical Actions not required to accomplish task.

10 Non Critical Actions not required to accomplish task.

11 Non Critical Communicates results of actions.

REVISION

SUMMARY

6 Changed 2.1.3.10 to 2.1.3.11 due to procedure numbering change (non-technical change).

Changed wording on steps to match procedure verbiage (non-technical change).

5 Changed Duke logo.

Revised from 0AOP-36.2 to 0EOP-01-SBO-07 Added pictures of the 480v Breaker AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 7 of 11 Rev.6

Racking In E6 Cross-Tie with Breaker Charging Spring Failure Validation Time: 12 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate X Actual Unit: 1 Setting: In-Plant X Simulator Admin Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes X No EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

AOT-OJT-JP-303-13 Page 8 of 11 Rev.6

Page 9 of 11 Page 10 of 11 TASK CONDITIONS:

1. A complete Loss of Offsite Power has occurred on both Units.
2. 0EOP-01-SBO-07 is being executed, and Step 2.1.3.11 is ready to be performed.
3. A Flex DG is NOT supplying E6.
4. 480v Crosstie breaker on E5 has been racked in.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Reactor Operator to complete the Auxiliary Operator actions associated with cross-tying 480V Substation E5 to E6 IAW 0EOP-01-SBO-07, Step 2.1.3.11, and inform the Control Room when the E5 to E6 cross-tie breakers are ready to be closed.

Page 11 of 11

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE LESSON TITLE: PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION LESSON NUMBER: LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 REVISION NO: 0 Daniel Hulgin 09/06/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 09/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Kyle Cooper Dwayne Wolf Hunter Morris 09/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 09/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 09/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION RELATED TASKS:

299201B201 Perform Daily Surveillance Report Per OI-3.1 or OI-3.2 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

GEN 2.1.25 3.9/4.2 Ability to interpret reference materials, such as graphs, curves, tables, etc.

REFERENCES:

2OI-03.2, Reactor Operator Daily Surveillance Report ODCM TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

Student may use calculator SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

Generic (Administrative)

SETUP INSTRUCTIONS None LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 2 of 9 Rev.0

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Readings for D12-RM-K601A, SJAE Off Gas Rad Monitor A, and D12-RM-K601B, SJAE Off Gas Rad Monitor B, have been recorded on the Unit 2 Dayshift RODSR for Saturday 0630-1230.
2. Main Condenser Air Ejector is in operation.
3. HP has reported a local survey reading of 300 mR INITIATING CUE:

RO, and SRO candidates:

You are directed by the Control Room Supervisor to complete item 108, SJAE Off-Gas Radiation Monitors Channel Check, of 2OI-03.2, Reactor Operator Daily Surveillance Report, and circle the appropriate status of the channel check.

  • UNSAT SRO ONLY:

Based on the above information, determine the required actions, if any.

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 3 of 9 Rev.0

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

TIME START: ___________

Step 1 - Record SJAE OFF-Gas Radiation Monitor readings from item 104 & 106 in Table 1.

452 for D12-RM-K601A recorded in SAT block of table 1, and 224 for D12-RM-K601B recorded in SAT block of table 1 .

SAT/UNSAT Step 2 - Determine D12-RM-K601A is the highest reading, and divide by 2.

Value for D12-RM-K601A divided by 2 determined to be 226.

SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - Compare lower reading monitor to value in step 3.

Determines D12-RM-K601B value of 224 is < value in step 3 (226). Determines the channel check is not yet satisfactory.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Contact E&RC health physics to obtain a local reading with an appropriate survey instrument.

Determines Information from the E&RC survey is needed.

SAT/UNSAT Step 5 - Record local survey instrument reading Records 300 in local survey instrument reading SAT block in attachment 1 .

SAT/UNSAT Step 6 - Multiply local survey instrument reading by 0.75 Determines local instrument times 0.75 is 225.

SAT/UNSAT LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 4 of 9 Rev.0

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION Step 7 - Compare lower reading monitor to local survey results Determines D12-RM-K601B value of 224 is <0.75 of the local survey results (225), and therefore, the channel check is unsatisfactory.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When the results of the survey have been compared to D12-RM-K601B and the evaluation of the channel check has been made, this JPM is complete for RO candidates.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 5 of 9 Rev.0

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION SRO Candidates ONLY:

NOTE: Candidate may initiate a tracking LCO for operable rad monitor.

Step 8 - Determines the deviation is non-conservative, and instrument is declared inoperable.

One rad monitor declared inoperable. ODCM 7.3.2 Condition A is applicable and table7.3.2-1 is referenced with no additional required compensatory measures.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When evaluation of the channel check has been made, and ODCM condition has been determined, this JPM is complete for SRO candidates.

TIME COMPLETED _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 6 of 9 Rev.0

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical Documentation of data in block 2 Not Critical Math not documented 3 Critical Error would prevent correct channel check 4 Not Critical From task conditions 5 Not Critical Documentation of data in block 6 Not Critical Math not documented 7 Critical Error would prevent correct channel check 8 Critical Correct ODCM actions required REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 7 of 9 Rev.0

PERFORM SJAE OFF-GAS RADIATION MONITORS CHANNEL CHECK CALCULATION Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator Admin X Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D15 Page 8 of 9 Rev.0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Readings for D12-RM-K601A, SJAE Off Gas Rad Monitor A, and D12-RM-K601B, SJAE Off Gas Rad Monitor B, have been recorded on the Unit 2 Dayshift RODSR for Saturday 0630-1230.
2. Main Condenser Air Ejector is in operation.
3. HP has reported a local survey reading of 300 mR INITIATING CUE:

RO, and SRO candidates:

You are directed by the Control Room Supervisor to complete item 108, SJAE Off-Gas Radiation Monitors Channel Check, of 2OI-03.2, Reactor Operator Daily Surveillance Report, and circle the appropriate status of the channel check.

  • UNSAT SRO ONLY:

Based on the above information, determine the required actions, if any.

Page 9 of 9

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE LESSON TITLE: DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A LESSON NUMBER: LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 REVISION NO: 4 Daniel Hulgin 09/6/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 09/6/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Hunter Morris 09/06/16 Kyle Cooper 09/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 9/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 9/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 1 of 12 Rev.4

DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A RELATED TASKS:

200602B501 Determine Primary Containment water level per EOP-01-UG K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

GEN 2.1.7 4.4/4.7 Ability to evaluate plant performance and make operational judgments based on operating characteristics, reactor behavior, and instrument interpretation.

REFERENCES:

0EOP-01-UG 0AOP-36.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

Student may use calculator SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

Administrative - Conduct Of Operations SETUP INSTRUCTIONS None LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 2 of 12 Rev.4

DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Notify SM/CRS of JPM performance prior to commencing In-plant JPM.
2. Determine actual radiological conditions and potentially contaminated areas to achieve ALARA.
3. Ensure all electrical safety requirements are observed.
4. Review Work Practices section prior to conduct of the JPM.
5. DO NOT OPERATE any plant equipment during performance of this JPM.

EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)

1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM will be performed Unit 2
4. This is an administrative JPM designed to be administered in any setting and may be administered to multiple candidates simultaneously in a classroom setting
5. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. An accident is in progress on Unit Two. The Unit CRS is directing actions of EOP RVCP and EOP-02-PCCP.
2. 480 VAC Substation E7 is de-energized due to a fault. All other electrical buses are energized.
3. ERFIS is unavailable
4. See Attachment 1 for the Containment parameter readings that are available on the RTGB.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed to determine Primary Containment water level per EOP-01-UG, Attachment 36. Determine the current region of operation (Safe/Unsafe) on Primary Containment Pressure Limit A (PCPL-A)

LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 3 of 12 Rev.4

DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

TIME START: ___________

Step 1 - Determine suppression pool water level instruments cannot be used to determine primary containment water level since CAC-LI-2601-1 is above +2 feet and CAC-LR-2602 is powered from E7 and is de-energized.

Determine suppression pool water level instruments cannot be used to determine primary containment water.

SAT/UNSAT Step 2 - Determine suppression chamber pressure instruments cannot be used to determine primary containment water level since CAC-PI-1257-2B is not less than 75 psig and CAC-PI-1257-2A is powered from E7 and is de-energized Determine suppression chamber pressure instruments cannot be used to determine primary containment water.

SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - Determine primary containment water level should be calculated using CAC-PI-1230 and CAC-PI-4176 since both instruments have power and suppression chamber pressure is not less than 75 psig, determine CAC-PR-1257-1 is powered from E7 and should not be used.

Determine primary containment water level should be calculated using CAC-PI-1230 and CAC-PI-4176.

SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Calculate primary containment water level to be 2.3 ft/psi (72.5 - 67.5) + 28.5 ft.

Primary containment water level calculated to be 40 feet.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 5 - Determine operation to be in the safe region of PCPL-A using the PCPL-A graph, calculated primary containment water level and CAC-PI-4176 for drywell pressure, (or by using CAC-PI-1230 reading <70 psig).

Determine PCPL-A is in the Safe region

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 4 of 12 Rev.4

DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A TERMINATING CUE: When primary containment water level is calculated, and PCPL-A is determined to be in the Safe region, this JPM is complete TIME COMPLETED: _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Not Critical JPM can still be completed without performing this step.

2 Not Critical JPM can still be completed without performing this step.

3 Not Critical JPM can still be completed without performing this step.

4 Critical Calculation required to complete this JPM.

5 Critical Determination required to complete this JPM.

REVISION

SUMMARY

4 New template incorporated.

Modified torus press o read slightly >75 psig in att 1 Removed take a minute (step 1) reordered steps.

3 Changed Unit SCO to Unit CRS.

No technical changes.

2 Revised to new JPM Template, Revision 3.

No technical changes LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 5 of 12 Rev.4

DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A EXAM KEY DO NOT GIVE TO STUDENTS EXAM KEY DO NOT GIVE TO STUDENTS LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 6 of 12 Rev.4

DETERMINE PRIMARY CONTAINMENT WATER LEVEL AND EVALUATE PCPL-A Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator Admin X Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-ADM-JP-300-B00 Page 7 of 12 Rev.4

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. An accident is in progress on Unit Two. The Unit CRS is directing actions of EOP-01-RVCP and EOP-02-PCCP.
2. 480 VAC Substation E7 is de-energized due to a fault. All other electrical buses are energized.
3. ERFIS is unavailable.
4. See Attachment 1 for the Containment parameter readings that are available on the RTGB.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed to determine Primary Containment water level per EOP-01-UG, Attachment 36. Determine the current region of operation (Safe/Unsafe) on Primary Containment Pressure Limit A (PCPL-A).

Page 8 of 12 Page 9 of 12 Page 10 of 12

Attachment 1 S

U P

P C

H A

M B

L E

V F

E E

T Page 11 of 12 Page 12 of 12

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE LESSON TITLE: CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE LESSON NUMBER: LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 REVISION NO: 0 Daniel Hulgin 09/06/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 09/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Hunter Morris Kyle Cooper Dwayne Wolf 09/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 09/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 09/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 1 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE RELATED TASKS:

K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

GEN 2.2.12 3.7/4.1 Knowledge of surveillance procedures.

REFERENCES:

2OI-03.2 T.S 3.4.4 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

Student may use calculator SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

Generic (Administrative)

SETUP INSTRUCTIONS None LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 2 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. This task will be performed on Unit 2.
2. Unit 2 is in MODE 1.
3. The Equipment Drain Sump was manually pumped to an integrator reading of 457620, and the pump stopped at 2000 on Sunday Nightshift.
4. The Floor Drain Sump was manually pumped to an integrator reading of 13944891, and the pump stopped at 2000 on Sunday Nightshift.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Control Room Supervisor to determine the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> leak rate for the equipment and floor drains, and the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> total leak rate to the drywell IAW Attachment 1, Drywell Leakage Calculation, of 2OI-03.2, Reactor Operator Daily Surveillance Report, for Sunday Nightshift at time 2000. If required, state any applicable LCOs which are NOT met.

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 3 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE INITIATING CUE:

SRO ONLY:

Identify the LATEST time Unit 2 is required to be in MODE 3.

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 4 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

TIME START: ___________

Step 1 - Calculate time interval from equipment drain manual pump at 2000 on Saturday.

Subtracts time equipment drain sump pump stops on 2000 Sunday (20) from time equipment drain sump pump stops on 2000 Saturday (20) for a value of 1440 minutes .

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 2 - Calculate difference in equipment drain integrator reading from manual pump at 2000 on Saturday.

Subtracts 2000 Saturday equipment drain integrator reading (423780) from 2000 Sunday equipment drain integrator reading (457620) for a value of 33840 gal .

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - Calculate 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> equipment drain leak rate .

Divides leakage (value from step 3) by time interval (value from step 2) for a value of 23.5 gpm.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 4 - Calculate time interval from floor drain manual pump at 2000 on Saturday.

Subtracts time floor drain sump pump stops on 2000 Sunday (20) from time floor drain sump pump stops on 2000 Saturday (20) for a value of 1440 minutes .

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 5 - Calculate difference in floor drain integrator reading from manual pump at 2000 on Saturday.

Subtracts 2000 Saturday floor drain integrator reading (13942587) from 2000 Sunday floor drain integrator reading (13944891) for a value of 2304 gal .

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 5 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE Step 6 - Calculate 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> equipment drain leak rate .

Divides leakage (value from step 6) by time interval (value from step 5) for a value of 1.6 gpm.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 7 - Calculate 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> total leak rate to drywell.

Adds value from step 4 and step 7 for a value of 25.1 gpm.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT NOTE: LCO 3.4.4 is NOT met based on 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> total leak rate exceeding the T.S. 3.4.4 limit Step 8 - Determine if LCO 3.4.4 is or is NOT met.

Determines that that LCO 3.4.4 is NOT met.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When the results for the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> floor drain, equipment drain, and 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> total leak rate to drywell have been recorded, and the determination of any applicable LCO has been completed then this JPM is complete for RO candidates.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 6 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE SRO Candidates ONLY:

NOTE: If the applicant has determined that LCO 3.4.4 is NOT met, then provide SRO initiating cue to applicant.

Step 9 - IAW Tech Spec LCO 3.4.4, identify the LATEST time Unit 2 is required to be in MODE 3.

Determines that entry into MODE 3 would be required no later than 1600 on Monday.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When the earliest time to MODE 3 has been determined, this JPM is complete for SRO candidates.

TIME COMPLETED _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 2 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 3 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 4 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 5 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 6 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 7 Critical Math Critical for JPM solution 8 Critical TS determination is Critical 9 Critical Time to MODE 3 TS implementation is critical.

REVISION

SUMMARY

0 New JPM (Provide sufficient detail for reviewers and evaluators to understand the scope of any technical and/or administrative changes).

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 7 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator Admin X Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 8 of 11 Rev.0

CALCULATE DRYWELL LEAKAGE RATE EXAM KEY DO NOT GIVE TO STUDENTS EXAM KEY DO NOT GIVE TO STUDENTS LOT-ADM-JP-201-D16 Page 9 of 11 Rev.0

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. This task will be performed on Unit 2.
2. Unit 2 is in MODE 1.
3. The Equipment Drain Sump was manually pumped to an integrator reading of 457620, and the pump stopped at 2000 on Sunday Nightshift.
4. The Floor Drain Sump was manually pumped to an integrator reading of 13944891, and the pump stopped at 2000 on Sunday Nightshift.

INITIATING CUE:

You are directed by the Control Room Supervisor to determine the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> leak rate for the equipment and floor drains, and the 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> total leak rate to the drywell IAW Attachment 1, Drywell Leakage Calculation, of 2OI-03.2, Reactor Operator Daily Surveillance Report, for Sunday Nightshift at time 2000. If required, state any applicable LCOs which are NOT met.

Page 10 of 11

INITIATING CUE:

SRO ONLY:

Identify the LATEST time Unit 2 is required to be in MODE 3.

Page 11 of 11

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE LESSON TITLE: CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

LESSON NUMBER: SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 REVISION NO: 1 Daniel Hulgin 09/06/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 09/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Dwayne Wolf Kyle Cooper 09/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 09/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 09/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 1 of 8 Rev.1

CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

RELATED TASKS:

344256B502 Direct initial emergency actions including emergency classification per 0PEP-02.1 K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

GEN 2.4.29 3.1/4.4 Knowledge of the Emergency Plan

REFERENCES:

0PEP-02.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

None SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

Admin - Emergency Procedures / Plan SETUP INSTRUCTIONS None SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 2 of 8 Rev.1

CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit One is operating at 100% power.
2. Unit Two is operating at 100% power with DG4 under clearance when the following event occurs (consider all items that exceed EAL thresholds occur at the same time).

Unit Two Event Description

  • A seismic event greater than the Operating Basis Earthquake results in a loss of the PBX Telephone System, Commercial Telephones, and NRC Emergency Telecommunications System
  • A Manual Scram is inserted, the Mode Switch is in Shutdown, ARI is initiated, and reactor power indicates 20%.
  • Driving rods IAW LEP-02, Alternate Control Rod Insertion, and SLC injection are in progress.
  • Current indications: reactor power is 1%, reactor water level maintained +60 to +90 inches, and reactor pressure is 945 psig on EHC.
  • NO radiological releases in progress, and NO indications of an onsite security event.

INITIATING CUE:

You are to evaluate the above event as the Control Room Site Emergency Coordinator (SEC) and determine the HIGHEST required classification and its EAL Identifier for Unit Two ONLY:

1. Write the required Classification and its associated EAL identifier in the table below.
2. Classification SHALL NOT be based on SEC judgment.
3. Raise your hand when complete to have the evaluator stop the evaluation time and collect your cue sheet This JPM is TIME CRITICAL.

CLASSIFICATION EAL IDENTIFIER(s)

SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 3 of 8 Rev.1

CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

PROMPT: Ensure a clock is visible for candidates. Announce and Write the Start Time on the board. Add 15 minutes to the Start Time and write that in the JPM Completion Time. If all candidates have not Declared a classification, this is the time to STOP all work, put pencils/pens down, and collect all remaining cue NOTE: Declaration of event must be made in 15 minutes from the Start Time.

TIME START: ___________

NOTE: Loss of PBX Telephone System, Commercial Telephones, and NRC Emergency Telecommunications System does not reach EAL classification threshold NOTE: Candidate may base the ALERT on SA8.1 if they determine the ATWS was a result of the earthquake. Critical Step is that the ALERT is based on EITHER SA8.1 or SA6.1 EITHER Step 2 OR 3 is critical.

Step 1 - Determine required Classification threshold and associated EAL Number(s).

o Alert - SA8.1

-The occurrence of any Table S-4 hazardous event (Seismic event).

AND EITHER

-Event damage has caused indications of degraded performance in at least one train of a safety system needed for the current operating mode (ATWS).

-The event has caused visible damage to a safety system component or structure needed for the current operating mode.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 4 of 8 Rev.1

CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

Step 2 - Determine required Classification threshold and associated EAL Number(s).

o Alert - SA6.1

-An automatic or manual scram fails to reduce reactor power <2% (APRM downscale).

AND

-Manual scram actions taken at the reactor control console (Manual PBs, Mode Switch, ARI) are not successful in shutting down the reactor as indicated by reactor power > 2% (note 8)

Note 8: A manual scram action is any operator action, or set of actions, which causes the control rods to be rapidly inserted into the core, and does not include manually driving control rods or boron injection strategies.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT Step 3 - Classification made within required the required time (Declaration Time minus Start Time < 15 minutes).

o Classification declared < 15 minutes of Start Time.

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When the event is classified with applicable EAL identifier(s) in the table, this JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED: _____________

COLLECT AND CONTROL ALL JPM EXAM MATERIALS FOR EXAM SECURITY.

SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 5 of 8 Rev.1

CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1or 2 Critical Highest EAL classification and EAL designator 3 Critical Time to declare is critical REVISION

SUMMARY

1 Incorporated new format.

Modified initial conditions as follows:

  • Changed Voicenet to PBX
  • Changed reactor power to 1% following SLC and driving rods Changed initiating cue to include EAL identifier(s) instead of EAL identifier Changed step 1 to reflect new standard instead of obtaining a procedure Step 2 EAL criteria updated to new PEP2.1 criteria Step 3 EAL criteria updated to new PEP2.1 criteria. This is now a critical step. Its EAL designation is now part of the highest classification Step 4 3 EAL criteria updated to new PEP2.1 criteria. This is now an ALERT and no longer a SAE Removed take a minute (step 1) and reordered steps.

0 New JPM (Provide sufficient detail for reviewers and evaluators to understand the scope of any technical and/or administrative changes).

SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 6 of 8 Rev.1

CLASSIFY AN EMERGENCY PER PEP-02.1.

Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate).

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator Admin X Time Critical: Yes X No Time Limit 15 min Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

SOT-ADM-JP-301-A16 Page 7 of 8 Rev.1

This JPM is TIME CRITICAL.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. Unit One is operating at 100% power.
2. Unit Two is operating at 100% power with DG4 under clearance when the following event occurs (consider all items that exceed EAL thresholds occur at the same time).

Unit Two Event Description

  • A seismic event greater than the Operating Basis Earthquake results in a loss of the PBX Telephone System, Commercial Telephones, and NRC Emergency Telecommunications System
  • A Manual Scram is inserted, the Mode Switch is in Shutdown, ARI is initiated, and reactor power indicates 20%.
  • Driving rods IAW LEP-02, Alternate Control Rod Insertion, and SLC injection are in progress.
  • Current indications: reactor power is 1%, reactor water level maintained +60 to +90 inches, and reactor pressure is 945 psig on EHC.
  • NO radiological releases in progress, and NO indications of an onsite security event.

INITIATING CUE:

You are to evaluate the above event as the Control Room Site Emergency Coordinator (SEC) and determine the HIGHEST required classification and its EAL Identifier for Unit Two ONLY:

1. Write the required Classification and its associated EAL identifier in the table below.
2. Classification SHALL NOT be based on SEC judgment.
3. Raise your hand when complete to have the evaluator stop the evaluation time and collect your cue sheet CLASSIFICATION EAL IDENTIFIER This JPM is TIME CRITICAL.

Page 8 of 8

DUKE ENERGY BRUNSWICK TRAINING SECTION JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE LESSON TITLE: Determine Stay Time Limitations in High Radiation Areas LESSON NUMBER: LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 REVISION NO: 3 Daniel Hulgin 09/06/16 PREPARER / DATE Bob Bolin 09/06/16 TECHNICAL REVIEWER / DATE Hunter Morris Kyle Cooper 09/06/16 VALIDATOR / DATE Craig Oliver 09/22/16 LINE SUPERVISOR / DATE Ed Rau 09/27/16 TRAINING SUPERVISION APPROVAL / DATE LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 Page 1 of 8 Rev 3

Determine Stay Time Limitations in High Radiation Areas RELATED TASKS:

None K/A REFERENCE AND IMPORTANCE RATING:

Generic 2.3.4 3.2/3.7 Knowledge of Radiation Exposure Limits under normal or emergency conditions Generic 2.3.7 3.5/3/6 Ability to comply with radiation work permit requirements during normal and abnormal conditions

REFERENCES:

PD-RP-ALL-0001, Radiation Worker Responsibilities TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT:

Calculator Radiation Survey Map of 50 Reactor Building SAFETY FUNCTION (from NUREG 1123, Rev. 2, Supp. 1):

A.3 Radiation Control SETUP INSTRUCTIONS None LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 Page 2 of 8 Rev 3

Determine Stay Time Limitations in High Radiation Areas SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:

1. None EVALUATOR NOTES: (Do not read to performer)
1. The applicable procedure section WILL NOT be provided to the trainee.
2. Prior to the first JPM of the JPM set, provide the JPM briefing contained in NUREG-1021, Appendix E, or similar briefing (for non-regulated exams) to the trainee(s).
3. This JPM may be performed on Unit 1 or Unit 2 as selected by the evaluator. Survey map must reflect correct unit.
4. Critical Step Basis a) Prevents Task Completion b) May Result in Equipment Damage c) Affects Public Health and Safety d) Could Result in Personal Injury Read the following to the JPM performer.

TASK CONDITIONS:

Two workers will be performing a lube check and coupling alignment on the Unit 2 RWCU Pump 2A.

Worker #1 has accumulated 800 mrem this year.

Worker #2 has accumulated 970 mrem this year.

The elevator is out of service The following times for each worker have been estimated for performance of the job.

1. Traversing Southeast stairwell 20 - 50 Rx Bldg: 6 minutes
2. Staging time in access area directly outside the RWCU room: 45 minutes
3. Staging time in area directly inside room access door: 20 minutes
4. Work time at the A RWCU pump: 2.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />
5. Following completion of the job, an additional 60 mrem per worker will be received during de-staging activities and transit back to the maintenance shop.

INITIATING CUE:

Using the information above and the provided radiological survey using best ALARA practices:

1. Determine the total dose accumulated for each worker. (Assume the same task times for both workers).
2. Determine if the Duke Fleet administrative dose limits will be exceeded.

LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 Page 3 of 8 Rev 3

Determine Stay Time Limitations in High Radiation Areas PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST NOTE: Sequence is assumed unless otherwise indicated, comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

TIME START ___________

Step 1 - Determines dose for each worker as follows:

a. Traversing SE stairwell 20 - 50 Rx Bldg (SE is the lowest dose stairwell)

(6 min) 0.1 Hr X 5 mr/hr = 0.5 mrem Estimate 0.5 mrem dose accumulation

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT
b. Staging time in access area directly outside the RWCU room (45 min) 0.75 Hr X 20 mr/hr = 15 mrem Estimate 15 mrem dose accumulation
    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT
c. Staging time in area directly inside room access door (20 min) 0.33 Hr X 80 mr/hr = 26.7 mrem Estimates dose accumulation within the acceptable range of 26 to 27 mrem.
    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT
d. Work time at the A RWCU pump 2.5 Hrs X 200 mr/hr = 500 mrem Estimate 500 millirem dose accumulation
    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT NOTE: An additional 60 mr will be accumulated once the job is done for de-staging activities.
e. Total = 0.5 + 15 + 26.7 + 500 + 60 = 602.2 mrem.

Determines Total to be within the acceptable range of 601 to 603 mrem

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 Page 4 of 8 Rev 3

Determine Stay Time Limitations in High Radiation Areas Step 2 - Determines that neither worker would exceed the Brunswick administrative limit of 2 REM per calendar year if the estimated dose were accumulated.

Worker #1: 800 mr + 602.2 mr = 1402.2 mr (< 2R limit). Acceptable range 1401 to 1403 mr Worker #2: 970 mr + 602.2 mr = 1572.2 mr (< 2R limit). Acceptable range 1571 to 1573 mr

    • CRITICAL STEP** SAT/UNSAT TERMINATING CUE: When the total dose for each worker has been determined and the administrative limits addressed, the JPM is complete.

TIME COMPLETED:

NOTE: Comments required for any step evaluated as UNSAT.

Step Critical / Not Critical Reason 1a Critical Each calculation is critical to determine total dose for personnel safety.

1b Critical Each calculation is critical to determine total dose.

1c Critical Each calculation is critical to determine total dose.

1d Critical Each calculation is critical to determine total dose.

1e Critical Each calculation is critical to determine total dose.

2 Critical Total calculation and knowledge of Admin Dose Limit is required to complete JPM.

REVISION

SUMMARY

3 Removed take a minute-step 1. Reordered steps 2 Revised to new JPM Template Revised times so that calculations are different than previous versions.

1 Revised to new JPM Template, Revision 3.

No technical changes.

LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 Page 5 of 8 Rev 3

Determine Stay Time Limitations in High Radiation Areas Validation Time: 15 Minutes (approximate)

Time Taken: ____ Minutes APPLICABLE METHOD OF TESTING Performance: Simulate Actual X Unit: 2 Setting: In-Plant Simulator Admin X Time Critical: Yes No X Time Limit N/A Alternate Path: Yes No X EVALUATION Performer:

JPM: Pass Fail Remedial Training Required: Yes No Comments:

Comments reviewed with Performer Evaluator Signature: Date:

LOT-ADM-JP-102-A03 Page 6 of 8 Rev 3

TASK CONDITIONS:

Two workers will be performing a lube check and coupling alignment on the Unit 2 RWCU Pump 2A.

Worker #1 has accumulated 800 mrem this year.

Worker #2 has accumulated 970 mrem this year.

The elevator is out of service The following times for each worker have been estimated for performance of the job.

1. Traversing Southeast stairwell 20 - 50 Rx Bldg: 6 minutes
2. Staging time in access area directly outside the RWCU room: 45 minutes
3. Staging time in area directly inside room access door: 20 minutes
4. Work time at the A RWCU pump: 2.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />
5. Following completion of the job, an additional 60 mrem per worker will be received during de-staging activities and transit back to the maintenance shop.

INITIATING CUE:

Using the information above and the provided radiological survey using best ALARA practices:

1. Determine the total dose accumulated for each worker. (Assume the same task times for each worker).
2. Determine if the Duke Fleet administrative dose limits will be exceeded.

Results:

Page 7 of 8